Category: General

Every country certainly has a central bank where the task of the bank is to maintain the stability of the
currency of a country. Then, actually, what is meant by a central bank? You can
find the answer in this article, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Central Bank

A bank is a place where a person or group of people save their money in a safer, more organized and of
course useful place. Every country certainly has a central bank, where the central bank becomes
a financial institution or agency that is responsible for making and implementing monetary policy to create
stable economic activity in a country.

Some of the tasks of the central bank include maintaining the stability of currency values, inflation
rates, and others related to a country’s financial system. In Indonesia, the duties and
functions of the central bank are carried out by Bank Indonesia. Bank Indonesia is an
independent government-owned institution that has been established since 1953.

The formation of Bank Indonesia was based on the Basic Bank Indonesia Act on July 1, 1953. As for the
initiator, namely the first President of Indonesia, Ir. Soekarno founded this Indonesian bank
to nationalize everything about banking in Indonesia. So, Bank Indonesia is the parent bank of
all banks in Indonesia.

Bank Indonesia is committed to achieving and maintaining stability in the value of the rupiah through the
management of the Monetary, Payment System and Financial System Stability sectors. The
management of these three fields is implemented through policies issued by Bank Indonesia and operated
through various instruments in accordance with the related task areas.

This institution is owned by the government, and has the duty to ensure that the activities of financial
institutions within the country can improve and stabilize the country’s economy nationally.
According to Law No. 23 of 1999, Bank Indonesia is an independent institution established with the
aim of maintaining stability in the value of the rupiah, both the exchange rate for goods and services and
for foreign currencies.

Bank Indonesia is also a legal entity. Not only that, the central bank is also one of the
learning resources for banks, in order to carry out community programs regarding the fields of banking
duties in Indonesia.

History of Bank Indonesia

Sinaumed’s, before the existence of Bank Indonesia, all activities in managing monetary policy were still centered
on De Javasche Bank which was a heritage from the Netherlands since around 1800. After Indonesian
independence, the Indonesian economy still used the structure owned by De Java Bank.

Because a system like this is considered not suitable for Indonesia in the future, the public’s desire arises to
have an institution that is more compatible with national interests in regulating monetary policy.

In general, De Java Bank and Bank Indonesia have the same duties. In 1968, the Law on
the Central Bank was issued which regulated the duties of Bank Indonesia and how this institution was
separated from other banks that usually fulfilled commercial functions.

Bank Indonesia also cooperates with the government as a development agent. Bank Indonesia also
participates in promoting smooth production and economic development to improve the people’s standard of
living.

After the crisis that occurred in 1998, the government set the sole objective of Bank Indonesia.
Bank Indonesia’s work is focused on maintaining the stability of the value of the Rupiah.
However, in 2008 the regulation was again amended through Perppu No. 2 of 2008. It was stated that
Bank Indonesia also had the function of increasing the resilience of the Indonesian banking system so that
it would be able to withstand the global crisis that year.

Bank Indonesia also continues to develop and exist today. Apart from Bank Indonesia, there is
also the Financial Services Authority (OJK) which carries out its duties as a supervisor of banking
activities, a task previously carried out by BI.

Central Bank Duties

Bank Indonesia is an institution that holds monetary authority. The task of the central bank
is to make and carry out a country’s monetary policy in order to achieve and maintain currency
stability.

These policies can influence and consider many things, for example the rate of inflation, economic
development, and so on. There are monetary policies for the short, medium and long term.
In Indonesia, these tasks are carried out by the central bank, namely Bank Indonesia.
In addition, there are several other duties of Bank Indonesia, namely:

1. Establish and Implement Monetary Policy

Bank Indonesia makes monetary policy and implements it to control the amount of money circulating in
society. This is very important because the price of products in the form of goods and services
remains under control and is in accordance with people’s purchasing power.

The monetary policy must aim to encourage the growth of the national economy. Therefore, Bank
Indonesia usually cooperates with the government, so that the policy is in accordance with other economic
and fiscal policies as a support.

2. Regulate and Maintain the Smooth
Payment System

There are two payment systems within the central bank, namely Bank Indonesia as we know it, namely the cash
payment system and the non-cash payment system.

If in the past the use of non-cash payment systems was still limited, now technology has made it easier for us to
make non-cash transactions only through gadgets . Playing a full role and developing a
series of standards, rules, procedures and agreements on this payment system is the task of the central
bank.

3. Manage and Supervise the Bank

The central bank’s next task is to regulate and supervise the banks under it. In this case,
Bank Indonesia is in charge of regulating and supervising the banks under it.

4. Maintaining Financial System Stability

The task of the central bank is to carry out overall supervision of a country’s economic activity.
This aims to maintain the stability of the financial system. Macroprudential policies
are also very important to monitor.

Macroprudential policy is a policy established to limit the costs and risks of a crisis, so that the balance of
the financial system is maintained.

Authority of Bank Indonesia

In the context of establishing and implementing monetary policy, Bank Indonesia has the authority to:

1. Setting monetary targets by taking into account the inflation rate target, which is set.

1. Carry out monetary control by using methods, which include but are not limited to:

1. Open market operations in the money market, both rupiah and foreign currency.

1. Determination of the discount rate. Discounts are deductions or interest that must be
   paid by people, who sell notes (trade notes) that are cashed prematurely.

1. Determination of minimum mandatory reserves.

1. Credit or financing arrangements.

Legal Basis for the Establishment of Bank Indonesia

The establishment of Bank Indonesia was preceded by the nationalization process of De Javasche Bank NV
(DJB) which was carried out in December 1951 based on Law (UU) Number 24 of 1951 concerning the
Nationalization of De Javasche Bank NV. After DJB was nationalized, the Republic of Indonesia
established Bank Indonesia based on Law Number 11 of 1953 concerning the Stipulation of the Basic Bank
Indonesia Law which was ratified on 19 May 1953, announced on 2 June 1953 and came into force on 1 July
1953.

The date of entry into force of the Act is also commemorated as the birthday of Bank Indonesia.
In addition, the law stated that Bank Indonesia was established to act as Indonesia’s central bank.
In its journey, the role of Indonesian banks has changed in accordance with economic, social and
political dynamics both nationally and globally.

In line with this, the law which became the legal basis for the existence of Bank Indonesia underwent
changes and improvements. The current law which forms the legal basis for Bank Indonesia is Law
Number 23 of 1999 concerning Bank Indonesia (which has been amended several times, most recently by Law No.
6 of 2009).

Not only at the statutory level, but fundamental changes have also occurred at the constitutional level.
The Fourth Amendment to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia (UUD 1945), inserts a
new article, 23D, which reads, “The state has a central bank whose composition, position, authority,
responsibility and independence are regulated by law.”

Status and Position of Bank Indonesia

1. As an Independent State Institution

A new chapter in the history of Bank Indonesia as an independent Central Bank began when a new law, namely
Law no. 23/1999 concerning Bank Indonesia, declared effective on 17 May 1999.

This law gives status and position as an independent state institution and free from interference from the
government or other parties. As an independent state institution, Bank Indonesia has full
autonomy in formulating and implementing each of its duties and authorities as stipulated in this
law.

Outsiders are not justified in interfering with the implementation of Bank Indonesia’s duties and Bank
Indonesia is also obliged to refuse or ignore intervention in any form from any party. To
further guarantee this independence, this law has given a special position to Bank Indonesia within the
constitutional structure of the Republic of Indonesia.

As an independent state institution, the position of Bank Indonesia is not equal to that of the State
Higher Institutions. Besides that, the position of Bank Indonesia is also not the same as the
Department, because the position of Bank Indonesia is outside the Government.

This special status and position is required so that Bank Indonesia can carry out its role and function as a
monetary authority more effectively and efficiently.

2. As a Legal Entity

The status of Bank Indonesia, both as a public legal entity and as a private legal entity, is stipulated by
law. As a public legal entity, Bank Indonesia has the authority to stipulate legal regulations
which are the implementation of laws that are binding on the entire public at large in accordance with their
duties and authorities.

So, as a civil legal entity, Bank Indonesia can act for and on behalf of itself both inside and outside the
court.

Central Bank Functions

Bank Indonesia as the central bank in Indonesia also has several functions that complement the tasks we
have discussed previously. In the monetary structure, the function of the central bank is to
control the circulation of money. The following functions of the central bank are as follows,
namely:

1. Circulation Bank

The function of the central bank is the holder of the sole right (octroation right) in the circulation of
banknotes and coins as legal means of payment. This was determined in order to avoid
discrepancies in the price of different currency values ​​for each region.

2. Banker’s Bank, Government Agents and Advisors

As a banker, the function of the central bank in Indonesia is to carry out transactions related to buying
and selling foreign exchange. Then Bank Indonesia became the institution that received tax
payments from the government and also assisted government payments from the center to the regions.

As a banker, Bank Indonesia and Merta aim to help circulate government-owned securities and help analyze
national economic data. As an agent and advisory bank for the government, Bank Indonesia’s
function is to manage and manage all administration related to national debts.

In addition, Bank Indonesia must provide interest payment services on these debts. Bank
Indonesia also provides advice and information regarding the current state of the money market and capital
market to the government. The function of the central bank is to banker the various banks.
This means that the central bank is a source of funds for other banks.

3. Final Level Lenders

The central bank or Bank Indonesia is the lender at the last level, known as the lender of last resort.
This means that the central bank can provide loans to lower banks in the form of emergency
liquidity credit facilities.

4. Establish and Implement Monetary Policy

Monetary policy is a decision taken in order to support economic activity through various matters related
to determining the amount of money circulating in society. The function of the central bank is
to set and implement monetary policy.

The authorities of the central bank relating to the setting and implementation of monetary policy are:

• Setting discount rates, minimum reserves of commercial banks, arranging credit or financing.
• Setting monetary targets by taking into account the target inflation rate.
• Carry out monetary control without being limited to open market operations in the money market, both in the
  form of rupiah and foreign currency.
• Establish and implement monetary policy to achieve and maintain stability in the value of the rupiah.

5. Manage and Maintain the Smooth Payment
System

The next function of the central bank is to facilitate payment traffic. Bank Indonesia, in
this case, organizes clearing and duplicates currency circulating between commercial banks.

In order to carry out its function of regulating and maintaining payment traffic, Bank Indonesia has
received several authorities from the government. One of these powers is to give approvals and
permits, as well as carry out the operation of various payment system services.

Therefore, Bank Indonesia must require payment system service providers to submit reports on their
activities. Bank Indonesia also has the authority to determine the use of exchange/payment
instruments. One of the other functions of the central bank is to regulate and maintain the
smooth operation of the payment system.

In order to carry out this function, the authority of the central bank includes:

• Determine the use of tools or payment instruments.
• Carry out and provide approval and permits for the operation of payment system services.
• Requiring payment system service providers to submit reports on their activities.
• The central bank is the only institution authorized to issue and circulate rupiah currency and revoke,
  withdraw and destroy money from circulation.

6. Maintaining Financial System Stability

Maintaining financial system stability is the next task of Bank Indonesia, which is a condition that allows the
national financial system to function effectively and efficiently and is able to withstand internal and external
vulnerabilities.

So that the allocation of sources of funding or financing can contribute to the growth and stability of the
national economy. A financial system that is not functioning properly will reduce the
effectiveness of monetary policy, disrupt the smooth running of economic activities and result in a slowdown
in economic growth.

The central bank or Bank Indonesia also has an interest in maintaining financial system stability related to its
function as a Lender of Last Resort or LoLR, namely the authority authorized to provide liquidity during a
crisis.

Bank Indonesia in exercising its authority to maintain financial system stability, the central bank has a legal
umbrella, namely:

• Law Number 21 of 2011 concerning the Financial Services Authority.
• Law Number 9 of 2016 concerning Prevention and Management of Financial System Crisis.
• Bank Indonesia Regulation Number 16/11/PBI/2014 concerning Macroprudential Regulation and Supervision.

7. Maintain State Treasury Reserves

In this case, the function of the central bank is not only cash reserves from commercial banks but also
foreign exchange. Bank Indonesia can increase or decrease the amount of money circulating in
society.

This is done by increasing or decreasing the minimum reserves that must be met by commercial banks in
granting credit and circulating money. By increasing the state treasury reserves, Bank
Indonesia intends to reduce the amount of money in circulation.

Meanwhile, reducing cash reserves means that the central bank wants to increase the amount of money in
circulation. This is interconnected because the higher the cash reserve, the bank of course has
to hold more money and can’t just circulate it.

Bank Indonesia does not only function as an internal reserve, namely managing domestic money circulation.
This central bank also functions as an external reserve, which regulates all matters related to
international payments.

In addition to the above functions, Bank Indonesia also used to supervise banks and various companies
engaged in the financial sector. However, now this task has shifted to the authority of the
Financial Services Authority (OJK).

This is a discussion of the meaning and duties of the central bank. Hopefully all the
discussion above is useful as well as add to your insight. Sinaumed’s can get more knowledge about
the duties of a central bank by reading books available at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. Reading lots of books and articles
will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Know the Differences between Climate and Weather, Their Roles and Elements –

Weather is a state of the air at a time and in a certain area that is relatively narrow and for a short period of time.

Weather is formed from a combination of weather elements and the duration of weather can be only a few hours. For example: morning, afternoon or evening, and conditions can vary for each place and every hour.

Whereas

climate is the average weather condition within one year which the investigation is carried out for a long time (minimum 30 years) and covers a large area.

Check out a more complete explanation about the two below, Sinaumed’s!

Definition of Climate and Weather

Weather is a condition or state of the air that occurs in an area or region within a certain period of time.

The weather can change in a short time, which is only a few hours and is marked by the difference between day and night.

Weather occurs because of differences in temperature and humidity that occur between one place and another. The science used to study the weather is meteorology. In Indonesia, there is an agency that specifically observes the weather, namely the Meteorology, Climatology and Geophysics Agency (BMKG) based in Jakarta.

BMKG’s duty is to record and observe air activity, including temperature and air pressure, rainfall, wind and cloud activity. Apart from being based in Jakarta, BMKG also has weather monitoring stations spread throughout Indonesia.

Climate is the condition or condition of the average weather in a large area. The climate itself is determined based on the calculation of time which usually reaches 11 years to 30 years.

The climate in an area is influenced by the geographic location and topography of the area, which means that climate differences in an area are influenced by the position of the sun relative to that area on the planet Earth.

The sun is a source of energy as well as climate control for the earth, so that the relative position of the sun can cause air movement and ocean currents.

The science that studies climate is climatology.

 

Examples of Weather and Climate in Everyday Life

• Examples of weather in everyday life: The weather in the morning in Yogyakarta is rainy and the weather in the afternoon is expected to be sunny. The afternoon weather in Jakarta is cloudy, but suddenly the weather becomes hot
• Examples of climate in everyday life: There are differences in tropical and subtropical climates. Indonesia and countries located at equatorial latitudes have a tropical climate. Countries with subtropical climates such as Japan and South Korea have winter. So, that’s a discussion about the differences in weather and climate along with explanations and examples. Hopefully this article is useful.

Differences in Climate and Weather

• The area coverage and weather observations are narrower and limited, while the area coverage and climate observations are wider.
• Time to observe the weather in an area can be done for 24 hours, while climate observations are made over a period of 11-30 years.
• Weather has a fast changing and unstable nature, while climate has a stable and difficult to change nature.
• Predictions about the weather are easy to do, while climate forecasts are difficult.

There are many symptoms that we can encounter, including: 1. Fog Symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor near the surface of the ground or cold water. Its height reaches 500 meters. 2. Dew Symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor on the surface of the soil, grass and leaves at night because of the humidity in the air, but there is no wind blowing. 3. El Nino A symptom of an increase in Pacific Ocean temperature that occurs around December. 4. La Nina Symptoms that occur after El Nino weakens due to a decrease in the temperature of the Pacific Ocean around January.

Various causes of climate change and ways we can do to stop it can be found in the book Why? Climate Change – Climate Change by delivering interesting and fun information.

 

Elements of Climate and Weather

1. sunlight,
2. temperature,
3. humidity,
4. air pressure,
5. wind,
6. rainfall and
7. cloud.

Knowledge of the elements of weather and climate is very useful for everyday life, such as agriculture, communication, aviation, shipping and trade. The following is an explanation of the elements of weather and climate:

Sunlight

The first element of weather and climate is sunlight. The sun is the center of the solar system, where all the planets in the solar system revolve around the sun. The process of the planet earth rotating on its axis is called rotation, while the process of the earth revolving around the sun is known as revolution. These two things, both the rotation and revolution of the earth affect weather and climate change.

The sun will radiate its rays to all corners of the earth with the help of rotation and revolution processes, which affect the weather and climate. The various impacts of climate change and weather are also discussed in the book Educomics Plants Vs Zombies: Weather and Climate which is packaged through illustrations so that it is easier to understand.

Temperature

Temperature or air temperature is the degree of heat from molecular activity in the atmosphere or air that arises due to the sun’s heat radiation received by the earth. The level of heat reception by the earth is influenced by several factors, including:

• Angle of incidence of sunlight, namely the angle formed by the surface of the earth with the direction of arrival of sunlight.
• The smaller the angle of incidence of sunlight, the less heat is received by the earth compared to the angle that is perpendicular.
• The longer the sun shines, the longer the sun shines, the more heat the earth receives.
• The condition of the earth’s surface (land and sea), the land quickly receives heat and quickly releases it, while the nature of the ocean is the opposite of the nature of the land. Many at least clouds, the thickness of the clouds affects the heat received by the earth.
• The more or thicker the clouds, the less heat the earth receives. The distribution of temperature or air temperature can be divided into two, namely horizontal and vertical distribution.

Wind

The next element of weather and climate is wind. Wind is moving air caused by differences in temperature in an area. Differences in temperature on earth cause changes in air pressure and cause wind. The air pressure in an area will increase if the temperature is low, and vice versa.

Cloud

The next element of weather and climate is clouds. Clouds are water droplets or fine ice crystals in the atmosphere that gather together. The air from the rising surface of the earth will cool, thereby increasing the humidity of the air. The air will reach a saturation point with water and become clouds when it reaches a certain height. The number of clouds is strongly influenced by differences in seasons, for example in the dry season the number of clouds is only a few, and conversely in the rainy season the number of clouds will increase.

air humidity

Air humidity is another element of weather and climate. Air humidity is the amount of water vapor present in the air. Air humidity affects the deposition of water in the air which can take the form of clouds, fog, dew and rain. Air humidity consists of two kinds, namely relative humidity and absolute humidity. Air humidity in an area can be measured using a tool called hydrography.

Rainfall

The last element of weather and climate is rainfall. Rainfall is the level of rain intensity in an area. The process of rain begins with the evaporation of water in water sources, namely rivers, lakes, seas and oceans. The water vapor rises into the air and is carried higher by the wind and turns into clouds. Then the cloud will release its water content when it reaches the saturation point. The direction of rain somewhere is measured with an instrument called an obbrometer.

Electricity in the Air

Electricity in the Air That is electricity that is in the atmosphere due to natural phenomena. Generally, this electricity comes from rainstorms with lots of thunder or lightning.

Symptoms encountered in the weather and climate itself include fog (symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor near the surface of the ground or cold water. The altitude reaches 500 meters), dew (symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor on the surface of the ground, grass, and leaves at night due to humidity, but no wind blowing), El Nino (Symptoms of an increase in Pacific Ocean temperature that occurs around December), La Nina (Symptoms that occur after El Nino weakens due to a decrease in Pacific Ocean temperature around December January).

Also find further discussion in the book Fiscal Policy, Climate Change, and Development Sustainability.

 

The Role of Climate and Weather

The Role of Climate in Agriculture

In Indonesia, where the majority of the population is an agrarian society engaged in the agricultural sector, climate characteristics such as temperature, rainfall, and seasons greatly influence their lives. Climatic factors such as weather and climate are really considered in developing agriculture.

Conditions of temperature, rainfall and seasonal patterns determine the suitability and optimization of agricultural crop cultivation. Likewise in the fisheries or maritime sector , climatic factors such as weather, temperature, and season are very influential, both for fishermen and for the fish to be caught. In general, fishermen really understand weather conditions, especially those related to wind and seasons.

With the knowledge they have, they know when the west monsoons and east monsoons come. When the west wind blows they are very careful in catching fish in the sea. Because the west wind season often causes big waves that endanger them.

And they also know about natural signs such as a big storm is coming, so they will not go down to the sea to catch fish.

 

The Role of Climate in the Field of Transportation

Weather and climate factors have a big role in the field of transportation. Such as weather, temperature, wind direction and speed, clouds, and fog greatly affect the smooth flight path.

Besides affecting aviation, weather and climate factors also affect sea transportation. Such as wind direction and speed, wave height, storms and others.

The Role of Climate for Telecommunications

Weather and climate factors also affect the telecommunication sector. Such as wind currents can be used to communicate between regions using wind telephones. Of course, you already know that weather and climate are the result of processes that occur in the atmosphere or air layers.

The layer of air that envelops the earth consists of several layers, among which is the ionosphere. This layer contains ionized particles that are electrically charged. With this ionosphere layer, radio and television broadcasts can be heard and seen everywhere.

The Role of Climate for Tourism

Weather and climate factors also affect the tourism sector. Such as sunny weather, lots of sunlight, wind speed, cool air, dry, hot, and so on greatly affect the implementation of tours, both land and sea tourism. With the conditions as mentioned, the implementation of tourism will be increasingly enjoyed.

Book Recommendations Regarding Differences in Climate and Weather

 

Smart Science Series: Weather and Life – It’s Time to Travel

Geumbi and Somi are going on a field trip. They were looking forward to this field trip so they really hoped that it wouldn’t rain. To predict the weather, they also tried a myth from Japan, namely throwing shoes high and seeing their position when they fall to the ground. Can this myth be trusted? Is there a scientific way to know the weather forecast?

Climate Change Science

This book consists of 6 chapters containing explanations of the phenomenon of global climate change and its implications.

1. The first chapter provides an explanation of the planetary energy flows.
2. The second chapter discusses the greenhouse gases that play a dominant role in increasing the average temperature of the earth’s surface, namely carbon dioxide (CO2) and methane (CH4).
3. The third chapter describes the conditions of climate fluctuations in the past obtained from observations of ice rocks.
4. The fourth chapter presents a compilation of the findings of experts regarding the changes observed over the last few decades, which indicate the effects of post-industrial revolution climate change.
5. The fifth and sixth chapters explain the efforts that can be made on an individual and global scale to slow down the negative impacts of climate change.
6. Apart from that, there is also an annex which contains examples of cases and methods of analysis, as well as laws and regulations regarding the environment. Written with the aim of forming a basic framework for understanding the phenomenon of climate change and its impacts, which is structured in a logical sequence and language that is easy to understand, and is based on reliable scientific sources.

This book, apart from being a reference in climate change courses, is also expected to be able to encourage various parties to participate in reducing the impacts that may occur as a result of climate change.

why? Climate Change – Climate Change

Animals are endangered, and ultimately our lives are also threatened. This book tells about the causes of climate change and the ways we can do to stop it. With small efforts that we can do together, the Earth will be saved.

Other Articles Related to Differences in Climate and Weather

The difference between Direct and Indirect Investment – ​​Investment is one way to get big profits while protecting assets in the long term. However, many people are still confused about choosing between direct and indirect investment.

Before knowing the difference between the two, Sinaumed’s must first determine goals, prepare funds, and understand investment risks. To make it easier for Sinaumed’s to choose, see the complete discussion regarding direct and indirect investment in the following article.

What is Direct Investment?

The government is trying to make investments that are conducive to increasing capital flows which have an impact on resources and increasing economic growth, the exchange rate of the rupiah against the dollar and interest rates.

Investment in Indonesia can be carried out through direct investment or called Foreign Direct Investment (FDI). According to Krugman in Sarwedi’s journal entitled “Foreign Direct Investment in Indonesia and the Factors Affecting It”, the notion of foreign direct investment is international capital flows where companies from one country establish or expand their companies in other countries. So that there is not only a transfer of resources, but also a transfer of control over companies abroad.

Direct investment is investment in factors of production or assets to do business. For example investment in fisheries, plantations, factories, shops, and other types of businesses. In general, in everyday conversation this type of investment is also referred to as investing in real assets or investments that are easy to see and clearly visible.

This direct investment provides a large multiplier effect for the wider community. This direct investment will have a backward impact, in the form of business input, or in the future, in the form of business output which is input for other businesses.

According to Noor in his book entitled “Managerial Economics”, the notion of foreign direct investment is investment in assets or factors of production to conduct business or business abroad. Investments like this, in general, have a medium or long term nature and have the only goal of gaining profit or profit.

In Article 7 paragraph (2) Presidential Regulation Number 10 of 2021 Concerning Investment Business Fields, foreign investment is required to be in the form of a PT:

1. The flow of foreign direct investment has several advantages, namely:
2. Capital flows are able to reduce the risk of capital ownership by diversifying through investments;
3. Global integration of capital markets can provide the best spread in the formation of corporate governance, accounting rules, and legality, and
4. The global mobility of capital limits the ability of governments to create wrong policies.

Direct Investment Advantages

• Investments made directly can be made in the long term. This means that it can be up to several years in the future and can even be passed on to posterity if it is still possible.
• Someone who invests directly can fully control the portfolio they have. This control can be carried out in order to carry out the buying and or selling process according to his wishes.
• More attractive to many people, despite having a varied risk profile. Usually this big risk can be overcome by only buying several investment instruments or products that are stable or recognized.
• The ability of an investor to invest can make achievements run well. You can even get bigger profits in a fairly short period of time.

Disadvantages of Direct Investment

• Doing analysis on investment instruments such as stocks can be said to be quite a difficult job. If you make a mistake, it can cause your capital to disappear quickly.
• Not everyone has the free time to do analysis and know which stocks can be purchased and have the potential to provide benefits.
• Wrong decisions taken in investing, both sales and purchases, can cause losses in large numbers.
• Managing a portfolio of various types of investment instruments will not be easy so some people often make mistakes because not all of them can be checked one by one.

Types of Direct Investment

To start direct investment, there are 2 types of investment to choose from.

1. Investments to be traded

1. This type of investment can be traded to other people at a certain time which has a fairly increased value. The types of investments that can be traded are:
2. Gold and diamonds
3. Stocks or products in the capital market
4. Land, shop houses and various types of property
5. Products on the money market

2. Investments are not for sale

Types of investment that cannot be traded are bank deposits and savings.

Then, What Is Indirect Investment?

Indirect investment is a type of investment where investors can invest but are not directly involved in the buying and selling process and also its management.

In indirect investment activities, Sinaumed’s simply gives trust to business entities or companies to manage the various assets that Sinaumed’s has. This type of investment is generally a short-term investment and has the goal of getting the maximum profit in a short period of time.

It is called a short-term investment because generally investors will only buy and sell assets they own in a relatively short period of time, so it is very dependent on fluctuations in the value of the assets they want to trade.

Indirect Investment Advantages

• Investment decisions will be implemented by the investment management team or investment manager. This decision has been done so well that the chances of making a mistake are very low.
• An investor can enjoy his free time because he doesn’t need to learn about various things related to stocks. Everything will be managed professionally by the investment manager.
• The risk of making a mistake in choosing or deciding on an investment is very small and the opportunity to make a profit is very large for all investors.
• Most are safe so the risk of getting a loss is very small. Once for those who are beginners and don’t have time to do portfolio management properly.

Disadvantages of Indirect Investment

• Investors will not have any involvement at all in the investment activities they carry out. So, investors will only deposit funds that will later be managed by investment management.
• It is difficult to collect desires or replace any investment instruments that have been made. Usually this method will be time bound for several months or even years before finally the funds can be returned or disbursed.
• There is still the possibility of losses due to wrong investments by investment managers. If you experience a loss, the capital that will return later will also be reduced.

Benefits of Direct and Indirect Investment

Given that the main objective of investment is to gain profit from the investment, there is not much difference between the benefits of direct and indirect investment. Both of them have something in common, namely to provide benefits because they can increase the value of the assets that Sinaumed’s has. In fact, the profit from the investment can be a passive income.

To be clearer, here are the benefits of investing:

• Avoid inflation.
• Increase value for money.
• Adding sources of income and maximizing profits from investments.
• Future savings and preparing for retirement.
• With the investment advantage, Sinaumed’s doesn’t have to work too hard.
• Financially independent.
• Investment can add insight and broaden relationships.
• The investment trains Sinaumed’s to make decisions and be more responsible.

Types of Investment Risk

Investment risk is the level of potential in terms of losses in investment activities, which arise and are caused by investment results that are not in accordance with the targets and expectations of the profit. Every investor must realize that investment not only provides benefits, but also losses.

In the investment world, there are about 7 types of risks that investors should be aware of, including:

1. Interest Rates

The first risk that arises in investing is interest rate risk. This one risk is the type of risk that will be caused by the relative value of an asset that has interest. For example, like bonds or loans that will go bad, due to an increase in interest rates. Another definition of this risk is the type of risk caused by the emergence of changes in interest rates in the market.

This will affect the income from the investment itself. In general, if the interest rate increases, the price of bonds that have interest will continue to decrease. This interest rate risk will generally be measured using the term of the bonds.

2. Market

Market risk is a type of fluctuation risk or rise and fall of a net asset, which originates from changes in sentiment in the financial market. An example is bonds or stocks which are also called types of systematic risk.

Changes that occur are generally caused by recession, economic issues, riots, speculation, and changes in politics. For example, regarding the health issue of a head of state which causes fluctuations in the value of the rupiah to the dollar to increase.

However, if this happens, there is no need to rush to panic. Sinaumed’s can immediately disburse investment funds when there are fluctuations in the market. Increases or decreases in actual assets will not occur repeatedly or continuously.

3. Inflation

Investment risk in terms of inflation is also known as purchasing power risk. This risk is an opportunity for cash flows originating from investments that are not as valuable as in the future, due to changes in the purchasing power of inflation itself.

This risk has the potential to harm people’s purchasing power in an investment. The average increase in consumption prices is the cause of this risk.

Inflation risk is also a type of risk that can be experienced by investors, when they hold money in cash or when they invest in assets that have nothing to do with inflation.

4. Liquidity

Liquidity risk is a type of investment risk that exists due to the difficulty of providing cash at a certain time. For example, when a person is unable to pay obligations in cash when they are due.

Even though the person already has assets with sufficient value to pay their obligations, if the assets cannot be converted to cash then the assets will be called illiquid.

This can happen if the debtor cannot sell the property he owns. Besides that, no one else buys it in the market. However, this is not the same as asset prices dropping drastically.

In the event of a decrease in price, the market has the opinion that the asset has no value. None of the parties wish to buy or exchange their assets, perhaps because it is difficult for the two parties to meet each other.

So this risk is likely to occur in markets that have small volumes or are just growing. This risk also has a relationship with the speed of securities that have been issued by the company and can be traded in the secondary market.

Tips for Choosing the Right Investment

Investments, whether direct or indirect, are actually quite difficult if done haphazardly. That is the reason a person must be able to choose the right investment for himself. Check out how to choose the right investment below.

1. Adjust to Purpose

Before making an investment, you must first pay attention to the purpose of making the investment. Everyone has different investment goals, some are used for short term needs and some are used for long term needs.

So when making an investment, you have to think about what capital or money you will use. Generally, investments are used for long-term purposes so that someone will become more relaxed in choosing the easiest investment instrument with the least risk.

2. Use the Right Funds

Use the funds to make investments with the right and appropriate amount. This means that the funds that will be given later cannot be too small or too large. Because each investment has its own risk, investors must think about the right amount of funds to be allocated to the investment.

3. Diversify

It is better to diversify before choosing the type of investment. Don’t stick to one thing, for example, just invest in stocks, but also use it for other types of investment such as precious metals such as gold.

4. Learn Everything Well

The last thing to do if you want to invest is to study everything related to that theme. This means that everything related to investment must be well studied and then practiced so that mistakes occur.

If an investor is directly involved in terms of buying to selling, it can be said to be a direct investment. However, if the investment is handed over to the management or investment manager it can be said to be an indirect investment.

Definition of Cashback – In the business world, it turns out that there are lots of strategies that can be implemented by a company in order to attract potential buyers. Starting from a unique promotional system, offering discounts or discounts to cashback features that are given to buyers.

Surely you are no stranger to the term cashback. Both through advertisements on TV, pamphlets that are on the road to online media, the term has indeed been widely used. The existence of a cashback feature can also be a special attraction for buyers.

Maybe you’ve only heard of the term cashback without knowing the ins and outs of it. Therefore you can read a review about the meaning of cashback in more detail in this article.

Definition of Cashback

Previously, we briefly explained the meaning of cashback. However, at this point, we will explain more deeply about the meaning of cashback itself.

The definition of cashback is an offer addressed to buyers. Later buyers will get refunds in cash, virtual money or returns in other product forms as long as they meet the product purchase transaction requirements specified by the buyer.

Most of the cashback given by sellers does not go directly to the hands of buyers. Sellers will provide cashback in the form of a deposit first. This is done by the seller is not without reason.

The reason is that this deposit method will be able to make buyers want to shop at another time at the same store using the deposit obtained from the previous cashback. Until now there have been more and more varied forms of giving cashback to buyers. Some companies also decide to provide cashback in kind.

 

 

Advantages of Cashback Promotion for Companies

Currently, many companies have started to dare to use cashback promos for products to be sold. This is not without reason, because there are so many benefits that the company will get from the cashback promotion it does.

So what are some of the benefits that companies will get from cashback promotions? The following is an explanation that you can read regarding some of the benefits that will be obtained from having a cashback promotion for companies.

1. Methods of Attracting New Customers and Retaining Old Customers

In the business world there are lots of competitors who offer the same goods or products. It could be that the products from company A are the same as the products sold by company B. This is where the company owning the product sometimes improves its promotion system so they can sell more of the goods they offer.

Because it is true that retaining old customers and attracting new customers is a difficult thing in such a tight competition.

Therefore, one method that is often used by companies in promoting their products is the cashback feature. Compared to the discount promo or buy 1 get 1, it turns out that the cashback promo looks promising.

The cashback promo offered by the company will be able to bring in new buyers and retain old customers. If it can last for a long time. Then the company will continue to grow and get the number of sales that are in line with the target and can even exceed it.

2. Able to Increase Repeat Orders

The existence of a cashback promo offered will build awareness of potential buyers to make purchase transactions for these products. If indeed the product offered is really in accordance with the needs of the buyer.

So it can mean the buyer will continue to make repeat orders. Even when there is no cashback promo because indeed they can get real benefits when using these items.

On the other hand, when the company offers a new product with a cashback promo. Buyers will also not think twice about using the new product. Because they already believe that the products issued by these companies are indeed capable of providing real benefits when used.

3. Enlarge Transaction Opportunities

Next is the opportunity for transactions that have a greater possibility than usual. As previously explained, the existence of a cashback feature can make it possible to attract potential buyers.

Those who really deal to make purchases of cashback products will also increase transaction opportunities. Especially when they feel the benefits provided by the product that has been purchased.

It is highly likely that they will use the same product next time. This means that they will continue to purchase products on an ongoing basis even though there is no cashback promo offered for that product.

4. Not Undermining the Price

Apart from cashback, you may be familiar with promos for discounts or discounts. But did you know that many think discounts will be given to non-premium products that can be obtained by anyone.

There are even thoughts that discounts or price cuts can damage the price of these goods on the market. This means that the existence of a discount promo will also not have a guarantee of a good ending.

However, the story is different with the cashback promo. Because the cashback promo will not damage the price of the product. You will still purchase goods at the original price even though there is a cashback promo.

But you will get a cashback promo at the end of the transaction. This is where a better impression arises compared to discount promos. That way the price of the goods will not change, even cashback promos can also maintain the perception of buyers.

5. Raising Awareness

The more often cashback promos are given, the more awareness of prospective buyers will be able to make transactions for these products. Especially when the cashback figure given is quite large.

So the greater the interest of buyers to use the product. In addition, buyers will pay attention to these products while the cashback promo is still being offered. This means that a cashback promo for a product will also provide special interest for potential buyers.

Those are some of the advantages that the company will get from having a cashback promo for a product that will be offered to prospective buyers.

 

 

Disadvantages of Cashback Promos

Even though it plays a big role in attracting the interest of potential buyers. It turns out that the cashback promo that you often encounter also has some drawbacks in it, you know. You can read about some of the drawbacks of having a cashback promo in full in the explanation below. Even so, the deficiencies that will be explained in the following points are more towards the requirements specified by the organizer of the promo.

1. Purchase Terms

In cashback promos, there are usually certain purchase conditions that are charged to prospective customers. An example is the cashback promo of 10 percent for a minimum purchase of IDR 250,000.

For customers who make purchases with predetermined minimum requirements. Then they are entitled to get a cashback of 10 percent. Meanwhile, those who buy under IDR 250 thousand will not get a cashback promo.

2. Time of Purchase

When the customer succeeds in getting the predetermined cashback promo. It does not mean that the cashback will be given directly. The reason is there are other provisions that apply related to time.

For example cashback will be given within a period of several days after, it could also be several weeks or several months after the purchase was made by the customer.

3. Fees Given

Even though it’s rare, there are several organizers who emphasize fees given to customers who make purchases so they can get cashback promos.

However, if the customer cannot make dues payments as it should have been determined by the organizers. Automatically the cashback that will be given will also be forfeited.

However, as explained earlier, not all organizers enforce this. Therefore, the customer must also pay attention to every existing promo, especially cashback.

4. Flexibility

In the form of flexibility, it is very rare to find. This means that the organizers will provide cashback only for purchasing certain products. Or it could also be that the cashback given will be in certain forms such as goods.

Types of Cashback

Until now, there are lots of types of cashback that are easy to find around us. But do you also know what types of cashback are often around us. Well if not, then the explanation below will help you to know more.

1. Credit Card Cashback

The first type is credit card cashback. Credit card cashback is a program issued by a certain bank to provide benefits to the owner of that bank’s credit card.

In simple terms, the bank will provide cashback to the credit card owner when making a purchase transaction of an item in a certain amount. This cashback program is not only given in the form of refunds.

But sometimes there are also cashback programs that are given in the form of discounts. Of course, all policies related to the cashback program that are applied also depend on the particular bank.

In addition, the amount of the cashback percentage also varies greatly depending on the nominal amount of the transaction made by the credit card owner. It should also be noted that the greater the nominal amount of transactions made will affect the amount of cashback that will be obtained by the owner of the credit card.

The accumulation obtained from the cashback program can be used to pay contributions, monthly bills or to shop for other goods.

Therefore, when you want to make a credit card, choose a bank that always offers attractive promos, such as cashback features and cooperation with various parties, such as airport facilities.

2. Online Shop Cashback

Next is the online store cashback. Maybe the online store cashback is the easiest for you to find on some of the online shop platforms that you frequently visit.

Online shop cashback is a cashback program that will be given to customers who have made a purchase transaction in a certain nominal amount. Of course, previously the minimum purchase amount had been determined in advance by the online shop.

An example is when an online store provides a cashback promo with a minimum purchase of IDR 250,000. So if you make transactions in the amount of Rp. 250 thousand or more, you will be able to get the cashback promo.

However, it should also be noted that most of the cashback promos provided by online stores are not in the form of refunds. But in the form of a discount when the customer makes the next purchase at the online store.

This means that the cashback promo can only apply in the form of a discount when a customer purchases a product at the same online store. In online stores, this condition can be referred to as consumer loyalty.

Where customers will purchase a product at the same online store in the next period.

3. Cashback Property

In the world of property, cashback promos are also often given. Where cashback property is a cashback program that will be given by the developer or property developer to customers who buy the products they sell.

Whether it’s for the purchase of houses, apartments, shophouses and others sold by the developer or the property developer. Most of the cashback given will be in the form of property supplies.

Examples are like TV, AC, Refrigerator and others. The existence of a cashback promo that is enforced is enough to arouse the interest of buyers. They think that getting a cashback promo will save them the cost of purchasing other properties when they have made a property purchase transaction such as a house, shophouse or apartment at a fairly high price.

4. Motor Vehicle Cashback

Motor vehicle cashback has the same meaning as property cashback. Where motorized cashback will be given by the leasing party to customers who purchase the products they sell, be it motorbikes or cars.

Most of the leasing will provide cashback in the form of goods. An example is a tablet laptop or the provision of motorbikes or cars when a customer buys a certain product that has been predetermined by the leasing party.

The existence of a cashback promo is also considered very effective in attracting buyer interest. Where they think they will get certain prizes when purchasing products on the leasing.

So, those are some types of cashback that we can easily find around us. Of course, Sinaumed’s is no stranger to some of these cashback promos, right?

 

Conclusion

From the explanation above regarding the meaning of cashback, it can be concluded that anyone can have a cashback promo. Because all customers can get a cashback promo when they successfully make a certain amount of purchases which have also been determined by the organizers.

Then the organizers will also get various benefits from the cashback promo they offer. One of them is the existence of loyal behavior on the part of the customer.

This is because the customer will purchase certain items from the company that provides the cashback promo. In addition, the condition of customer loyalty is also supported by cashback in the form of price discounts.

This means that this cashback promo can apply when a customer purchases goods at the same store and they will get a discount in accordance with the applicable provisions. This also allows the company or party organizing the cashback promo to get certain profits or benefits.

However, the organizers or the company must also really make accurate profit or loss calculations.

This is an explanation regarding the meaning of cashback, advantages, disadvantages, and types of cashback promos. Sinaumed’s can read books on consumer behavior as well as marketing which you can get at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides #MoreWithReading information.

Characteristics of Anecdote Text – Does Sinaumed’s know what an anecdote text is? Anecdotes are a type of text in Indonesian that you need to know. In practice, anecdotal texts also have a purpose and function and can be found in various sources, such as newspapers, magazines and so on. Simple, anecdotal text contains stories that contain humor but have a function to criticize something, such as social conditions, politics, and so on.

That is why anecdotal texts have a function in existence for social criticism. If Sinaumed’s wants to make an anecdote text, then it needs to know several things, including the characteristics of anecdote text, structure, elements, rules, and examples. Here is an explanation of the full text of the anecdote:

Definition of Anecdote Text

In general, these examples of anecdotal texts often describe the unique behavior of important people that are interesting to study. The anecdotal texts are not only satirical, but also full of moral messages and messages for the general public to learn. The contents of anecdotes tell the social reality that occurs in people’s daily lives, but are packaged in a light and non-judgmental manner.

Apart from anecdotes in text format, they are often presented in the form of dialogue or pictures which provide interesting examples with implicit messages that have very deep meanings. According to experts, there are many views on the meaning of anecdotal texts. The following is the meaning of anecdotal text according to experts:

1. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

The definition of anecdote text in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (2008) is a short story that is packaged in an interesting and impressive way. The stories mentioned are generally about important figures. In government, anecdotal texts exist as a form of concern about possible problems and as a sign of public discomfort or that felt by many people.

2. According to the Ministry of Education and Culture Team

Meanwhile, according to the Ministry of Education and Culture Team (2013), anecdotal texts are short stories that tell stories of famous and important people. The messages conveyed by stories in anecdotal texts can make readers feel stupid, funny, frustrated, and emotional, as well as other responses. It was also stated that anecdotal texts can evoke complex emotions in readers. It starts with comfort (realete), frustration, satisfaction, failure, and other people’s mixed feelings.

3. According to Keraf

The definition of anecdotal text according to Keraf (1995) comes from the Greek word “Analyze” which means “to go”, then “an” which means above, and “Iyein” which means an analytical term which can be interpreted as a bound explanation. If interpreted as a whole, anecdotal texts are drawn from the analysis. That is, it is used to accurately and accurately describe or examine the structure and conventions of text.

4. According to Prasetyo

Prasetyo wrote that anecdotal texts are fictitious stories that don’t have to be about famous people and don’t have to be based on facts. Anecdotes can be written based on events that are frustrating, ridiculous, or important. It was also stated that anecdotal texts were written as a form of author’s criticism to overcome the conflict between comfort and discomfort.

Well, that’s what the experts say about anecdotal texts. From the opinion above, we can conclude that anecdotal text is a story that is packaged in a fun and unique way that can provoke various emotions in people. Starting from emotions, anger, frustration, fun and entertainment. So, the basis for writing anecdotal texts is in the form of criticism or satire without directly offending certain people.

Features of Anecdote Text

1. Include Participants

The first feature of anecdotal text is the fact that it displays participants who can be used as objects in the narrative material of anecdotal texts. With the understanding of the participants who can be involved in anecdotal texts based on the opinions of the experts above, the participants shown can take on characters that don’t have to be celebrities or famous people. Foreigners can also participate.

2. Contains Interesting Elements

As mentioned in the definition above, anecdotal text contains interesting elements. An anecdote is an interesting piece, but still contains an important message about the current topic or topic.

3. Has a Satirical Format

Even if written with humor, satire should be included. This is the difference between anecdotal text and other texts. However, this text is actually conceptualized and designed as a critique of the conditions and circumstances that occur around us. At the same time, demonstrations are in the form of short anecdotes, but the messages conveyed are full of entertainment so that messages pass more quickly.

4. Using Conjunctions

Conjunctions are words that connect sentences, phrases and phrases. There are many types of conjunctions, depending on their function. For example, the types of conjunctions are additive, contradictory conjunctions, segregated conjunctions, time conjunctions, final conjunctions, causal conjunctions, continuous conjunctions, conditional conjunctions, unconditional conjunctions, comparative conjunctions, correlated conjunctions, affirmative conjunctions, descriptive continuing conjunctions, concessions, and so on.

5. Is tickling for readers

The story or case that is raised must be very interesting. Namely, tickling because tickled, exasperated, emotional, or other feelings.

6. The presentation of the story is like a fairy tale

Presentation of writing is made like a fairy tale. Even if it is written like a fairy tale in terms of message or story, anecdotal text is more real, not fantasy as a whole.

7. Narrated Realistically

Of course, anecdotal texts are written realistically, prioritizing logic in terms of sending messages. Writing anecdotes requires more skill to impress the text of these anecdotes.

8. Can About Important People

As mentioned before, the characters and people written are from important personalities and people who in fact have had problems in the real world. So, in terms of writing an anecdote text, it’s not just writing an ordinary story. Make sure there is criticism, including satire when writing it.

Anecdote Text Structure

1. Characters Are Factual

Factual characters or figures are characters who are named, well-known, and very popular. Facts can make it easier to convey messages to readers of the text.

2. Real Flow

The meaning of the real plot is the storyline that must be followed based on the actual series of events. Therefore, it is not based on the imagination or subjective message of the anecdote text writer.

3. Has a Time, Place, and Atmosphere

Regarding the setting, in writing anecdotes we need to pay attention to the setting of time, place and atmosphere. The most important thing in telling anecdotes is to prioritize factual information. Backgrounds can be divided into two formats, namely location and time settings.

4. Abstraction

Abstract is an introductory paragraph that provides a brief explanation of the subject being discussed. Then what is emphasized? Of course it is unique to let others read to the end.

5. Orientation

Orientation is the beginning of a story or the background of an event. Well, this orientation section is for the author to write completely and comprehensively.

6. Crisis

It cannot be denied that when writing an anecdote text, there must be something offensive. For example, finding unique and unusual problems directly experienced by the author or other people.

7. Reaction

Based on the experience found, this encourages the writer to try to solve the problems and experiences he has experienced before.

8. Code

The final structure is the coda, which is the final part of the story. Now, someone wrote some code in a unique and interesting story. Some write conclusions about the events that the author experienced. This is part of the anecdote text structure. The use of structure is used to make it easier for writers to convey messages and criticism together.

Elements of Anecdote Text

1. Figures

The difference between characters in anecdotal texts is that they are real participants, not fictitious characters created by the author. In general, participants are characters with quite popular names.

2. Storyline

The storyline that is wrapped in a series of stories is called the storyline. When writing short stories and novels, Sinaumed’s can create plots based on the author’s imagination. In anecdotal texts, the action takes place actually, not imaginatively.

3. Background

Background contains several formats, namely time, place, and atmosphere. In making choices, especially for anecdotal texts, they are facts and must be in accordance with what happened in real life.

Purpose of the Anecdote Text

1. Make Readers Laugh

The purpose of the anecdote text is nothing but to entertain the readers who see it. It’s an interesting read, but still emphasizes factual messages and fact-free entertainment.

2. As Entertainment

Anecdote texts are primarily used for entertainment. Anecdotes are not always written down, some are accompanied by very interesting illustrations.

3. As a Form of Criticism

As mentioned earlier, this anecdote is written in the context of a critique of a hot event, moment or events that occur in social life.

Anecdote Text Rules

1. Shows Past Time

The main rule of the anecdote text and the most prominent one is showing the past, that is, it can show the time, day, year or month in a factual event.

2. Use of Conjunctions

Conjunctions or conjunctions are required, as they are included in the nature of the text. Conjunctions have two parts, namely conjunctions between words and conjunctions between sentences and conjunctions between paragraphs.

3. Use of Verbs

The rule to observe is the spelling of the verb. Maybe someone is still confused with the verb form? For example reading, running, laughing, silent, crying, and so on.

4. Written in Chronological Order

It is very important to write chronologically based on the chronological order in which they occur. This method is easy for readers to understand. The elements of time and chronology are rules that cannot be ignored, because the text of anecdotes is entertainment based on facts.

5. Using Rhetorical Questions

Rhetorical questions are questions that do not require an answer. This rhetorical question is very interesting. If Sinaumed’s can play this question well, this text will feel more unique.

6. Use of Statements

Statements are also used when writing anecdotal texts. According to the use of sentences, this statement also indirectly convinces the reader.

• How to make book reviews and examples
• Explanation of the Definition of Review Sentences and Examples
• Definition of Opinion: Characteristics, Types, and How to Make It

Example of anecdote text

Based on the explanation of the anecdote text above, Sinaumed’s can begin to understand the text with the following types of anecdotal text examples:

1. Examples of Simple Anecdotes

Borrow money

A man came to the bank and said he wanted to borrow Rp. 20,000,000 for six months. He pawned the Rolls-Royce and asked the bank to hold the car until the debt was paid. Six months later, the man returned to the bank, paying Rp. 20,000,000 and Rp. 10,000,000 interest and return it. When asked why the person driving the Rolls-Royce needed a loan of Rp. 20,000,000, the loan officer said, “I have to go to Europe for six months and I can leave my Rolls-Royce for Rp. Another 10,000,000. Is it true?” The cop woke up and after a few moments laughed at the cunning Rolls-Royce owner.

2. Examples of Educational Anecdotes

SBI: International School

Public school teachers have told their students that they will change the status of their school to SBI School.

“Children, good news for all of us. Soon our school will become an SBI school (School with International Standards). I want to ask what should be prepared to welcome this.

“Joni, what are you doing to welcome this? “Ask the teacher further.

Joni immediately answered the teacher’s question. “Learn English. Let’s speak English,” Joni answered.

And you, John?” I asked Mr. Shirono.

“I have money for preparations, sir,” replied John.

“Do you know why it’s money?” Ask the teacher further.

“Yes, Sir. The problem is if our school has SBI status, the costs will be higher. Do we pay the same as regular schools? That’s it, I’m sure we will be charged for this”, continued Jono.

“Why is your answer so cynical? As you know, if our school meets international standards, it means that our school is on par with foreign schools. So they are like studying abroad, “continued the teacher.

“But in my opinion SBI is not an international standard school, but an international standard school,” continued John.

3. Examples of Political Anecdotes

Stories from the Corruption Court

At the height of the political corruption trial, prosecutors attacked witnesses. “Is it true?” Said the accuser, “Did you get Rp. 100,000,000 to compromise in this case?” The witnesses were outside the window as if he didn’t hear the question. I see. “Isn’t it right that you compromised on this and got Rp. 100,000,000?” The lawyer repeated. The witness has not yet commented. Finally the judge said, “Please answer the prosecutor’s question.” “Oh, sorry.” Witnesses were shocked when they said to the judge, “I thought he was talking to you.”

Well, that’s an explanation of the characteristics of anecdote text, elements, structure, purpose, rules and examples . Is Sinaumed’s interested in writing anecdotes? In order to better master the text, you can study Sinaumed’s through the sinaumedia book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations on anecdotal texts and other types of text: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.

Book & Article Recommendations

 

Uses of Sulfur – Almost all natural materials in this world can be used or have their uses, one of which is sulfur. For some people, they may already know what sulfur is, especially for those who have used this natural resource.

Even so, not everyone knows about sulfur and its uses. If you don’t know that yet, you don’t need to worry because this article will discuss the meaning of sulfur and its uses. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Sulfur

Sulfur or sulfur is a non-metallic element whose original form is a yellow crystalline solid. Naturally, sulfur can be found as a pure element or mineral in volcanoes. Sulfur is a resource that is widely used by humans as a raw material for sulfuric acid.

In addition, sulfur is commonly used in matches, gunpowder, insecticides, fungicides, and so on. Pure sulfur is odorless. The smell that appears actually comes from the many compounds contained in sulfur.

Sulfur and sulfates are not toxic, but carbon disulfide, hydrogen sulfide and sulfur dioxide are all toxic. What’s more, hydrogen sulfide is very dangerous, so it can cause death. Sulfur dioxide is produced when unrefined coal and oil are burned.

In the atmosphere, sulfur dioxide can cause acid rain. If left unchecked, this will cause many living things to die because some of the toxic aluminum salts dissolve and are taken up by living things.

Behind the pungent smell, the benefits of sulfur for the health of the body are no joke. In fact, this one mineral has long been used as an alternative medicine to treat various health problems. Sulfur is a chemical element that is commonly found in volcanoes.

This mineral known as sulfur is often used as an ingredient in the manufacture of sulfate and phosphate fertilizers to support plant growth. Therefore, sulfur is widely used in the agricultural sector. However, not only in agriculture, sulfur also provides many benefits in the health sector.

 

Facts About Sulfur

According to Jefferson Lab, quoted from Live Science , here are some facts about sulfur:

1. Atomic number (number of protons in the nucleus): 16
2. Atomic symbol (on the periodic table of elements): S
3. Atomic weight (average atomic mass): 32.065
4. Density: 2.067 grams per cubic cm
5. Phase at room temperature: Solid
6. Melting point: 115.21 degrees Celsius
7. Boiling point: 444.6 degrees Celsius
8. Number of isotopes (atoms of the same element with different numbers of neutrons): 23.

Sulfur is very important for living things. This is because it can be taken up as sulfate from soil or seawater by plants and algae. Then, it can be used to make the two essential amino acids needed to make protein.

Today, modern sulfur production comes almost entirely from the various refining processes used to remove sulfur from natural gas, oil and tar sands. All living things contain sulfur and when it becomes fossilized, the sulfur is still there. Therefore, burning impure fossil fuels will create sulfur dioxide that can enter the atmosphere.

Benefits and Uses of Sulfur

In fact, there are various uses of sulfur for health, here are some of the uses of sulfur for health that Sinaumed’s needs to know:

1. Overcoming Skin Problems

Sulfur is a chemical element that has a pungent odor and is usually found in volcanoes. This mineral is also called sulfur which can be processed into white powder. In pure sulfur also found some content such as Epsom salt and gypsum. Sulfur can be processed into compounds such as sulfuric acid, sulfides, and sulfates that are used in shampoos and fertilizers.

The skin is the outermost part of the body, so it is prone to disturbances or problems. Well, there are many ways to deal with various skin problems, one of which is to use sulfur.

However, there are still many people who question the efficacy of sulfur for the skin. In the pharmaceutical world, sulfur has long been used to treat several skin problems such as warts, rosacea, and seborrheic dermatitis.

Sulfur also acts as a keratolytic agent which can exfoliate dead skin cells. Another function of sulfur is to kill bacteria, fungi, and parasites that cause scurvy.

In fact, sulfur has many ingredients that are beneficial to the body, especially the skin, when applied. This is because sulfur is known for its anti-bacterial and anti-inflammatory properties. When used in skin care, sulfur works to absorb excess oil that can cause acne by drying the surface of the skin and opening clogged pores.

Apart from removing dead skin cells, sulfur can also treat acne by overcoming blockages in the skin pores. Research also shows that sulfur is known to be useful for treating psoriasis, although this still needs further research. The use of sulfur-based products for external use should be accompanied by a doctor’s prescription.

If you want to use an over-the-counter sulfur product, be sure to read the label and directions for use carefully.

Also, always wash your hands with soap before and after using sulfur-based products. Products for external use in the form of creams or lotions should not be applied to chapped skin because it can actually worsen the condition experienced.

Likewise with several other body parts, such as the eyelids, lips, nose, and mouth. If you have a rash or other signs of allergies after using sulfur-based products, stop using them immediately and consult a doctor.

For more details, here are the benefits of sulfur on the skin, namely:

a. Clean Pores

Sulfur is a naturally occurring mineral found in hot springs, clay and volcanic ash. One of the benefits of this mineral is that it is effective in eliminating bacteria which is effective for dealing with acne prone skin.

Sulfur kills bacteria and draws out oil, while reducing buildup in pores and making them smaller. This pungent-smelling natural mineral is able to kill bacteria that clog and irritate skin pores.

b. Exfoliation

The keratolytic properties of sulfur can cause mild peeling of the top layer of the skin. This can help the body get rid of dead skin cells that can cause clogged pores, breakouts, uneven texture, and dullness.

You can apply beauty products containing sulfur to have healthier and more beautiful skin.

c. Overcoming Acne

Some topical products for acne contain benzoyl peroxide which may be too harsh on someone with sensitive skin. This can cause irritation and severe peeling, up to an allergic reaction.

An alternative is to use sulfur, which is gentler in removing stains. This is able to reduce acne by tackling new bacteria and their spread. Dirt and excess oil can cause acne. Some anti-acne products usually contain sulfur.

Sulfur is able to reduce the accumulation of excess oil that can clog pores. Sulfur is usually found in cosmetic products for mild acne. Sulfur is also considered milder than benzoyl peroxide for treating acne. Benzoyl peroxide tends to cause allergic reactions, irritation, or peeling skin.

d. Lifting Dead Skin Cells

Exfoliation is a technique that helps exfoliate dead skin cells. Usually, exfoliate using salt or sugar scrubs or exfoliator products that contain BHA (Beta Hydroxy Acid or salicylic acid).

Besides being used in anti-acne products, sulfur is also used as an exfoliating agent. Sulfur is keratolytic, which means it can peel off the outer skin layer, making it suitable for removing dead skin cells.

A spokesperson for luxury skincare brand Gazelle added that sulfur is used in many face masks and can be used to help control dermatitis.

e. Prevents Skin Aging

To maintain skin elasticity, collagen needs must be fulfilled. Unfortunately, as you get older, collagen production decreases and your skin becomes dry, saggy, and starts to wrinkle.

Especially if the skin continues to be exposed to pollution and sunlight, the skin will age faster. Aging can be prevented or slowed down with anti-aging products, aka rejuvenation. Well, sulfur is often added to these rejuvenating products.

Sulfur can kill bacteria that damage the skin while stimulating collagen production.

f. Overcoming Dandruff

Apart from being used as an exfoliating agent, sulfur can be used as a treatment for scalp dandruff.

Sulfur helps a scaly scalp to exfoliate more quickly and improves hair texture, suppleness and shine.

g. Treat Panu and Ringworm

The benefits of sulfur can also be felt to cure phlegm and ringworm. The results of sulfur for tinea versicolor and ringworm can be seen by mixing sulfur powder with vegetable oil, then applying it to the areas of the skin where phlegm and ringworm are present.

h. Overcoming Itches

Another benefit of sulfur is to treat itching on the skin. In the journal The Antibacterial Properties of Sulfur stated that sulfur has antibacterial properties that can inhibit bacterial growth.

In another study, sulfur has been known as an antibacterial agent that can be administered orally to treat various bacterial infection problems. Sulfur is also used topically for treatment of infected skin. Applying sulfur to the skin can help with scabies and itching caused by mite bites.

The problem of itching is usually caused by bacteria and germs, if not treated immediately, then over time the skin will become irritated because it is scratched too often. For that, soaking in sulfur water can be done by sufferers of itching.

The hot nature of sulfur, and its anti-bacterial content are able to eradicate germs as well as fungi and bacteria that cause skin diseases such as itching, scabs and scabies to heal effectively. Usually, sulfur will be used as a mask so that the itching can disappear.

Here’s how to make a sulfur mask, namely:

• Use enough sulfur (use about 2-3 tablespoons of sulfur that has been refined.
• Give some water.
• Stir the sulfur until it mixes well with the water and has a paste-like texture.
• Sulfur is ready to be used for masks.
• After cleaning your face by washing, this mask is ready to be applied to your face evenly.

This sulfur mask can also be added with other ingredients such as honey, olive oil, coconut oil, and rose water.

 

2. Overcoming Rosacea

The next use of sulfur for the skin is to help overcome rosacea. Sulfur is said to be helpful for treating rosacea, a chronic condition that causes facial redness.

Sulfur, which is anti-inflammatory in the skin, can treat the symptoms of rosacea. This mineral can reduce inflammation and kill bacteria that can control rosacea symptoms. Some topical creams can get rid of bumps, redness, and dryness on the face.

3. Overcoming Eczema

Eczema is a skin problem characterized by dry, itchy skin and a red rash on the skin. Many also refer to eczema as atopic dermatitis which refers to skin inflammation.

Some people use sulfur as a natural treatment for eczema. Sulfur has medicinal and therapeutic properties to relieve eczema symptoms, such as inflammation, dry skin, and itching.

Eczema is a skin disease that causes skin redness, itching, and irritation. Sulfur-based medications are often prescribed instead of eczema antibiotics. Sulfur which is anti-inflammatory in the skin can overcome the symptoms of eczema.

If you often experience eczema, it’s a good idea to apply topical products with sulfur content so that this skin problem is resolved.

There are several factors that can trigger eczema, one of which is due to certain foods such as nuts and dairy products. Even though it is not contagious, eczema makes sufferers uncomfortable because it continues to feel itchy and does not go away.

Eczema can heal if smeared with cream or lotion containing sulfur. The antibacterial properties of sulfur can relieve itching and redness due to eczema.

4. Treating Arthritis Pain

Sulfur can also be processed into supplements. Sulfur supplements are often used to reduce pain caused by arthritis, both osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis.

In addition, sulfur in the form of methylsulfonylmethane (MSM) is also known to be good for joint health and helps form connective tissue, such as cartilage, tendons and ligaments.

However, the benefits of sulfur for the treatment of joint pain are still in the realm of speculation and further research is needed to ensure its safety and effectiveness.

5. Overcoming Bladder Inflammation

In several countries, sulfur is used to treat chronic inflammation of the bladder. This condition is characterized by symptoms of frequent urination at night and the appearance of pain in the bladder.

To treat inflammation of the bladder, a specially processed sulfur-containing liquid will be inserted directly into the bladder using a catheter. However, before this procedure is carried out, the patient will be given general anesthesia, because the process causes pain and causes contractions in the bladder.

6. Overcoming Blood Circulation

Another benefit of sulfur water is that it can improve blood circulation. Sulfur water contains various minerals, such as calcium and sodium bicarbonate.

When our bodies soak in sulfur water, our bodies absorb these minerals, thereby increasing blood circulation and oxygen flow in the body as a whole.

The water content of sulfur helps the liver in the process of detoxification or removing toxins. In addition, inhaling steam from sulfur water is also useful for treating several respiratory problems such as asthma, sinuses, allergies and so on.

7. Relieves Fatigue

The next use of sulfur is that it can help relieve fatigue. The benefits of sulfur water when used for bathing can help relieve fatigue and calm the mind. Pressure on hot sulfur water can have a relaxing effect on muscles and joints.

If done regularly, soaking in sulfur water can help improve blood circulation, thereby maintaining stamina so you don’t tire quickly. This can also help someone who has difficulty sleeping so that they can become calmer and sleepier.

Even though it provides various benefits, you should not carelessly use sulfur to treat certain medical conditions. It is recommended that you consult with your doctor first to ensure the safety of its use. Those are some of the uses of sulfur for the body, I hope this article is useful for Sinaumed’s.

Thus a review of the usefulness of sulfur for health and interesting facts. Sinaumed’s can get more information by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Order of the President of Indonesia – Indonesia as a country with a government in the form of a republic. This also means that this country is headed by a president. In addition, Indonesia also adheres to a democratic system so that the president and his deputy are then directly elected by the people through general elections (pemilu).

Since its independence in 1945 until now Indonesia has been led by seven presidents. So, here’s a review of the order of the Indonesian president and his deputies, cabinet names, and their terms of office!

Order of Indonesian Presidents from the Beginning to the Present

Soekarno (1945–1967)

Soekarno’s Term of Office: From 18 August 1945 to 12 March 1967
Vice President Soekarno: Mohammad Hatta (Office from 18 March 1945 to 1 December 1956)
Name of Soekarno’s Cabinet:

• Liberal Democracy of the Natsir Cabinet (From 6 September 1950–21 March 1951)
• Sukiman Cabinet (From 26 April 1951–23 February 1951)
• Wilopo Cabinet (Starting from 30 March 1952–2 June 1953)
• Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo I (From 30 July 1953–24 July 1955)
• Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet (From 12 August 1955–3 March 1956)
• Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo II (From 20 March 1956–14 March 1957)
• Djuanda/Karya Cabinet (From 9 April 1957–5 July 1959)
• Working Cabinet Guided Democracy I (From 10 July 1959–18 February 1960)
• Working Cabinet II (From 18 February 1960–6 March 1962)
• Working Cabinet III (From 6 March 1962–13 November 1963)
• Working Cabinet IV (From 13 November 1963–27 August 1966)
• Dwikora I Cabinet (Starting from 27 August–22 February 1966)
• Dwikora II Cabinet (From 24 February 1966–28 March 1966)
• Dwikora III Cabinet (From 28 March 1966–28 March 1966)
• Ampera I Cabinet (From 28 July 1966–11 October 1967)
• Ampera II Cabinet From (17 October 1967–10 June 1968)

The Proclaimer and the first President of the Republic of Indonesia were Ir. Soekarno who was born on June 6, 1901 in Surabaya, East Java, of course his name will always be remembered by all Indonesian people, especially because he later played an important role during the struggle for independence at the hands of the colonialists.

In addition to reading out the text of the proclamation on August 17, 1945, Bung Karno, as he is affectionately known, took part in expressing ideas related to the five principles which must then be adhered to in Indonesia.

These five principles were later known as Pancasila, the foundation of the Indonesian state. Bung Karno’s presidency did not start with an election by the MPR (People’s Consultative Assembly) or the Indonesian people themselves. However, he was elected by acclamation as the first President of the Republic of Indonesia at the PPKI meeting, August 18, 1945.

Suharto (1967–1998)

Suharto’s term of office was: Starting from 27 March 1968 (inauguration of the position as the second president of the Republic of Indonesia) – 21 May 1998
Deputy President Suharto was:

• Hamengkubuwono IX (Term of Office: 24 March 1973–23 March 1978)
• Adam Malik (Term of Office: 23 March 1978–11 March 1983)
• Umar Wirahadikusumah (Term of Office: 11 March 1983–11 March 1988)
• Soedharmono (Term of Office: 11 March 1988–11 March 1993)
• Try Sutrisno (Term of Office: 11 March 1993–11 March 1998)
• Bacharuddin Jusuf Habibie (Term of Office: 11 March 1988–21 May 1998)

Name of Suharto’s Cabinet:

• Development Cabinet I (Term: 10 June 1968–28 March 1973)
• Development Cabinet II (Term: 28 March 1973–29 March 1978)
• Development Cabinet III (Term: 31 March 1978–19 March 1983)
• IV Development Cabinet (Term: 19 March 1983–21 March 1988)
• Development Cabinet V (Term: 23 March 1988–17 March 1993)
• Development Cabinet VI (Term: 17 March 1993–14 March 1998)
• VII Development Cabinet (Term: 14 March 1998–21 May 1998)

On March 12, 1967, during the holding of the MPRS Special Session, a major general of the TNI was then officially sworn in as the new president of the Republic of Indonesia, replacing Soekarno. He is Suharto. Born June 8, 1921 in Kemusuk, Yogyakarta, Suharto’s inauguration marked the end of the Old Order and the start of the New Order (Orba) period.

This Order itself has aspirations to implement Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution purely and consistently. This is expected to create national stability, starting from the political, social and economic aspects

BJ Habibie (1998–1999)

BJ Habibie’s Term of Office: From 21 May 1998–20 October 1999
Deputy President BJ Habibie: –
Name of Bj Habibie’s Cabinet: Development Reform Cabinet (Started from 23 May 1998–20 October 1999)

The reform movement carried out by the students finally succeeded in overthrowing Suharto’s leadership, which had been in power for approximately 32 years in Indonesia. After his resignation, the presidency was shifted to the incumbent vice president, namely Bacharuddin Jusuf (BJ) Habibie, on 10–13 November 1998.

A number of parties later stated that his appointment was controversial because it was considered unconstitutional and was a continuation of the New Order era. However, in reality, the policies taken were actually in line with the reform agenda, starting from freeing New Order political prisoners, abolishing Press Publishing Business Permits (SIUPP), repealing subversion laws and guaranteeing freedom of assembly and expression.

In addition, during his short presidency, BJ Habibie also issued several policies, namely:

• Politics : Holding various memorandums for the people of East Timor which later resulted in the release of this territory from Indonesia to become an independent state and drafted a law against corruption in 1999 to eradicate KKN practices.
• Economy : Stipulates an anti-monopoly law which is then regulated in Law Number 5 of 1999.
• Supplying rice at a more affordable price.
• Involve the various roles of small and medium traders and cooperatives in rice distribution.
• Carrying out reforms in banking matters.

Abdurrahman Wahid (1999–2001)

Abdurrahman Wahid’s Term of Office: From 20 October 1999–23 July 2001
Deputy President Abdurrahman Wahid: Megawati Soekarnoputri (From 20 October 1999–23 July 2001)
Cabinet Name: National Unity Cabinet (from 29 October 1999–23 July 2001)

The first election in the reform era was held on June 7, 1999. The results of this election then showed that PDIP had received the most votes (33.74 percent), followed by Golkar (22.44 percent), PKB (12.61 percent), PPP ( 10.71 percent), and PAN (7.12 percent). The MPR, which was later formed through the results of the 1999 election, was then tasked with electing a president and vice president.

At that time, there were two presidential candidates, namely KH Abdurrahman Wahid and Megawati Soekarnoputri. Then, on October 20, 1999, the MPR chose Abdurrahman Wahid as the fourth president of the Republic of Indonesia, accompanied by Megawati Soekarnoputri as his deputy.

Born on August 4, 1940, Abdurrahman Wahid, or Gus Dur as he is familiarly called, has a very strong religious education background. Nevertheless, his national insight also need not be doubted.

Megawati Soekarnoputri (2001–2004)

Term of Office of Megawati Soekarnoputri: From 23 July 2001–20 October 2004
Deputy President Megawati Soekarnoputri: Hamzah Haz (Started from 23 July–20 October 2004)
Name of Megawati Soekarnoputri’s Cabinet: Gotong Royong Cabinet (Started from 10 August 2001–20 October 2004)

Despite having the title of daughter of the late first president of Indonesia, Megawati still failed to win the presidency in the 1999 election. This was due to the political maneuvers initiated by Amien Rais through the Central Axis (PAN, PK, PBB, PPP) so that she was then able to push Gus Dur to be elected as president.

Apart from that, the slogan ABM (Originally Not Mega) was also touted by the rival political party PDI-P. However, Abdurrahman Wahid’s resignation after being impeached by the MPR then opened up a golden opportunity for Megawati. On July 23, 2001, Megawati Soekarnoputri was then officially sworn in as the fifth president of the Republic of Indonesia, replacing Abdurrahman Wahid, based on MPR Decree No. 3

In 2001, as Indonesia’s first female president, Megawati’s government was then faced with many problems, one of the most crucial of which was seeking efforts to restore the economy and uphold the law.

Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono (2004–2014)

Term of Office of Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono: Starting from 20 October 2004–20 October 2014
Deputy President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono:
Muhammad Jusuf Kalla (Starting from 20 October 2004–20 October 2009)
Boediono (Starting from 20 October 2009–20 October 2014)
Cabinet Name:

• United Indonesia Cabinet I (Starting from 21 October 2004–20 October 2009)
• United Indonesia Cabinet II (Starting from 22 October 2014–22 October 2014)

The sixth president in the order of Indonesian presidents is Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono or SBY. Even though in previous periods these elections had been held, in fact SBY and Jusuf Kalla were president and vice president who were directly elected by the people.

Not much different from the previous government, the policies pursued by the cabinet formed by SBY then focused on improving the economy. It can be said, the economic conditions in this era then became better.

In fact, Indonesia managed to pay off the IMF debt. In addition, SBY-Kalla also succeeded in resolving various problems with the Free Aceh Movement (GAM) through the Helsinki Agreement. The threat of terrorism was later mitigated by the arrest of the Bali Bombing terrorists and JW Marriott.

Joko Widodo (2014–present)

Joko Widodo Term of Office: Starting from 20 October 2014–present
Vice President Joko Widodo:
Muhammad Jusuf Kalla (Starting from 20 October 2014–20 October 2019)
Ma’ruf Amin (Starting from 20 October 2019–present)
Cabinet Name:

• Working Cabinet (Starting from 27 October 2014–20 October 2019)
• Indonesia Onward Cabinet (Starting from 23 October 2019–present)

From the furniture business to eventually entering politics, Born on June 21, 1961, his involvement in politics began when he was still in Solo. Having experience leading the Indonesian Furniture Manufacturers Association (Asmindo) then made a member of the organization participate in encouraging Jokowi to participate in the 2005 Solo Election.

As it turned out, he was later elected as Mayor of Solo for the 2005–2010 and 2010–2017 periods. From mayor, Jokowi rose again to become governor for DKI Jakarta province in the 2012–2017 period together with Basuki Tjahaja Purnama (Ahok). Experience as a governor then became a springboard to rise to a higher level, namely the presidency.

Supported by the PDI-P, the Jokowi-Jusuf Kalla pair then won the election in 2014 and were finally inaugurated on October 20, 2014 as the new Indonesian President and Vice President pair to date.

Related Books

Pak Kalla and the President

2004-2009 was the most dynamic period at the Palace. For the first time, the President and Vice President were directly elected by the people. A pair of leaders with unique and opposite characters presents dynamics and questions: who are the real leaders?

In an effort to find answers to these questions, this book comes from the notes of Kompas journalist Wisnu Nugroho on the Kompasiana blog. An insignificant story related to Vice President Jusuf Kalla’s relationship with President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono which raises anxiety, is shared in a mischievous and humorous manner.

The insignificant story about the Vice President’s other side in Mr. Kalla and his President’s book frees us from the image trap that has so far trapped Mr. Kalla as a businessman. After being free from the image trap, hopefully we can answer the question: who is the real leader?

President Jokowi (Indonesia’s New Hope)

Jokowi’s presence has contributed to a new nuance in the world of Indonesian politics, especially when he was running for president. Likewise, his companion figure, Jusuf Kalla, has enriched the predictions of the government under the leadership of Jokowi and JK.

All of this discussion is summarized in the collection of writings that you are currently holding. This book is not the first time to review the figure of Joko Widodo or Jusuf Kalla. However, being the first to publish the writings and analysis of ordinary citizens who are members of Kompasiana.com who discussed Jokowi and JK as well as when they were presidential and cawapres pairs

It begins with an analysis of the strength of Jokowi’s branding—and also Prabowo’s—during the presidential election and ends with a letter from a resident of Solo to Jokowi and JK. President Jokowi: Indonesia’s New Hope, a collection of writings by 21 selected Kompasiana members, for Indonesia.

Position of Vice President According to Indonesian Constitutional Law

This book describes various conflicts between presidential institutions (President and Vice President) in Indonesia which are based on objective and subjective factors as indicators attached to the two institutions.

This book is very useful for Constitutional Law and Comparative Constitutional Law courses because it explains the comparative method as a special approach. This means that the author uses a comparative method in analyzing the various duties and powers of the Vice President in several countries, such as the United States, the Philippines, the People’s Republic of China, Iraq, India, Bulgaria and Cyprus.

That is the order of the President of Indonesia from the beginning to the present.

The 50 Best Universities in Indonesia – If you are currently still in grade 12 of high school/equivalent and want to continue studying at your favorite PTN/PTS but are confused about where to study.

Apart from paying attention to career opportunities after graduation, you also have to adjust to the talents and interests that are within you, as well as aspects of the quality of the institution. In order not to choose the wrong campus, it’s a good idea to know which campuses or institutions are included in Wemoteric’s 100 best universities in 2020 Positions 1-50, Sinaumed’s. What are they? Check these out!

1. Gadjah Mada University (UGM)

Gadjah Mada University (UGM) is a public university in Indonesia which was founded by the Government of the Republic of Indonesia on December 19, 1949. Gadjah Mada University (UGM) is located on the Bulaksumur Campus, Yogyakarta.

The UGM campus as the first university established by the Government of the Republic of Indonesia after Indonesia’s independence, has 18 faculties, 265 study programs, 111 joint degrees and 23 study centers. The following is Gadjah Mada University’s (UGM) Ranking Achievements so far:

• THES (Timer Higher Education-Qs World University) world ranking 250, 2009
• Ranked 1st in Indonesia version of AIPT BAN-PT 2014
• Ranked 1st in Indonesia, 5th in Southeast Asia, 414th in the world version of Webometrics (2014)
• Gadjah Mada University is the University with the Best Quality Assurance System in ASEAN together with the National University of Singapore and Chulalongkorn University
• Several departments at UGM have received prestigious international accreditation with an A predicate and UGM is the first university in Indonesia to achieve this prestigious accreditation.

 

2. University of Indonesia (UI)

University of Indonesia (UI) is one of the higher education institutions in Indonesia, with the main campus located in the northern part of Depok, West Java, right on the border between Depok and South Jakarta. Meanwhile, the other main campuses are in the Salemba area, Central Jakarta. The University of Indonesia is a modern, comprehensive, open, multicultural and humanist campus that covers a broad range of disciplines.

Currently, UI has 14 faculties, 2 postgraduate schools, and 1 vocational program that carries out all teaching, education and research activities, Sinaumed’s. More details about the UI. The University of Indonesia has received various awards including:

• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 67th in Asia in 2016.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 79th in Asia in 2015.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 71st in Asia in 2014.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 64th in Asia in 2013.
• Ranking first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version, ranked 59th in Asia, and ranked 273rd in the world in 2012.
• Ranking first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version, ranked 50th in Asia, and ranked 217th in the world in 2011.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 50th in Asia in 2010.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2016.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2015.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2009.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2008.
• Ranked 250th at THES in 2006 as a world class University and ranked 395th at THES 2007.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to Webometrics and ranked 13th in Southeast Asia in 2016.
• Ranked 3rd for the category of universities from Indonesia according to Webometrics in 2015.
• Ranked 2nd for the category of universities from Indonesia according to Webometrics in 2014.

 

3. Indonesian Education University (UPI)

The Indonesian Education University (UPI) is a public university located in the city of Bandung, West Java. UPI has been accredited A by BAN-PT. In 2017 the Indonesian University of Education (UPI) was in the 13th position of the best Indonesian university according to the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education. UPI has 8 Faculties, 5 Regional Campuses, Postgraduate Schools (SPs) and UPI Laboratory Schools or Lab Schools.

UPI is a tertiary institution that adheres to a multi-campus system, namely with 6 campuses spread across two different provinces, namely West Java and Banten with the main campus located at Jalan Setiabudhi 229, Bandung. While other campuses are located in Cibiru, Tasikmalaya, Sumedang, Purwakarta, and Serang.

4. Diponegoro University (UNDIP)

Diponegoro University (UNDIP) has a vision of becoming a superior research university, and has been accredited A by Diponegoro University and has received A accreditation by the National Accreditation Board for Higher Education. UNDIP is located in the cities of Semarang and Jepara. Since its inception until now, Diponegoro University has had 11 Faculties and 2 Schools, with details of 21 Diploma III (D3) Study Programs, 51 Undergraduate Study Programs (S1), 35 Masters Study Programs (S2), 18 Specialist Medical Education Programs, 3 Professional Programs and 13 Doctoral Study Programs (S3). UNDIP’s achievements include:

• IYIA 2018, Bali, Indonesia Faculty of Science and Mathematics 2018 Champion III
• World Young International Exhibition (WYIE) in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia 2018 2nd Place
• International 4 IEI & WIIF (The 10th International Exhibition of Inventions and The 3rd World Invention and Innovation Forum) in China 2018 First Place
• Global SDG7 Conference Faculty of Science and Mathematics 2018 Participation/ Delegate/ Participant in International Championships
• Japan Design and Invention Expo (JDIE) 2018, Tokyo First Place
• Bangkok International Intellectual Property, Invention, Innovation And Technology Exposition” (IPITEx 2018), 3rd Place
• Malaysia Technology Expo 3rd Place
• Malaysia Technology Expo 2018 Faculty of Science and Mathematics 2018 Champion III
• Japan Design and Invention Expo (JDIE) 2018, Tokyo International Exhibition Center 1st Place

5. Universitas Brawijaya (UB)

Universitas Brawijaya (UB) is a tertiary institution in Indonesia which was established in 1963 in Malang City, East Java. Universitas Brawijaya (UB) consistently ranks in the top 5 with the University of Indonesia, Bogor Agricultural Institute, Gadjah Mada University, and Bandung Institute of Technology based on the official assessment of the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education (Kemenristekdikti).

Until now, UB has 18 faculties and 221 study programs (prodi) with very broad scientific clusters starting from Vocational, Undergraduate, Masters, Doctoral, Specialist, and Professional programs. In 2018 Universitas Brawijaya (UB) won the General Champion of the 31st National Student Science Week (PIMNAS) which was held at Yogyakarta State University. Brawijaya University is also ranked 301st in Asia in 2020 by the QS Asian University Rankings.

6. Yogyakarta State University (UNY)

Is a university located in Yogyakarta. Initially, UNY was named the Yogyakarta Teaching and Education Institute (IKIP). UNY itself has been institutionally accredited A based on decision number 3127/SK/BAN-PT/Akred/PT/XII/2016 from BAN PT. In addition, most of the study programs or departments at UNY are also accredited A, Sinaumed’s.

Until now, UNY has 7 faculties and 1 postgraduate program. Each faculty consists of various departments. The 7 faculties include the Faculty of Education (FIP), Faculty of Languages ​​and Arts (FBS), Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences (FMIPA), Faculty of Social Sciences (FIS), Faculty of Economics (FE), Faculty of Engineering (FT), Faculty of Science Sports (FIK) and Postgraduate Programs (PPs).

7. University of Lampung (UNILA)

Lampung University (UNILA) is a state university located in Bandar Lampung City, Lampung. Lampung University was founded on September 23, 1965 which at the same time made it the oldest and first state university in Lampung Province. Lampung University is located on Jl. Prof. Dr. Sumantri Brojonegoro No.1 Bandar Lampung City, Lampung and has been accredited A by BAN-PT.

Having 9 Faculties with 80 Study Programs and Departments, there are several scholarships to study at this University, including BIDIKMISI Scholarships, PMPAP Scholarships, Scholarships from the Government through BPPA (Academic Achievement Improvement Scholarships) and BBM Scholarships (Student Study Assistance). Scholarships from government and private institutions including the Lampung Provincial Education Office, KOMATSU, BTN, Eka Tjipta Foundation and others.

8. Airlangga University (UNAIR)

Airlangga University (UNAIR) located in Surabaya, East Java, was first inaugurated by the President of Indonesia Dr.Ir.Soekarno on 10 November 1954 after the University of Indonesia and Gadjah Mada University. Airlangga University has a strategic location on Jalan Airlangga 4 – 6 Surabaya City.

In addition, UNAIR has 3 campuses with different faculties, namely Campus A (Faculty of Dentistry and Faculty of Medicine), Campus B (Faculty of Economics and Business, Faculty of Pharmacy, Faculty of Social and Political Sciences, Faculty of Law, Faculty of Humanities and Faculty of Psychology) and Campus C (Faculty of Nursing, Faculty of Veterinary Medicine, Faculty of Fisheries and Maritime Affairs, Faculty of Public Health, and Faculty of Science). UNAIR’s achievements include:

• Prize in the carousel for the invention of fodder
• Health Award PT. Astra
• PWI East Java award thanks to the bird flu vaccine
• Awarded as the most active and most contributing contributor to the QS WOW NEWS website
• Two researchers from Unair won the 2015 Young Investigator Award (YIA) at KOBE University, Japan
• Islamic Economics students won the Best Entrepreneurial award at the Youth on Entrepreneurship event in Malaysia
• Dean of the Faculty of Cultural Studies (FIB) Diah Ariani Arimbi, PhD., received an award from an international Non-Government Organization (NGO)

9. Bogor Agricultural Institute (IPB), Bogor

Bogor Agricultural University (IPB) is a state agricultural university located in Bogor. There are many alumni of important Indonesian figures, graduates of this University, including the 6th President of the Republic of Indonesia Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono, Suswono (former Minister of Agriculture), Mustafa Abubakar (former Minister of BUMN), Anton Apriyantono (former Minister of Agriculture) and many others.

IPB also provides a large selection of study programs on agricultural sciences. There are 24 study programs that have been accredited internationally. Now IPB has 9 faculties and 1 business school with 39 undergraduate study programs. With the various achievements he has achieved, here are some of them:

• IPB is included in the 100 Best Universities in the world according to the 2018 QS World University Ranking by Subject Agriculture and Forestry.
• IPB is ranked 130th in Asia QS Asian University Rankings 2018
• Indonesia’s Best Higher Education IPB (Ranking by Kemenristekdikti) Ranked 3rd (2018), Ranked 3rd (2017), Ranked 4th (2016), and Ranked 3rd (2015).
• For the innovations it produces, IPB received the National Rank 1 Widyapadhi Award from the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education in 2018 and 2017.
• IPB won the Best Foreign Research Partner Award in the 2018, 2017 and 2016 State University (PTN) Category.
• IPB won the Best Report Card Rating for Program Implementation and Activities from the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education in 2018, 2017 and 2016.

 

10. Semarang State University (UNNES)

Semarang State University (UNNES) is a conservation-minded university, its main campus is located in the Sekaran area (Gunungpati), the southern region of Semarang City and other campuses are located in Ngaliyan (Semarang), Kelud (Semarang), Bendan Ngisor (Semarang) and in Kemandungan (Tegal ). Accredited A by BAN-PT. UNNES organizes vocational education (D3), bachelor (S1), master (S2), doctoral (S3) and professional education programs. There are 85 study programs managed in eight faculties and postgraduate programs.

11. Muhammadiyah University of Surakarta (UMS), Surakarta

Muhammadiyah University Surakarta (UMS) is one of 164 Muhammadiyah Colleges (PTM) and one of 1,890 Private Universities (PTS) in Indonesia. This UMS is located in Kartasura District, Sukoharjo Regency. Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta consists of 12 Faculties, including: Faculty of Medicine (FK) Faculty of Dentistry Faculty of Health Sciences (FIK) Faculty of Teaching and Education (FKIP) Faculty of Engineering (FT) consisting of: Civil Engineering, Industrial Engineering, chemical engineering , mechanical engineering, architectural engineering, and electrical engineering Faculty of Economics (FE) Faculty of Law (FH) Faculty of Pharmacy (FF), Faculty of Psychology Faculty of Geography (FG) Faculty of Islamic Religion (FAI) Faculty of Communication and Informatics (FKI) – consists of two programs study: Communication Science and Informatics Engineering.

The Communication Science Study Program specializes in Advertising, Broadcasting and Public Relations, while the Informatics Engineering Study Program specializes in Information Systems, Computer Network Systems and Software Engineering Systems. Starting from the 2009/2010 academic year, the Informatics Engineering Study Program also opened international classes. The university is ranked 131st in the World. The ranking is carried out by UniRank or 4 International Colleges and University (4ICU). Previously, UMS was also awarded the UniRank ranking as the best PTS in Indonesia.

The achievement of UMS, which was included in the 200 best in Asia, repeated the same achievement in 2019. It’s just that in 2019, UMS was in the 157th best position, while in 2020 the UMS ranking was in 131st position. Of the 18 universities from Indonesia that were included in the 200 Asian rankings , UMS is in the order of number 11.

12. Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB), Bandung

The Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB) is the first technical high school in Indonesia which was founded on March 2, 1959 in West Java. Located in Bandung, the Faculty is an educational unit at ITB which has several study programs (formerly departments), both at the undergraduate, masters, and doctoral levels. Meanwhile, a school is an educational unit that has several study programs with adjacent scientific fields.

For example, the School of Electrical and Informatics Engineering (STEI) ITB has 6 study programs, namely in the field of electrotechnics (electrical engineering, telecommunications, biomedical, and electric power), and in the field of computer science (informatics engineering and information technology systems).

Seven study programs (prodi) at the Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB) have succeeded in breaking into the top rankings of universities around the world. The seven study programs include Art & Design (rank 51), Computer Science & Information Systems (351), Chemical Engineering or Chemical Engineering (251), Electrical Engineering (Electrical Engineering) rank 301, Mechanical, Aeronautical Engineering & Manufacture (Mechanical Engineering) rank 251, Agriculture & Forestry or Agricultural and Forestry Engineering (201) and Business & Management Studies (251).

Rank 13 – 50 Best Universities in Indonesia

13. State University of Malang (UNM), Malang
14. University of North Sumatra (USU), Medan
15. Yogyakarta Muhammadiyah University (UMY), Yogyakarta
16. Bina Nusantara University (BINUS), Jakarta
17. Telkom University, Bandung
18. Sepuluh Nopember Institute of Technology (ITS), Surabaya
19. University of Jember (UNEJ), Jember
20. Udayana University (UNUD), Bali
21. State Islamic University of Maulana Malik Ibrahim Malang
22. Andalas University (UNAND), Padang
23. Eleven March University (UNS), Surakarta
24. Hasanuddin University (UNHAS), Makassar
25. Syarif Hidayatullah Jakarta State Islamic University (UIN), Jakarta
26. University of Muhammadiyah Malang (UMM), Malang
27. Sunan Ampel State Islamic University (UINSA), Surabaya
28. Indonesian Islamic University (UII), Yogyakarta
29. Walisongo State Islamic University, Semarang
30. Sulthan Syarif Kasim State Islamic University, Riau
31. Pasundan University (UNPAS), Bandung
32. Surabaya State University (UNESA), Surabaya
33. Syiah Kuala University (UNSYIAH), Aceh
34. Mercu Buana University (UMB), Jakarta
35. Gunadarma University (UG), Depok
36. Sunan Kalijaga State Islamic University, Yogyakarta
37. Jambi University (UNJA), Jambi
38. Ahmad Dahlan University (UAD), Yogyakarta
39. Dian Nuswantoro University (UDINUS), Semarang
40. Sriwijaya University (UNSRI), Palembang
41. Alauddin State Islamic University, Makassar
42. Sam Ratulangi University (UNSRAT), Manado
43. Padang State University (UNP), Padang
44. Sanata Dharma University (USD), Yogyakarta
45. Narotama University (UNNAR), Surabaya
46. Indonesian Computer University (UNIKOM), Bandung
47. Mataram University (UNRAM), Mataram
48. General Soedirman University (UNSOED), Purwokerto
49. Purwokerto Muhammadiyah University (UMP), Purwokerto
50. Atma Jaya University (UAJY), Yogyakarta

Most Wanted Graduate Majors –  Entering the era of the industrial revolution 4.0, competition for jobs is getting tougher with demands for higher job skills.

Therefore you need to choose the right college major and job. Disruptive technology, sharing economy, climate change, renewable energy, robotics, limited natural resources, and data processing are challenges as well as opportunities for how people work today and have careers in the future. Here are 4 study programs with graduates most needed in 2020. Check these out!

Most Wanted Graduate Majors

 

1. Department of Informatics Engineering

The Informatics Engineering Department studies and applies the principles of computer science and mathematical analysis in designing, testing, developing, evaluating operating systems, software, and computer performance.

The Informatics Engineering Department studies a lot of data processing by utilizing computer technology and logical principles and processes, besides that you will also study programming, software development, and computer network technology.

In the process, you will make lots of flowcharts or flowcharts as well as how a system can run according to its function and logic. Of course, thoroughness and tenacity are the basic characteristics that you must have to study in this department, Sinaumed’s.

This major is suitable for you who have strong understanding and logic, are thorough, diligent, have an orientation to detail, are used to thinking systematically, are structured, like calculations or mathematics, like to do analysis, and like challenges.

In the Informatics Engineering major, you don’t have to bother studying physics or memorizing scientific concepts of chemistry and biology. This is because informatics engineering majors only study business systems, programming logic, and explore various other programming languages. One of the other advantages of studying in the informatics engineering department is that the job fields are very wide.

Currently, almost all companies use information technology. The IT team is even one of the backbones of the success of a business. Not only in Indonesia, graduates of Informatics engineering are needed in various companies around the world related to technological developments.

Apart from that, as an IT graduate, you can also set up a software house to build your own startup, Sinaumed’s. The following are other career prospects for graduates:

• In this era of the industrial revolution, graduates of this department are needed by BUMN, government agencies, BUMN, private companies, even big companies like Google
• Programming is the most widely chosen profession by informatics engineering graduates. Especially considering that technology is currently developing very rapidly, you can start your career as a Junior Programmer 
• Database engineer , tasked with designing and monitoring a complex database system
• Software Developer is a profession that plays an important role in creating a software or software that will later be used to run a system
• A web designer is in charge of designing the appearance of a website so that it looks attractive and makes it easier for users. A web designer  will work side by side with a web programmer in designingthe web
• The Application Engineer is in charge of handling application systems (business systems), various planning, analysis and design of an information system. The Application Engineer himself usually does not directly work on programming a piece of software or software, but he does have an understanding of writing and structuring source code. As an application engineer, you will later be tasked with testing applications, evaluating tests and following up on customer feedback, as well as working with other team members to modify and improve the performance of applications that are being developed.
• Front End Developer is a profession whose main task is to create website designs using various codes from CMS, HTML, Javascript so that the appearance of a website then looks more interactive. All websites that we encounter on a computer or smartphone browser display menus, headers, footers, animations and other views
• IT Consultants , tasked with providing ideas for clients regarding the use of information technology in order to meet their business targets. 

2. Department of Communication Studies

The Department of Communication Science is a branch of science that studies and conveys messages or news effectively and efficiently, to get the desired end result. Communication is also related to various uses of technology and new discoveries along with the times.

For example, in the development of the internet, media influence, popular entertainment trends and other factors. ​You will learn various aspects of communication, both practical and.

This study program also studies the psychology of message recipients as well as various matters related to regulations and policies for broadcasting content through various media. Do not forget public speaking as one of the basic skills that must be learned by you.

Public Speaking is the ability to convey messages efficiently so that listeners can understand what is being said. Public speaking is not just talking, but also learning about Sinaumed’s’ body gestures. The majors included in the field of communication are advertising, linguistics, languages, journalism, and many more.

The Department of Communication Science is one of the fun majors, because not only do you study theory, you will also practice it directly, for example in the practice of management and production of television, radio and print media. In this major, you can learn to be a cameraman, producer, reporter, creative team, floor director, and also a news anchor or presenter. The following are other career prospects for graduates:

• Media in Indonesia is developing very rapidly, so career opportunities for Communication graduates are wide open, starting from the world of advertising, marketing, and broadcasting.
• Not only working in the media industry, Communication Science Graduates can also work in government institutions, because almost every government agency needs workers with a background in Communications, such as Public Relations, Media Communication Observers, Politics and others.
• For those of you who like to read the news and have good data analysis skills, becoming a policy analyst can be an option. This position is sought after by survey and research institutions because the government continues to make policy adjustments from time to time
• Apart from that, you can also become a radio announcer, producer, director, reporter, copy writer, and many more in Sinaumed’s.

 

3. DKV New Media Department

The DKV New Media Department is part of the Visual Communication Design study program whose application focuses more on the use of new media. New media itself is defined as media based on digital technology. So, here you will learn design in print media, web design, and interactive media.

Learning from this major can later be applied to branding activities, public design, photography, typography, and so on. In his study, a DKV New Media will use software that makes it easier for him to design (such as Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator, Flash and others).

The DKV New Media major is suitable for creative people who love art and aesthetics, Sinaumed’s. Studying in this department will channel your creativity, you will also learn how to express your creativity in visual form, both in the form of pictures and videos.

Besides that, the job prospects for the majors are quite broad, not only in corporates, the prospects for work in the freelance realm are also wide open. Especially with the growing creative industry, from comics to advertising.

In addition to the current communication pattern which tends to be visual, the development of the creative economy has also influenced the development of other industries. DKV itself is an important field in the life of modern society.

All forms of business that exist today are in dire need of design products, from business cards, product packaging, to logos. Apart from products in the real world, DKV New Media’s work is also needed for marketing in the digital realm. With the help of DKV New Media services, digital content can be made much more attractive to attract consumers’ attention. The following are other career prospects for graduates:

• Graphic Designer – Expert in using graphics or images or anything related to the creation of signs, schemes, logos, graphics, images, symbols, geometric designs and others, graphic designers are trained in using design programs such as Photoshop, Illustrator, Flash and others
• Illustrator – Working with digital art or pencil and ink, illustrators can design or draw to convey a message
• Creative Director, a director who directs his employees to meet the targets and criteria of their target consumers
• Art Director , his job as a director in the field of art at an event
• Animator, being an animator is one of the right career choices for DKV New Media graduates. The number of mushrooming cartoons has also opened up opportunities for young animators to work, Sinaumed’s.
• Marketing Analysis – The task of a marketing analyst is to process, analyze and present data regarding marketing targets for the needs of clients or companies and usually works in a consulting firm
• Social Media Marketing – The development of digital technology has also created many new job opportunities for DKV Creative Advertising graduates, one of which is social media marketing. A social media marketer is tasked with marketing a product or service using a social media approach
• Digital Marketing – This work is similar to social media marketing, namely marketing products or services digitally. It’s just that digital marketing staff use more digital platforms as marketing media.

 

4. Majoring in Accounting

The Accounting major studies the art of recording, classifying and summarizing in a certain way in monetary terms. Broadly speaking, this major studies how to maintain finances.

You will be prepared to become an accountant by studying accounting principles such as auditing, reporting, budgeting and tax regulations. This data will later be used to measure the results of entity performance and inform decisions about the future and control of an institution or company. It is for this reason that many people call Accounting the “Language of Business”.

The Accounting major is suitable for you who have an interest in finance and want to dive deeper into the business world, because in it you will learn various financial transactions.

A career in accounting itself is quite promising with a qualified income, according to the latest statistical data from the American Bureau of Labor, the average income of an Accountant reaches up to $ 65,940 per year. The US Bureau of Labor also reports that 10% of accountants make nearly $116,000 annually. Here are some job prospects for Accounting graduates:

• Public Accountant – An accountant who has permission from the Minister of Finance to open his own accountant services to the public. Accountants themselves have longer working hours than other professions, but commensurate with the higher pay.
• Private Accountant – Internal Accountant This accountant is in charge of compiling all accounting needs in a company or organization. His duties start from the preparation of a Management Oversight System (SPM), which is a system designed to motivate executive managers to achieve the goals set by top management, Financial accounting, namely the accounting process concerned with the accounting cycle of financial transactions, from recording transactions to preparing financial reports and communicating them to decision makers. An accountant plays a role in selecting data that needs to be recorded, determining data recording patterns to preparing and interpreting accounting reports, including designing relevant report forms.
• Financial analyst – A profession whose job is to compile financial information which will then become the basis for decision making in a business
• Internal Auditor – In charge of examining a company’s internal financial reports and providing input to management.
• Tax Consultant – In charge of providing tax consultation for those who are taxpayers.
• Accounts Payable or Receivable Clerk – In charge of taking care of accounts payable accounting. 

5. Department of Economics

Economics is a science that can control and distribute resources around. The origin of the word economy itself is taken from the Greek term “oikonomia” which means the management of various administrative tasks and household chores.

New economics itself became an independent department at the end of the 19th century, where Economics was separated from Political Science. Economics is divided into two major parts, namely Microeconomics and Macroeconomics. Microeconomics focuses on individual markets and their structures and key players, while Macroeconomics discusses Economics both on a national and international scale. Economics is always an interesting science.

The world economy, which is always colored by various challenges, makes companies recruit graduates with good economic knowledge. This major is suitable for you with an interest in buying and selling.

Despite the fact that Economics is not as simple as selling and buying, it also takes care of various factors that affect a transaction, starting from the interaction between sellers and buyers, regulations that restrict movement in trading and so on. Job prospects for economics majors include:

• Accountant. Accounting is one part of economics. A person who is in this profession is called an accountant. His job is to prepare financial reports and analyze incoming financial information. All companies need accountants to compile financial reports. Therefore, this profession can be a promising job opportunity or prospect in economics for you. From this report, the company can find out the company’s financial condition and can also be used as a reference for making policies. The average salary earned by an accountant is IDR 3,500,000 to IDR 7,000,000.
• Business Management Analyst Fifth, you can become a business management analyst. Business management analysts are tasked with analyzing procedures, operational system designs, and other systems within a company/organization so that they can operate more efficiently and effectively. The business management analyst jobs include program analysis, management consulting, and business analyst.
• Auditor Next, you can have a career as an auditor. This profession is almost the same as an accountant. The difference is, accountants place more emphasis on financial records or cash in and out flows. While the auditor is tasked with analyzing financial reports with the aim of drawing conclusions whether the existing financial statements are fair or not. The average salary earned is IDR 4,000,000 to IDR 7,000,000.
• Operational Research Analyst Finally, you can have a career as an operational research analyst. This profession is much needed in various companies. His job is to conduct research or analysis to assist management in making policies. The average salary earned is IDR 4,500,000 to IDR 7,000,000.

Types/How Animals Breed – Basically, breeding is one of the basic characteristics of animals as living things. This breeding must be done by animals to avoid extinction.

In general, animals reproduce sexually or generatively, however, there are also types/methods of animals that reproduce vegetatively or without sexual or asexual activity.

Types/Methods of Generative Breeding Animals

Sexual reproduction/breeding or commonly referred to as sexual reproduction, occurs when male gametes (sperm) meet female gametes (eggs). Sexual reproduction can be divided into three types namely oviparous, viviparous and ovoviviparous.

Sinaumed’s can also read the book Various Ways of Animals to Reproduce to find out in detail the types/how animals reproduce. You can get this book at sinaumedia.com

1. Oviparous

Oviparous is the type/way animals reproduce by laying eggs. This reproduction is usually carried out by birds and reptiles. After fertilization, the resulting embryo grows and develops in the eggshell. The embryo receives nutrients and food reserves from the egg released from the mother’s body.

Hence, the oviparous embryo develops in the egg outside the mother’s body. Some of the characteristics of oviparous animals are the absence of mammary glands and ears. Examples of animal laying eggs are as follows.

a. Chicken

Chickens are animals that reproduce by laying eggs. After the hens lay their eggs, the eggs go through an incubation process that lasts about 20-21 days to keep the eggs warm.

From the outside, you can see that the chicken has no auricles. Similarly, having no nipples indicates that the hen has no mammary glands and is unable to nurse young.

b. Swan

Geese reproduce in an oviparous way, just like chickens, reproduce by laying eggs. These goose eggs are larger than other birds and the incubation process lasts up to 20 days.

c. Dove

Apart from chickens and geese which are often kept as pets, pigeons are an example of oviparous animals which are also commonly kept by humans. Much smaller than the two eggs above, pigeon eggs only need to incubate for 17-19 days.

d. Lizard

Yes, small lizards that are often found on roofs and walls of houses are also included as examples of oviparous animals. Lizards usually hide their eggs in a hidden place such as the back of a cupboard or bark to prevent them from being attacked by predators.

e. Siamese fighting fish

Betta fish are in great demand, because of their beautiful color, are highly sought after for collection and use as house and aquarium pets. Betta fish are also classified as laying animals or laying eggs.

This betta egg shape resembles the bubbles that are found on the sides of water pools and aquariums. Solid fish eggs only take 3 days to hatch.

f. Frog

Frogs are amphibians that reproduce by laying eggs. However, unlike normal egg-laying animals, the male frog fertilizes the eggs which the female releases into the water. Eggs fertilized by male frogs grow and hatch into tadpoles or tadpoles in the water. The tadpole undergoes metamorphosis, exposing lungs and legs, and then grows into an adult frog.

g. Butterfly

The caterpillars that we usually find in trees are actually butterfly larvae. This butterfly is a type of arthropod or insect that reproduces by laying eggs or oviparous. Adult butterflies lay their eggs on the surface of leaves, which develop into the larvae and caterpillars we know. The caterpillar then sleeps in a cocoon and turns into a small butterfly and grows into an adult butterfly.

h. Platypus

Most mammals reproduce by giving birth, but there are also some mammals that reproduce by oviparity or laying eggs. An example is the platypus. This animal is a monotreme. Monotremes reproduce by laying eggs, but still have mammary glands and rear their offspring through the folds of the mammary gland on the mother’s abdomen.

i. Crocodile

Another example of an oviparous or egg-laying animal is the crocodile. Crocodiles are called oviparous animals because they are amphibians that reproduce by laying eggs. crocodiles dig holes in mounds of earth and lay their eggs. As a rule, a female crocodile protects her nest and youth.

However, depending on the species of crocodile, crocodiles can lay 7-95 eggs at the same time during one spawning period. Crocodile eggs take about 80 days to hatch.

j. Ant

These animals are usually found in parks to rooms in the house. Ants are also included in the example of egg-laying or oviparous animals, Queen ants can lay around 100,000 to 300,000 eggs in a few days.

The breeding of these eggs is carried out by the queen with the male having to mate with the queen. The hatched eggs then grow into new worker, soldier, male or queen ants.

Characteristics of Oviparous or Egg-Laying Animals

As already mentioned, different breeding patterns also result in different characteristics of the animals themselves. Like egg-laying animals, it has different characteristics from other animals. Here are some things that can distinguish egg-laying animals from other animal species.

a. No auricles

People who have difficulty distinguishing animals with oviparous reproduction can see it in their ears. The first feature of oviparous or egg-laying animals is the absence of auricles. Therefore, it is very easy to tell oviparous animals apart when looking at them in person.

b. Has no mammary glands and does not suck milk

we can recognize the species that breed during the nursing process. The characteristics of oviparous animals are that they do not breastfeed their young because they do not have mammary glands.

c. The mother incubates the eggs until they hatch

When you see a mother laying eggs in a nest or cage, you can see that the mother is sitting down to incubate the eggs. This is done so that the eggs stay warm and alive.

d. Eggs are outside the mother’s body

As previously explained, the characteristics of oviparous animals are that eggs are released outside the mother’s stomach, develop and hatch.

2. Viviparous

Viviparous is reproduction by giving birth. After fertilization, the embryo grows and develops in the uterus. In the womb, the embryo receives nutrients from the food that the mother digests through the placenta. Some characteristics of embryonic animals are bodies protected by mammary glands, ears and hair. Examples of animals that give birth are as follows.

a. Pope

Maybe there are still many who think that whales are included in the fish group. Of course, whales live underwater. But it turns out that whales are a group of mammals that reproduce by giving birth.

b. Seals

Another calving animal known to live in water is the seal. These mammals are carnivores that are found in cold waters. Like other mammals, these animals reproduce in a viviparous way.

c. Dolphins

Another group of fish that reproduce by giving birth are dolphins. These fish are also called dolphins, and are also known as freshwater dolphins, but now their existence is gradually being threatened and they are classified as protected animals.

d. Cat

Cats are another animal that reproduces by viviparity or giving birth. These furry animals take about 9 weeks to conceive young.

Cats grow from babies to adults. The breeding cycle of these four-legged animals is irregular at certain times. Many factors ultimately cause cats to engage in sexual activity.

e. Dog

Dogs are also viviparous breeding livestock. These animals go through a more regular breeding cycle than cats. The gestation period for these animals is around 55-65 days. A pregnant female can give birth to 4 babies or even more.

Sinaumed’s can read the book Reproductive Aspects of Dog Breeding to get more in-depth information about the types/how dogs breed. Please click the button below to get the book.

f. Cow

Cows are also considered birthing animals because they have ears and mammary glands, similar to other viviparous characteristics. Cats and dogs are usually house pets, but not like cattle. These four-legged animals are usually cultivated for livestock purposes.

Cattle are usually used for hides, meat and milk. This animal has a long gestation period of about 270 days. Interestingly, the gestational age of this cow is influenced by the sex of the baby. If the baby is a boy, his gestational age can exceed 270 days.

g. Goat

Another livestock that reproduces by giving birth is the goat. These vertebrates have a gestation period of up to 150 days. After birth, the goat smokes for about three months.

h. Horse

Horses experience longer pregnancies than goats. The horse’s gestation period reaches 11-12 months after ovulation. Unique things are usually the process of birth after night or after sunset.

i. Elephant

Another viviparous animal is the elephant. These large animals take about 18 to 24 months to conceive a young. Adult female elephants can usually give birth only 4-5 times. Therefore, do not be surprised if the elephant population is threatened with extinction, because elephant breeding is very limited.

j. Monkey

Another example of animals giving birth is monkeys. This one animal enters pregnancy after ovulation. The gestation period depends on the monkey’s physiology. Some of the monkey species are gibbons, orangutans, chimpanzees, gorillas and proboscis monkeys.

k. Mouse

This rodent also belongs to the group of animals that give birth. Mice need more than 20 days to conceive young before they are born.

l. Bat

This nocturnal animal is also included in the viviparous or giving birth group. Bats have a gestation period of about 3 to 6 months.

Characteristics of Viviparous or Childbirth Animals

To learn more about the groups of animals that reproduce in the embryo, you can find the following characteristics.

• Have mammary glands.
• Have ears.
• Its body is covered with feathers and hair.
• Generally lactating or mammals.
• The fetus develops in the mother’s body before birth.

3. Ovoviviparous

In ovoviviparous after fertilization, the resulting embryo grows and develops inside the egg. At first glance, it sounds like oviparous. However, in ovoviviparous, the eggs are not expelled from the mother’s body, but remain in the mother’s body until they hatch.

After hatching, children will be born. The number of animals that breed ovoviviparally is not as much as the animals that reproduce in oviparous and viviparous ways. Examples of ovoviviparous animals are as follows.

a. Shark

The first example of an ovoviviparous animal is the shark. This famous sea creature has been found to reproduce by giving birth as well as laying eggs. Sharks can store eggs in their bodies.

The eggs then hatch and the shark lays eggs when the embryo has developed sufficiently outside the mother’s body. Shark embryos are known to be free of arias. Therefore, it is necessary to stockpile feed from eggs to maintain their growth.

b. Stingray

Stingrays are also included in the group of ovoviviparous animals whose habitat is in the sea. The stingray embryo grows and develops in the egg with the help of the nutrients contained in it. When the embryo is considered optimal enough, the mother will give birth.

c. Seahorses

The seahorse is another example of an ovoviviparous animal. This animal has a fairly unique reproductive system. The male will do the job of conceiving, not the female seahorse.

This is because male seahorses have pouches that have the ability to store and incubate eggs. This will allow the sea horse to grow better.

d. guppies

Guppies are usually seen as ornamental fish. This fish is small and has a beautiful and attractive appearance. But who would have thought that guppies would reproduce by laying eggs and giving birth?

This fish is known to take 20-30 days to become pregnant and give birth to young. This ornamental fish can produce 2 to 100 fish each time. Surprisingly, once the guppies are born, you can swim, find food and avoid enemies.

e. Platypus

The platypus is a semi-aquatic animal commonly found on the Australian continent. These animals usually reproduce by laying eggs like a flock of birds. However, the platypus turned out to be a special animal. It was found to have mammary glands like mammals that reproduce by giving birth.

Therefore, biologists include the platypus as an ovoviviparous animal group. This animal is also known as a transitional animal from evolution to mammals which took place in the bird class.

f. Lizard

Another example of an ovoviviparous animal is the lizard. These animals are known to store eggs in their bodies. Lizard embryos grow using the yolk as nutrition. When a new individual is born from the embryo, the mother lizard gives birth to it.

These four-legged, rough-skinned reptiles are found in loose or sandy soils. However, some lizards live in trees.

g. Salamanders

Another animal that reproduces in an Ovoviviparous way is the salamander. The animal looks like a lizard, has a streamlined body, a long tail and a short nose. These animals are usually found in waterfalls and swamps. This animal’s skin is very moist so it needs a watery environment to live.

h. Chameleon

Another ovoviviparous animal is the chameleon. These animals can increase their population by storing eggs in their mother’s body. After that, the chameleon mother gives birth to a baby.

In addition to their unique reproductive methods, chameleons also have different abilities from other animals. Chameleons can change their color to be lighter or darker. To find this animal, you can look for it in the bushes and trees.

Types/Methods of Animals Reproducing Vegetatively

The reproduction or reproduction of the following animals is vegetative or asexual. This reproduction is done without mating. Generally, asexual reproduction occurs in lower animals. Problem animals have imperfect body structures. There are three types of vegetative reproduction, namely budding, fragmentation, and division.

1. Buds

Buds appear on the mother animal’s body. When old enough, scions separate from the parent body and form a new individual. Examples of animals that reproduce by budding are fragmentation sponges and hydras.

2. Fragmentation

Fragmentation is a method in which animals reproduce by cutting or separating parts from their bodies. Examples of animals that reproduce in this way are some species of planaria and worms.

3. Splitting Yourself

Reproduction by dividing is by dividing the body into two equal parts. An example is the amoeba, which is so tiny that it can only be seen with a microscope.

Those are some types / ways of breeding animals that we should know. In order to understand it even more, Sinaumed’s can read related books by getting them at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information.

sinaumedia Literacy – Everyone has an internal body clock that works automatically. This system is also known as the circadian rhythm, which is a system that plays a role in ensuring that the body’s organs work optimally throughout the day. Our brain regulates sleep time, eating patterns, body temperature, hormone production, regulation of glucose and insulin levels, urine production, cell regeneration, and other biological activities. It is very important for you to know the body’s working hours, by knowing this you can provide the best intake and rest time so that the performance of your organs functions optimally. Each organ of the body itself has certain schedules. Understanding your own body’s schedule and rhythm will be very good to help improve daily performance. The following is the daily cycle of the human body for 24 hours Sinaumed’s:

 

BODY ORGANS WORKING HOURS

00.00 – 02.59

At this time, the body’s hormonal changes send a signal to the brain that it is time for you to sleep and rest. The hormone melatonin will be produced more and more so you will feel more tired and sleepy. The brain will also cleanse itself of toxins and remnants of substances that have accumulated as a result of thinking hard all day long. All the information you receive that day will also be stored in your brain in short-term and long-term memory. In addition, you should avoid eating or drinking at this hour because the intestines are undergoing a cleansing or detoxification process.

03.00 – 05.59

Body temperature will reach its lowest point at this hour. This happens because energy will be diverted from keeping the body warm to other important functions such as repairing the skin or fighting infection. The body still continues to produce the hormone melatonin, but it will soon decrease by the morning of Sinaumed’s.

06.00 – 08.59

At this time the blood vessels will become stiff and dense. So the blood becomes more viscous and sticky. This means that blood pressure is high. It is better for those of you who have a history of heart disease to avoid exercising at this time because it can increase the risk of a heart attack, and during these hours the production of the hormone melatonin in the body will also stop.

09.00 – 11.59

Early morning before noon is usually the best time to work, study, and be active. This is because the body is actively producing a stress hormone called cortisol. This hormone is responsible for making the mind more alert. Also, short term memory will also work better at this hour.

12.00 – 14.59

If you often hear the term “nap time” or “drowsy hour”, this is because the body’s energy is being preoccupied by the work of the digestive system. The digestive organs are very active in processing the food you consume at lunch so that your level of alertness will decrease.

15.00 – 17.59

In the afternoon, usually the body temperature will naturally increase. This is certainly useful if you want to exercise and need to warm up. The lungs and heart also work more optimally at this hour. In addition, compared to the condition of the muscles throughout the day, the muscles were shown to be 6% stronger in the afternoon. So, exercising in the afternoon is the right choice to keep your body fit, Sinaumed’s.

18.00 – 20.59

Be careful with the food you consume at this hour. Experts don’t advise you to eat too much at night because your digestion doesn’t work as well during the day. At this hour, the liver is functioning optimally to produce the protein the body needs and to clean the blood from various toxic substances.

21.00 – 23.59

If you are a person who likes to get up early, the brain will produce the hormone melatonin faster, which is around 9 pm. If you often stay up late and wake up late, the sleep hormone will be produced late at night. This is the right time for you to reduce your activity and get ready for bed.

BODY BIOLOGICAL CLOCK

Do activities according to your body clock, Sinaumed’s, because your biological clock works all the time. Every hormone or body chemical works at certain, certain hours. Adhering to this will certainly make it easier for you to maintain a healthy body so that it is always in top shape. Also find out the picket hours for your organs here, Sinaumed’s.

STOMACH

• Biological clock: 07.00 – 09.00
• The picket clock of the gastric organs is at its strongest
• Suggestions: It is better to have breakfast for the body’s energy formation process throughout the day. Drink juice or concoction before breakfast, so that the stomach is still empty and the useful substances are immediately absorbed by your body.

HEART

• Biological clock: 11:00 – 13:00.
• Organ performance: The heart maximizes its physical work at this hour.
• Suggestion: Take a little rest and eat something low in fat which is good for your heart.
• Prohibition: Avoid excess heat and physical exercise, especially for those of you who have complaints in the blood vessels.

HEART

• Biological clock: 13:00 – 15:00.
• Organ performance: The condition of the liver is in a weak state.
• Suggestion: Taking a short break will naturally regenerate liver cells.
• Prohibition: Working too tired and over-strengthening yourself.

LUNGS

• Biological clock: 15:00 – 17:00
• Organ performance: At this time the lungs are weak.
• Suggestion: Rest and breathe regularly to restore lung energy. Light exercise, such as yoga, which can make your breath more stable, Sinaumed’s.
• Prohibition: Breathing dirty and dusty air.

KIDNEY

• Biological Clock: 17:00 -19:00.
• Organ performance: At this time the kidneys are working very hard, where the process of forming the body’s bone marrow and brain cells occurs.
• Suggestion: This time is the best time to study.
• Don’t: Don’t sleep at these hours Sinaumed’s.

STOMACH

• Biological clock: 19:00 – 21:00.
• Organ working: At this time the working power of the stomach is weak.
• Recommendation: Try not to eat solid food that is difficult for the stomach to digest or it is better to stop eating during these hours Sinaumed’s.
• Prohibition: Do not consume foods that burden the stomach organs, overeat or drink lots of soda and Sinaumed’s coffee.

SPLEEN

• Biological clock: 21:00 23:00.
• Organ performance: The spleen is in the weakest condition at this time, due to the process of removing toxins from the body and regenerating spleen cells.
• Suggestion: Take the best vitamins and minerals (multivitamin) at this time, because it helps the spleen organ in working Sinaumed’s.
• Don’t: Drink less bitter drinks and if your face turns a little pale at this time, your spleen may be in a state of disorder.

HEART

• Biological clock: 23:00 – 01:00.
• Organ work: The heart is in its weakest condition
• Suggestion: Sleep is the best choice for the health of your heart organ, because this time is the best time for the body’s energy recovery.
• Prohibition: Staying up late and doing various strenuous activities.

HEART

• Biological clock: 01:00 – 03:00.
• Organ performance: The liver is in its best condition at this time because there is a process of removing toxins from the body’s metabolism.
• Suggestion: Rest and sleep are the right choices because at this time cell regeneration occurs in your body.
• Prohibition: Don’t do strenuous activities and eat bitter and spicy foods because it will interfere with the liver’s work.

LUNGS

• Biological clock: 02.30 – 04.30.
• Power organs: The lungs are cleaning and removing toxins in the body.
• Suggestion: This time is the best time to calm your mind and do Sinaumed’s meditation
• Prohibition: breathe the air around strongly because it makes you cough, sneeze and sweat when your lungs are dirty.

COLON

• Biological clock: 05:00 – 07:00.
• Organ working power: The large intestine is working hard
• Suggestion: Get used to defecating (BAB) at this time, so that all the dirt, toxins and the rest of the digestive system can be removed.
• Prohibition: Consumption of fruits in large quantities, excessive coffee and foods that are too dense before the stomach is filled with carbohydrates and protein.

THE IMPORTANCE OF SLEEP FOR THE BODY’S BILOGICAL CLOCK

Everyone has different levels of sleepiness, but what causes these differences in sleepiness levels? Sleep is regulated by two body systems, namely the balance of sleep or wakefulness and the body’s biological clock, also known as the circadian rhythm. When the body is awake for a long time, the sleep or wake balance system will order the body to rest immediately. This balance system will also help maintain sleep according to the body’s needs to ‘make up’ for the body clock when awake, so that there will be a balance between activities and rest.

The circadian biological clock itself is controlled by a part of the brain called the Suprachiasmatic Nucleus (SCN), cells in the hypothalamus that respond to light and dark signals. Suprachiasmatic Nucleus (SCN) signals will be sent to other parts of the brain that control hormones, body temperature, and processing functions of sleepiness and wakefulness.

Hormones that play an important role in circadian rhythms that affect sleep itself are the hormone melatonin which functions to cause drowsiness and lowers temperature as well as cortisol which forms glucose and activates anti-stress and anti-inflammatory in the body. The highest melatonin level occurs at midnight, so during this period a person usually experiences deep sleep.

IF YOUR BIOLOGICAL CLOCK IS WRONG

There are several factors that can cause disruption of the human biological clock. Drastic changes in time zones (jet lag), erratic work schedules (shifts), lifestyle, and problems with natural lighting risk causing the biological clock to go awry. As with other disorders in the body, an abnormal biological clock can cause complications.

Sleep according to the biological clock to maintain a healthy body and prevent various diseases that can arise due to lack of sleep, Sinaumed’s. Because disruption of the human biological clock risks causing various problems such as insomnia, obesity, type 2 diabetes (diabetes), depression, bipolar disorder, and mood disorders. In addition, a messy biological clock also risks affecting the immune system. This is because the production of proteins needed by the immune system becomes out of sync. So, try to always stick to the schedule that is naturally set by your biological clock.

The biological clock plays a major role in regulating daily sleep and wake times. You need to adjust your sleep hours slowly because the body needs a process for adaptation. When you have to wake up earlier, try going to bed earlier than usual. This adjustment can be made gradually, by advancing bedtime by 15 minutes over two to three days. Apart from that, apply these tips:

• Avoid Naps: Sleeping in the middle of the day can affect your night’s sleep cycle and make it difficult for you to sleep at night. This will disrupt the biological clock that is regular. Instead of when you’re sleepy during the day, try doing a little exercise.
• Adhere to the Sleep Schedule: When you feel comfortable with the bedtime you have made, you must consistently do it. Try not to wake up late and sleep too late. Because indiscipline can damage the progress that you have achieved.
• Exercise, Exercise is able to build muscle and shed fat, as well as facilitate sleep. People who exercise for at least 150 minutes each week sleep better at night and feel fresher in the morning. The time chosen to do sports also makes a difference. High-intensity cardio done at night can actually disrupt sleep. Do that type of exercise for the morning or afternoon if you start to feel that intense exercise is actually disturbing your sleep pattern. Do a more relaxing exercise. However, avoid exercising too close to bedtime, because exercising can keep you awake and unable to sleep. The best time to exercise is in the afternoon and early morning of Sinaumed’s.
• Avoid activities in bed until it’s time to rest. Make it a habit not to open your laptop or use gadgets before going to bed. This is also to get used to the body to really rest once you lie down on the bed. Also keep gadgets away for at least an hour before going to bed so that the body has time to relax. Also keep laptops, cell phones and other devices out of reach so you are not tempted to continue to operate Sinaumed’s.
• Bright light therapy Bright light therapy can help adjust your circadian rhythm. This therapy is done by scheduling the body to be exposed to sunlight in the morning. Also make it a habit to turn on the lights in the morning. Lighting will signal to the body that it is time to wake up, apart from that opening a window and letting the sunlight in, or taking a walk around the house is also a very healthy way to improve your sleep time, Sinaumed’s.
• Create a relaxing bedtime routine. The goal is to tell the body that it’s time to rest so that the body is in a relaxed state which makes it easier for you to sleep better. You can mark bedtime by starting to clean yourself or turning on aromatherapy which helps relax your mind so that you sleep better!
• Avoid heavy meals. Be sure to stop eating heavy meals and avoid unhealthy snacks a maximum of three hours before bedtime. This is to prepare your body to rest, including your digestive organs, Sinaumed’s.

Keeping the biological clock is important to do. Disturbed body clock will trigger the emergence of various diseases. Among them increase the risk of cancer, depression, heart attack, and others. Hopefully this information is useful Sinaumed’s!

EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. On this platform, you can access many question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan “Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as synonyms, antonyms and other CPNS questions. Check the YouTube account directly, click here.

Source: from various sources

Members of the Small Committee – When hearing the word BPUPKI, most people already know about this agency which existed during the Japanese occupation. In fact, the lesson about BPUPKI has existed since we were still in elementary school (SD).

BPUPKI itself forms a committee of nine and also a “Ministry Committee” or committee consisting of 8 people. Some people may already be familiar with the committee of nine, but the “Ministry Committee” is different. Then, do you know who the members of the small committee are? Sinaumed’s, you can find the answer in this article.

Not only small committee members, but this article will describe a little about the profiles of small committee members. So, read this article to the end, OK?

About BPUPKI

The Investigative Agency for Preparatory Efforts for Indonesian Independence, or better known by the abbreviation BPUPKI, is a body formed by the occupying government of the Japanese army. The Japanese military government itself was represented by the 16th and 25th Army commands which approved the formation of the BPUPKI on March 1, 1945.

BPUPKI has 67 members chaired by Dr. Kanjeng Raden Tumenggung (KRT) Radjiman Wedyodiningrat was also deputy chairman of Ichibangase Yosio (i.e. Japanese), as well as Raden Pandji Soeroso.

Because the two commands had already been obtained, only the Java region included the authority of the BPUPKI, including the islands of Madura and Sumatra. Meanwhile, for the Kalimantan and Eastern Indonesia regions no BPUPKI was formed. Even though the Kalimantan and Eastern Indonesia regions were already controlled by the Japanese Navy (AL) command.

The establishment of this agency or BPUPKI itself was announced by Kumakichi Harada on March 1, 1945, but this agency was only really inaugurated on April 29, 1945 or to coincide with Emperor Hirohito’s birthday. This agency itself was formed as an effort to gain support from the Indonesian nation with the aim of promising that Japan would assist the process of Indonesian independence.

About the “Small Committee”

Basically, this “Ministry Committee” was formed by BPUPKI after the first session had ended. During its active period, BPUPKI only held 2 sessions. BPUPKI chaired by Dr. KRT Radjiman Wedyodiningrat, after completing the first session, began to form a “Small Committee” consisting of 8 people.

The “Ministry Committee” itself is referred to as the committee of eight and is tasked with receiving various proposals and collecting them from members who will then attend the second session. Committee 8’s own duties include accommodating, identifying proposals from BPUPKI members, as well as holding meetings and discussing origins that are directly related to preparations for independence. The “Minor Committee” itself is chaired by Ir. Sukarno and seven other members.

Duties of the “Small Committee”

The proposals accommodated by the “Small Committee” or committee of eight were very diverse. The “Ministry Committee” is also tasked with collecting incoming proposals such as:

1. Proposal when asking for Indonesia’s independence as soon as possible
2. Proposals regarding the foundations of the state.
3. Proposals regarding the form and head of state.
4. Proposals regarding unification and federation.
5. Proposals regarding Indonesian citizens.
6. Proposals regarding the region, matters of religion and the state.
7. Proposals regarding statehood.

BPUPKI Small Committee Member Profiles

Below is the profile of BPUPKI’s “Ministry Committee”, which was also published in the book 100 Figures That Changed Indonesia: Short Biography of the Hundred Most Influential Figures in Indonesian History in the 20th Century , then published for the first time by: NARASI Publishers “and also partly taken from various sources:

Sukarno (Chairman)

Soekarno was born in Surabaya, June 1, 1901, with partner Raden Soekemi

a folk school teacher and Ida Ayu Nyoman Rai, a descendant of Balinese royalty. He then took his basic education in Tulungagung, Europeesche Lagere School , Mojokerto, and Hogere Burger School, Surabaya.

Soekarno also earned a civil engineering engineer degree from the Bandung College of Engineering (now known as ITB). Since he was young, Soekarno had felt interested in politics, a world where he could then channel his talent for speech and succeeded in becoming President of the Republic of Indonesia.

Soekarno’s first political debut was when he co-founded the Algemene Studie Club in Bandung in 1926, a discussion club which later turned into a radical political movement. Three months after graduating from college, he also wrote a series of articles with the title Nationalism, Islam, and Marxism in an issue belonging to the Young Indonesia association which attracted the attention of educated people at that time.

He also stressed the importance of national unity, as well as a common front of nationalists, Islamists and Marxists, in an uncompromising (or non-cooperative) resistance against the Netherlands.

At the age of 26, on July 4, 1927 to be precise, Soekarno then founded the Indonesian National Association, which within a year later changed its name to the Indonesian National Party. In 1928, he also inspired the Youth Pledge.

Because of his political activities, Sukarno and several members of the PNI were arrested by the Dutch in 1929, then put on trial. The court actually became a podium for Sukarno to voice his political views.

Moh Hatta (Deputy Chairman)

Mohammad Hatta was born in Aur Tajungkang Mandianin, Bukittinggi, West Sumatra, on August 12, 1902 when the morning sun rose. Even though his religious education background is strong, he does not abandon modern education itself. While studying at HIS Bukittinggi, he also recited the Koran regularly under the teachings of Sheikh Muhammad Djamil Djambek, one of the reformers of Islam in Minangkabau.

While he was studying at MULO, he also received religious guidance from Haji Abdullah Ahmad, who was also a pioneer of Islamic reform in the area. Then he also studied at the high school trade, Prins Hendrik School, in Jakarta. Mohammad Hatta is also treasurer of the Jong Sumatranen Bond (Sumatran Youth Association) in Padang, and as treasurer of the JBS central board in Jakarta.

Through the books he read, Hatta was then able to choose his political direction in the face of colonialism. He began to promote the non-cooperative method in 1918 when he was chairman of the Indonesian Association, an organization of Indonesian students and students in the Netherlands.

Achmad Soebardjo (Member)

Achmad Soebardjo was born in Teluk Jambe, Karawang, West Java, on March 23, 1896. His father was named Teuku Muhammad Yusuf, and was still of Acehnese noble descent from Pidie. Achmad Soebardjo’s paternal grandfather was Ulee Balang as well as a scholar in the Lueng Putu area. Meanwhile, Teuku Yusuf is a government employee with the position of Police Mantri in the Teluk Jambe area, Karawang. Her mother’s name was Wardinah.

He is also of Javanese-Bugis descent, and is the son of the Camat in Telukagung, Cirebon. His father initially gave him the name Teuku Abdul Manaf, while his mother gave him the name Achmad Soebardjo. He also added the name Djojoadisoerjo himself when he was an adult, when he was detained in Ponorogo prison because of the “3 July 1946 incident”.

Soebardjo also attended Hogere Burger School , Jakarta (currently he is equivalent to High School) in 1917. Then, he also continued his education at Leiden University, the Netherlands and obtained a Meester in de Rechten diploma (currently he is equivalent to a Bachelor of Laws) in law in 1933.

On August 16, 1945, young fighters, including Chaerul Saleh, Sukarni, and Wikana, Shodanco Singgih, and other youths, took Soekarno and Moh. Hatta to Rengasdengklok. The goal itself is that Ir. Soekarno and Drs. Moh. Hatta was not influenced by Japan. This event itself is called the Rengasdengklok Incident. Here, they also re-assured Sukarno that Japan had surrendered and the fighters were ready to fight the Japanese, whatever the risk.

Agus Salim (Member)

Agus Salim was born with the name Mashudul Haq, in October 1884 in Gadang City, Bukittinggi. He is also one of the few native children who can enjoy a Dutch education. The son of a former prosecutor from West Sumatra was also the best graduate at a Dutch high school ( Hogere Burger School – HBS).

His talent is also extraordinary in mastering foreign languages. In fact, he is also able to speak nine languages, starting from Dutch, English, German, French, Arabic, Turkish, Japanese, as well as Indonesian and Minang languages.

After graduating from HBS, Agus Salim actually wanted to become a doctor. However, in the end he had to abandon his dream because there was no money to study in the Netherlands. That said, in fact he could have studied in the Netherlands thanks to the help of RA. Kartini.

Moh Yamin (Member)

Moh Yamin, as a man who was born in Sawahlunto, West Sumatra, on August 23, 1903, was indeed agile enough to play on the political stage. He is also one of the founding fathers who later formed Indonesia. When Japan replaced the Netherlands, Yamin also sat as a member of BPUPKI.

At BPUPKI, he also worked out the concepts of the Principles and Fundamentals of the State of the Republic of Indonesia and their contents were also not much different from the sound of Pancasila which we know today, namely the Fairy of Nationality, the Fairy of God, the Fairy of Democracy, the Fairy of Humanity, and People’s Welfare.

At the BPUPKI meeting on May 29, 1945, Yamin also emphasized that the new state to be formed would be the Indonesian national state. The point was that the new state must be based on new nationalism, not Sriwijaya and Majapahit nationalism, the traditions of the Sriwijaya or Majapahit kingdoms which were replaced by the Republic of Indonesia.

KH Abdul Wahid Hasyim (Member)

KH Abdul Wahid Hasyim, as a leader of Nahdlatul Ulama (NU) who helped decorate the Indonesian nation’s political journey. He was also included in the BPUPKI Sub-Committee which was then formed to find the best solution for the nation’s future. BPUPKI itself is a body formed by Japan and is also tasked with preparing the shape and basis of the state. The BPUPKI sub-committee was ultimately successful in formulating the basis of the state.

The result of this agreement is also known as the “Jakarta Charter” which was then included in the preambule of the 1945 Constitution and ratified on June 22, 1945. In one of the Pancasila precepts formulated by Wahid Hasyim, et al. Among other things, the words “obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents” are listed. It turned out that this formulation was later debated in the next BPUPKI session

Abdul Kahar Muzakir (Member)

Prof. KH. Abdul Kahar Muzakir, was born in Gading, Playen, Gunung Kidul, Yogyakarta, on 16 April 1907 and died in Yogyakarta, on 2 December 1973 at the age of 66. He was also the Magnificus Chancellor who was chosen by the Islamic University of Indonesia for the first time under the name Islamic College (STI) in 2 periods 1945-1948 and 1948-1960.

He was also a member of the BPUPKI and an Islamic figure who had been a member of the Dokuritsu Junbi Chōsakai (the Investigating Agency for Preparatory Efforts for Indonesian Independence). He served as Chancellor of UII until 1960. Then on 8 November 2019, Abdul Kahar Muzakir was also awarded the title of National Hero by President Joko Widodo in a ceremony at the State Palace, and received a family award represented by heir Siti Jauharoh, daughter of Abdul Kahar Muzakir.

Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso (Member)

Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso, born in Karanganyar City, Kebumen in 1897 and died in 1968. He was one of the Founding Fathers of Indonesian Independence and a signatory to the constitution. He was also a member of the Committee of Nine that drafted the preamble to the 1945 Constitution (and also known as the Jakarta Charter).

After independence, he served as Minister of Transportation in a first Presidential Cabinet of Sukarno and also became an adviser to the Bureau of Public Works. Tjokrosoejoso’s older brother was Oemar Said Tjokroaminoto, the first leader of Sarekat Islam. After the death of his brother, on December 17, 1934, Abikoesno also inherited the position of leader of the Indonesian Islamic Sarekat Party (PSII).

Together with Mohammad Husni Thamrin and Amir Sjarifuddin, Tjokrosoejoso later formed the Indonesian Political Alliance, a united front consisting of all political parties, groups and social organizations advocating the country’s independence.

Related Books

SMA/MA Interactive Book of History of Indonesia Class 10 Semester 2

History and Indonesian Nationalism The ideals of Indonesian unity are not idle talk, but are truly supported by forces that arise from the historical roots of the Indonesian nation itself. (Muhammad Yamin)

History examines human life in the past. From the stories of the past, history students can take lessons and lessons to be applied in their lives today. Therefore, history can be a reflection for life in the present and the future.

History can be used as a tool for a nation to instill a national spirit in its next generation. Through history, the next generation of the nation can trace the origins and development of their nation so that they are instilled with pride in their homeland.

The question is, what book is suitable for the above purposes? This Indonesian History Interactive Book is the answer. Unlike other books which only contain conventional content, this book presents digital content that you can access. This is where the interactive lies in this book. Through this interactive learning, you will be invited to walk the winding road of the nation you love. From here you can instill nationalism and promote Indonesian unity.

SMA/MA SMK/MAK Class XI Indonesian History Compulsory Semester 1 Revision 2016

How can you develop nationalism through studying history? Indonesian History Homework Book Class XI Semester! this will help you take meaning from learning history.

This book will train you to develop historical insight. Through this book you are invited to be critical and thorough in dealing with past events. This book also invites you to take positive values ​​from historical events and imitate the spirit of nationalism of historical figures.

Thus, through studying Indonesian History, your spirit of nationalism will develop.

USBN Seconds of History of Indonesia SMA/MA Year 2017/2018

The question is what about USBN? Based on information from reliable sources, 20% to 25% of the USBN questions are prepared by the government, while 75% to 80% of the questions are prepared by the SMA/MA Subject Teacher Consultation (MGMP) or equivalent. Even though the USBN questions were made by the central government and the MGMP, the USBN grid is national in nature. So, both the questions made by the government and the MGMP, the reference remains one, namely the national grid compiled and determined by the BSNP.

Interesting, right? No less interesting than USBN is the form of the questions. If the UN questions are all in the form of multiple choices, this is not the case with USBN. At the USBN later, apart from answering multiple choice questions, you must answer descriptive questions. Answering descriptive questions is clearly more difficult than answering multiple choice questions because description questions do not provide alternative answers.

If in the multiple choice questions you can guess the answers provided, in the description questions you cannot guess. You will not be able to answer essay questions if you do not understand the material in question. Therefore, from now on you have to practice a lot on essay questions for the subjects tested on USBN.

This Seconds book is equipped with description questions as a means of practicing dealing with USBN. This is the special of Detik-Detik . You can use this book as a means of practicing preparing for UN and USBN. You are really lucky.

This is a discussion of the members of the small committee along with their brief profiles. If Sinaumed’s wants to find Indonesian history books, he can look for his books at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information. Hope it’s useful!

What are  the characteristics of a humble person?  Humility is one of the attitudes that a person can have. However, it turns out that not everyone can have a humble attitude.

People who have a humble attitude are those who can feel a peace within themselves. Someone who is humble will let them know how much ability or capacity they have. Humble people also don’t meddle in other people’s business.

Moreover, the characteristics of a humble person? This article will discuss the characteristics of a humble person.

The Kimi and Kino series is a continuation of the Kimi and Mimi series. This series will encourage children to behave well from an early age. Delivered through the everyday experiences of Kimi and his little brother, Kino, and their cat, Mimi. From their stories, children will be taught to respect, love others as well as animals, be fair, learn to compromise, forgive, empathize, be grateful, share, be honest, humble, and persistent.

Characteristics of a Humble Person

1. Respect the views of others

People who have a humble attitude can respect the views of others. They will respect other people’s point of view, even if it is different from their own. According to them, everyone has the same right to have their ideas considered.

However bad or good. Those who are humble will be willing to hear and accept the viewpoints of others. It was done without any interruption.

In addition, the characteristics of a humble person will not belittle other people. They will always cherish someone. Even if they don’t approve of another person’s treatment or thought, they won’t just cut it short and blame someone else.

2. Good listener

One of the characteristics of a humble person is being a good listener. When someone is telling something, then he will listen carefully. In addition, the characteristics of humble people are that they will listen more than talk.

A humble person does not exaggerate what is said. They talk about something as it is. In another sense, humble people tend to tell the truth.

A person who has humility will not act to be accepted by someone. They are not looking for a validation. A humble person certainly wouldn’t ask someone for acknowledgment.

Someone who is humble will have high empathy. When someone needs help, he will try to be able to help. Not solely because you want to be dominant, but because you sincerely want to help.

3. Don’t feel jealous of other people’s fun

For those who are humble, the success or pleasure of others is a good thing. They will feel happy when other people succeed in doing something. The characteristics of a humble person in this case are not jealous of the pleasures or success that others receive.

Humble people will actually celebrate it. They will also feel happy with the pleasure or success that someone gets. Humble people will also sincerely congratulate you on the achievement you receive.

Instead of feeling jealous, those who are humble will use that as a reference. What this means is that they will use the success of others to motivate themselves. When they see others succeed, they will use it to motivate them to achieve similar success.

4. Accept criticism, opinions and suggestions from others

The characteristics of humble people can also accept input from others. Whether it’s input in the form of criticism, opinions or suggestions from others. Also, they will understand that there are two sides to any argument or opinion.

Both sides are the side of criticism and suggestions and in the form of praise. Humble people will happily accept both sides of an argument. For them, criticism and suggestions are things that can build.

Not to discourage, it will actually make them even more excited. In this case, humble people will try to be even better in the future. The way to get better is to accept input from others.

The opposite is also true when receiving a compliment. Compliments are given for a good thing. However, those who are humble are not immediately satisfied with the praise they receive.

5. Treat everyone equally

The characteristics of a humble person will also treat everyone equally. They will see that everyone has the same rights and obligations. A humble person will treat everyone with kindness and equality.

They will not see others in a better or worse light. They will not discriminate against a person. Everyone has the same dignity, that’s the characteristics of a humble person.

A humble person will also not see himself as a very special person. They will not see themselves as people who should get special treatment. People who have a humble attitude will put themselves on equal footing with others. In fact, they are also quick to appreciate the contributions of others.

Characteristics of a Humble Person

6. Willing to admit mistakes

Of course, everyone can make mistakes. Mistakes made also vary. It can occur due to an element of accident or on purpose.

A mistake made will certainly result in something. However, it is not his fault that we will discuss here. But how to behave after making a mistake.

There are some people who actually run when they make a mistake. Others will admit their mistakes. Then it will apologize and correct the mistake.

People who are willing to admit mistakes are humble people. That’s because it has become the characteristics of humble people. Humble people are willing to admit mistakes and will try to fix them.

Admitting mistakes is not an easy thing to do. However, for those who are humble it is certainly not a difficult thing. People who have a humble nature will always admit the mistakes they have made and will correct them.

When they make a mistake, they don’t look for excuses. The only thing to do is apologize. On the other hand, if they were right then they would not be arrogant or snobbish. So, the characteristics of a humble person are willing to admit mistakes that have been made.

7. Can be invited to work together

Sometimes, people who think they are great actually make them arrogant or arrogant. Then, people who are arrogant or arrogant tend to be difficult to work with or compromise. The opposite is true for humble people.

The characteristics of humble people are that they can be invited to work together. They will make time to meet and work together. In addition, the cooperation carried out certainly has benefits between the two parties.

This applies in all aspects. Both in terms of work or relationship aspects. They will gladly agree to cooperate and compromise.

8. Have many friends

A humble person will certainly be liked by others. That is the reason they will have many friends. Humble people tend to think flexibly.

In addition, they are people who easily get along with anyone. Even though the other person has a different mindset from him. The difference in mindset actually becomes a color for the relationship.

This is one of the characteristics of a humble person. They have many friends. People who have a humble attitude get along well. In addition, they will rarely experience a dispute or a conflict with others.

9. Can control the ego

By definition, ego means “I” or “self”. Ego can be said as a person’s perception. This perception is related to self-esteem which will further affect self-confidence.

Of course, everyone has an ego. However, what must be underlined is that every ego is not always negative. Sometimes, a person’s ego can direct that person to positive things.

However, there are times when a person cannot control his ego properly. This happens in reality, and creates a selfish attitude. Therefore, selfishness is an attitude in a person who emphasizes or prioritizes himself. In another sense, they feel that their desires are the most important thing above other interests.

People who have a humble attitude are generally able to control their ego. It is less likely to get involved in a dispute. Especially things that will involve an ego.

This is because they will understand that every human being will have a different perspective. This is what makes the characteristics of humble people able to control their ego. They will assume that the perspective of the other person has a valuable value, just like the perspective he has.

10. Often put the interests of others first

Often prioritizing the interests of others does not mean always giving in and not having a  power . However, people who have a humble nature will understand how their pride is. Therefore, they will rarely stand out or present themselves in front of others.

Especially if the goal is just to show how great and smart they are. They would not do such things. They tend to show more often in terms of action, rather than talk.

In addition, they will also realize that many things may be more important than what they want. They will determine the priority scale. Even if the interests of others are more important, they will still take precedence.

This is one form of their concern for others. Humble people will let others meet their needs first. After that, they will carry out their needs.

11. Have high curiosity

Humble people will have high curiosity. They are abashed learners, or thirsty for knowledge. People who have humility generally want to always want to know more. It has become the characteristics of a humble person.

However, being curious here doesn’t mean bad things. For example, curiosity about science. Not that they are always dissatisfied, but they will think that having more knowledge is a good thing.

They will take more time to learn something. Either academically, or learn about experience from a source. This is also what makes humble people identified as serious people.

12. Always say thank you

Saying thank you seems trivial. However, one’s goal in saying thank you is to appreciate. They will appreciate what they receive from someone through words of thanks.

So it is with humble people. The characteristics of humble people are often say thank you. Even in small things though.

It includes a humble attitude. They will always say thank you for any help or something given by others. A simple example is the courier who delivers the package, or the parking attendant who helps cross the street.

13. Not ashamed to ask for help

The next characteristic of a humble person is that they don’t feel proud easily. Examples include asking for help for trivial or simple things. Those who have a humble attitude will not hesitate to do so.

If they really need help, they will ask for it. Another example when finding a difficulty in doing something. They will not hesitate to ask for help from others.

14. Have empathy

Humility is closely related to empathy. This is another characteristic of humble people. They will try to understand the other person’s position.

In addition, people who are humble will certainly not judge other people’s certain situations. When other people have difficult circumstances, they don’t judge them. Those are the traits of a humble person.

They also don’t only empathize with those closest to them. However, to everyone who is going through a bad situation. They will try to help the person as best they can.

People who have a humble attitude will try to be useful for others. This was done without thinking of a profit. They will not demand a reward from the people they help.

15. Don’t blame others

When a problem occurs, a humble person will not easily blame others. They will see from the problems that occur first. After that, then they will see how the problem can arise or can happen.

This is one of the characteristics of a humble person. They will see from all points of view. They will not easily blame others.

Those are 15 characteristics of humble people. It’s good to be a humble person. However, don’t let something good make you arrogant.

Find more information at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always provide recommendations for interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Author: Wida Kurniasih

Source: from various sources

• • Definition of Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Needs Accompanied by Examples
  • Definition and Characteristics of Poetry (Old & New)
  • Various New Employee Career Goals and Planning
  • Definition, Kinds and Examples of Press Release
  • Understanding Crafts: Benefits, Purpose, and Types of Crafts

Klitih is – Klitih is one of the topics that is increasingly being discussed on social media. The term klitih is back in the spotlight, because various criminal acts in Jogja have been increasing lately. This example of the Klitih case occurred several times in Yogyakarta which occurred at night when several streets were starting to be quiet.

To find out more about Klitih, you can see a more complete explanation about Klitih starting from the definition, causes, laws, and steps to avoid Klitih. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Get to know Klitih

Klitih is a disturbing phenomenon for the people of Yogyakarta. This sudden and unexpected violence was carried out at night by two or more perpetrators. The weapons used are generally swords, machetes, and other sharp weapons. Klitih is also a phenomenon of juvenile delinquency that leads to crime. This klitih phenomenon itself acts on behalf of school gangs or groups of teenagers who attack each other.

The origin of the name Klitih, as explained by the criminal sociologist at Gadjah Mada University, Drs. Soeprapto, SU said that klitih comes from the Javanese language, namely klitah-klitih. In fact, the term clit was initially positive. Because, klitih is defined as an activity to fill free time that is positive. Examples of activities include traveling, sewing, reading, and so on.

However, the times have made this cliché meaning turn negative. Klitih is currently associated with criminal acts committed by two people traveling around on motorbikes.

The history of Klitih itself starts from 2007-2009 in Yogyakarta. At that time the Yogyakarta government made various policies regarding brawls. Students who participate in brawls will be returned to their parents. This policy eventually makes students bored because there are no activities. Finally, these students look for other activities, namely riding motorbikes and traveling around town, then they look for random enemies who are generally fellow students.

Causes of Klitih

In a research journal entitled “Factors for Determining Klitih Behavior”, it was identified that there is adolescent aggressiveness which ultimately causes or gives rise to clit behavior. The cause of klitih itself is a group of teenagers who have the same hobbies and activities. These teenagers have a sense of comfort and compatibility that arises from the group.

Like teenagers in general, they can also be influenced by other teenagers their age, so this friendship will lead to a negative direction, such as delinquency, drugs, and promiscuity. In this journal it is also explained that someone who commits violence aims to be recognized by the group. This recognition is also necessary so that a person can be included in a gang or group member.

Judging from the aspect of inter-group relations, it is known that a teenager will get a better name in his circle of friends or hangouts when they manage to injure other people on the street. However, there are two interesting results of this study to ponder, related to the emergence of clit behavior.

First, it is related to the condition of the house which can affect the behavior of adolescents which leads to clit, namely the disharmony of a household, which causes a child to not get the love and attention they need. In the end, these teenagers tend to look for it in the group.

The factor of domestic violence (domestic violence) also influences a child’s psychology, so that in the end when they grow up children become unable to control their emotions, and are unable to think clearly. Second, in addition to a household that is not harmonious, the absence of a role model is also one of the causes of aggressiveness and inability to control emotions.

In this study, it was stated that some of the teenagers who were used as research subjects did not know their parents. Finally, these teens become more easily carried away in the group. Neglect of a teenager in the school environment and the environment where he lives also triggers aggressive behavior, which ultimately leads to criminal acts. Like joining a clit group.

Tips for Avoiding Klitih

Increasingly, crimes and criminal acts are increasingly prevalent. Especially on the street, where criminals roam around looking for victims. Whether it’s pickpocketing, mugging, fraud, or sexual harassment, there are so many crimes that can happen on the street, and we can all be victims of them.

Well, here below are tips that you can apply to avoid crime on the road.

Beware of Surrounding Conditions

Being aware of your surroundings is the most basic way you should practice to avoid crime. You will not be able to avoid the crime of klitih if you are not vigilant, for example, when you want to listen to music with a headset, adjust the volume. This needs to be done so that you can still hear the sounds around you.

Also, when walking alone at night, avoid using gadgets and just stay focused on the road and your surroundings.

As much as possible avoid traveling alone

If you want to go to a place in Yogyakarta that is far away or you have never visited before, as much as possible, never go alone. People who go alone have a greater risk of being a victim of clit, especially if you seem confused and look around for the address you’re looking for.

What’s more, if you’re a girl and you want to go out at night, it’s wise to ask someone to accompany you, and whenever possible, ask a man, whether that’s a friend, partner, or family member, to accompany you.

Look for Busy and Light Routes

When walking or driving try to choose a well-lit and busy road. Especially at night. Don’t feel at a loss if indeed to pass that road you have to turn quite far. It’s okay to be a little tired when compared to having to get a clit.

Do not use jewelry or excessive expensive items

For this one step, chances are you already know. Because, using jewelry excessively is an act that can provoke crime. You shouldn’t spend other expensive items such as jewelry, gadgets, and the like if you don’t really need them. Always appear simple and avoid showing off in order to maintain your own safety.

Use a Safe Bag in a Safe Way

The bag you use can also determine whether you manage to avoid crime or not. A bag that is thinner and easier to open is certainly a bad choice and will increase the risk of losing things in public places. So, use a bag with a thick material and more tightly closed.

The way you carry your bag is also important. If you carry a bag with only one hand, a mugger will easily snatch it from your hand. Meanwhile, if you use a backpack, you should just carry it in front of your body so that it’s easier for you to keep an eye on it. Don’t let valuables just disappear just because of how to carry a bag that is not wise enough.

Make sure your cellphone is always ready

At certain times, maybe you are in a situation that is quite dangerous but you cannot ask those around you for help. So, the only way you can do is ask for help via cellphone . Use the speed dial feature so you can call family or friends quickly.

However, in order to contact other people, of course your cellphone must be ready. So, make sure you never run out of battery. Always top up your credit and quota, so you don’t run out of battery and quota in an emergency. In addition, as much as possible use a provider card with a broad and stable signal so that you don’t experience signal difficulty when you have to ask for help.

Always carry objects that can be used for self-defense

In an emergency when you’re forced to face off against a bad guy, you also need to defend yourself as best you can. If the criminal is only after your luggage, just let it take it as the wisest move. Especially if the criminal is holding a gun.

However, if he is targeting you, then fight it. As much as possible, always carry an object that you can use to defend yourself. It can be a stun gun, pepper spray, umbrella, or even an iron bar that you deliberately carry with you just in case. Having martial arts skills will also be very helpful, but try to keep using an object as a weapon that will make it easier for you to take down the bad guy.

Apart from that, you can also use this object to fend off attacks, and most importantly, don’t hesitate to paralyze and even injure the criminal in self-defense.

Those are some steps to avoid clit. It would be even better if you always go with friends or relatives so you can minimize clit actions. In fact, it’s good when you come home too late, preferably on a busy and bright street.

Klitih Criminal Law

Klitih has a very negative impact and worries the community. The negative impact of this clit can also cause trauma, severe injuries, and even death to the victims. In addition, klitih can damage the morale of the next generation and disrupt order.

Therefore, klitih entered into violent crimes. Klitih is also regulated in the Criminal Code (KUHP) article 170. The following is the contents of the Criminal Code regarding Klitih:

(1) Any person who openly and collectively uses violence against a person or property, is subject to a maximum imprisonment of five years and six months.

(2) While the guilty party shall be punished: By a maximum imprisonment of seven years, if he deliberately destroys objects or if the violence used results in various serious injuries. With a maximum imprisonment of nine years, if the violence results in serious injury. With a maximum imprisonment of twelve years, if violence results in death.

Related Books

Playing Punch: Typical Betawi Pencak Silat

It cannot be denied, judging from the remains of art and culture, the Betawi ethnic group was formed from the acculturation of several ethnic groups that once inhabited the area that is now the capital of the Republic of Indonesia. Through a long evolution, the process of smelting several ethnic groups took place, giving birth to new ethnicities and cultures, regardless of the main culture that influenced them.

One of the products of acculturation and assimilation is the cultural element of martial arts martial arts, which the local people call Maen Punch. The acculturation and assimilation background makes Maen Punch a typical Betawi martial arts, which has the richness and diversity of schools, movement characteristics, forms of moves, even traditional weapons.

In its development, Maen Punch or Betawi martial arts, became the most important part of social life, became a Betawi identity that coupled with religious life, so that expressions of prayer and silat were born. Prayer and silat are simple personifications of the Betawi people in applying Islamic teachings about “hablum minallah and hablum minannas” , how to establish a relationship between a servant and his Creator and maintain relationships between people and other creatures.

Heist Society#2: Uncommon Criminals

After successfully leading her crew to steal paintings from the world’s greatest museums, Katarina Bishop—who is actually still a teenager—becomes famous among thieves. Because of that, he wasn’t too surprised when someone asked him to steal the Cleopatra Emerald so that the precious stone could be returned to its rightful owner. The problem is, the stone has been hidden for thirty years and has never been shown to the public. Not to mention the matter of determining the best strategy for this theft. But the biggest problem that makes Kat’s crew the most nervous is that… the emerald is cursed!

Reportedly, Cleopatra—the first owner of the emerald—even committed suicide after cutting the stone, and so far no one has managed to break the curse! This time, maybe Kat can’t rely on the old tricks in the world’s long history of theft. He must use all his talents, with the help of billionaire boy Hale and the rest of his crew.

Mozu Crime Records And Other Laughter Stories

When it comes to respect for religious traditions, NU kiai and Catholic priests are similar. But when it comes to jokes, the impression is that the Kyai wins. But after reading MoZu’s book, I think he managed to beat NU in the 90+3 minute injury time. The score is equally strong, Nadirsyah Hosen (Gus Nadir) Rais Syuriyah PCI Nahdlatul Ulama, in Australia – New Zealand.

In easy-to-digest language, Father Andreas Zu offers extraordinary moral and spiritual messages through seemingly ordinary life stories. Jokes taken from the life of the robed people, both during their education and when they were working, make our lips smile and even provoke laughter, invite our minds to think, even our hearts are touched so that we feel sympathetically reprimanded and strengthened to live more optimistically, humorously and humanely. Mgr. Antonius Subianto Bunjamin, OSC (Bishop of Bandung Diocese).

The stories in this book are mostly true stories, of admiration for how life presents silliness for silliness. God never allows us to be sad. There are cute decorations as entertainment in the midst of life. Experiencing a journey that is decorated with the sundries of the world of laughter, makes life feel full of passion. When life feels dry, these stories exist as refreshing oases.

Closing

This is information about clit , which is accompanied by steps to avoid it and its causes. Hopefully this article is useful!

Adding insight about crime can be done by reading books. If you want to find books about crime, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Kirchoff’s Laws – In Physics, Sinaumed’s definitely learns about electricity or electricity. In this chapter, you will usually get acquainted with Kirchoff’s Laws 1 and 2, which discuss the matter of electrical conduction. Kirchoff’s law is used as a basis for understanding electric circuits, especially closed electricity.

Yup , by understanding Kirchoff’s laws Sinaumed’s can analyze various simple electrical circuits by changing the series and parallel combinations of resistors present in a circuit with many resistors in it.

Then, what exactly is meant by Kirchoff’s laws 1 and 2? Let’s discuss together here.

Acquaintance with the Inventor of Kirchoff’s Law: Gustav Robert Kirchhoff

Gustav Robert Kirchoff was a German physicist born on March 12, 1824 who died at the age of 63, on October 17, 1887 to be precise. Kirchoff was born to Friedrich Kirchoff and Johanna Henriette Wittke. Friedrich, his father, was a lawyer by profession at that time.

At the age of 23, Kirchoff married a woman named Clara Richelot. From this marriage, he has two daughters and three sons. In 1869, Richelot died and Kirchoff finally married again to Luise Brommel in 1872.

Part of Kirchoff’s life was spent as a professor and professor of physics. From this dedication, he succeeded in discovering circuit law formulas for electrical engineering, the laws of thermodynamics or thermal radiation, and contributed to the field of spectroscopy.

You can find out a more complete biography of Gustav Robert Kirchoff and other physicists in the book Encyclopedia of 20th Century Physicists written by Taufik Hidayat.

Kirchhoff’s Law 1

Kirchoff’s law 1 is also known as the junction rule or the law of branching which fulfills the conservation of charge. This law is usually used in multi-symptom circuits and has several branching points that divide the electric current.

In a constant state, there is no accumulation of electric charge at any point in the circuit. This means, the amount of charge that goes into each point is equal to the amount of charge that comes out of that point.

This is in line with the sound of Kirchoff’s law 1 which says:

“The sum of the electric currents going into a branch point will equal the sum of the currents leaving that point.”

To understand better, take a look at the image below.

The basis for the sound of this law is taken from the Law of the Conservation of Charge which has the sound “The charge at point A will be the same as the charge at Point B”. But with notes, there are no external forces acting in this series.

It’s like a tourist bus carrying 50 people from Bandung to Jakarta. Since departing from Bandung to arriving at their destination in Jakarta, the number of passengers on the bus remained 50. With a note, no passengers were left behind during breaks at rest areas and other incidents.

Kirchoff’s Law Formula 1

Kirchoff’s law formula is as follows:

Information:

Σ Input = Total incoming current (Ampere)
Σ Iout = Total current going out (Ampere)

So, so that Sinaumed’s can understand more about this Kirchoff 1 law formula, let’s practice by understanding the example questions below.

Look at this picture of the electrical circuit:

Question:
What amount of current is there in I4?

Solution:
Total incoming current = total outgoing current. So:
I1 + I4 = I2 + I3
5 A + I4 = 10 A + 2 A
I4 = 12 A – 5A
I4 = 7 A
So, the answer to the question is 2 A.

Kirchhoff’s Law 2

Kirchoff’s law 2 or the loop rule has a potential difference between two branching points in a circuit that is in a constant state.

This law is proof of the law of conservation of energy. Where if the charge Q that exists at any point has a potential V, then the energy possessed by that charge is QV.

Then, as the charge begins to move through the loop, it gains or loses energy as it passes through an element. However, when the charge returns to its starting point, the energy in the charge returns to QV.

Here is an explanation of Kirchoff’s law 2 which reads:

“The sum of the total voltages around the closed loop in a network, has a magnitude equal to zero”.

Usually Kirchoff’s laws discuss loops in an electric circuit like the one in the picture below. The goal is to measure how much the voltage potential difference is in a circuit that has no branches.

Kirchoff’s Law Formula 2

Kirchoff’s 2nd law formula is as follows:

Kirchoff’s Rule of Law

Apart from the formula, you also have to pay attention to some rules from Kirchoff’s law which will help you understand it. These rules are as follows:

One

For each closed path, Sinaumed’s must choose a loop with a certain direction. You are free to determine the direction of the loop (whether you want it clockwise or counterclockwise), but it’s better to use the direction that goes with the current.

Two

If the direction of the loop in a branch is the same as the direction of the current, then the voltage drop (IR) will have a positive sign. If the direction is opposite, then the sign becomes negative.

For example, the direction of the loop and the current is clockwise, so the voltage drop is positive.

Loop in the direction of current

Three

If when following the direction of the loop, the pole of the voltage source encountered for the first time is the positive pole, then the Electric Force Movement (EMF) will have a positive sign.

Application of Kirchoff’s Laws in Everyday Life

Generally, to understand the laws that exist in Physics, we are invited to see their application in everyday life. This method will be easier to understand because we experience it ourselves and understand every change and how it works.

It’s different if you only learn from textbooks. Sometimes the sound of the law is difficult to understand. Especially when added with certain formulas. The more difficult it is for us to understand.

Unfortunately, when studying Kirchoff’s laws you cannot rely on this strategy. This is because the application of Kirchoff’s laws in everyday life is quite difficult for our eyes to see directly.

Its application is in the form of a formula used to run electrical circuits, namely series circuits and parallel circuits. The easiest example to describe these two circuits is the lights in the house.

If you use a series circuit at home, the lamp that is closest to the switch or power source will definitely glow brighter than the lamp that is far from the power source.

If what is used for the lights in your house is a parallel circuit, then all the lights will light up with the same level of brightness regardless of the difference in distance between the lights and the power source.

So the question is, when do we actually have to analyze a circuit? Then who can analyze it? You can see the answer below:

1. We analyze circuits when we want to check for damage to a device.
2. We analyze circuits when we build our own electronic circuits by studying pre-existing circuits.

Kirchoff’s law itself has advantages, which can be used to analyze very complicated circuits. For example, when Sinaumed’s wants to replicate an electronic circuit that has a different specification, you have to replace some of the components in it. Either that, increase or decrease the resistance value of the resistor.

So that you can determine the appropriate component, you must calculate the value of the voltage and current in the circuit.

Example of Kirchoff’s Law Problem 1 and Discussion

Problem 1

In the simple circuit below, the current flowing in I1 = 20 A, I2 = 4 A, and I4 = 8 A. Determine the value of I3!

It is known:
I1 = 20 Amperes
I2 = 4 Amperes
I4 = 8 Amperes

Asked: I3?

Answer:

According to the data that has been mentioned, this problem can be solved using the Kirchoff 1 law formula, namely:

ΣImasuk = ΣIkeluar
I1 = I2 + I3 + I4
20 = 4 + I3 + 8
20 = 12 +I3
I3 = 20-12= 8 Ampere

So the answer to the question is 8 Amperes.

Problem 2

In the simple circuit below, the current flowing at I1 = 15 Amperes, I3 = 7 Amperes, I4 = 8 Amperes and I5 = 5 Amperes. Determine the value of I2!

Diketahui:
I1 = 15 Ampere
I3 = 7 Ampere
I4 = 8 Ampere
I5 ​​= 5 Ampere

Asked: I2?

Answer:

According to the data that has been mentioned, this problem can be solved using the Kirchoff 1 law formula, namely:

ΣImasuk = ΣIkeluar
I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 + I5
20 + I2 = 7 + 8 + 5
I2 = 20-15
I2 = 20-15= 5 Ampere

So the strong current on I2 is 5 Amperes.

Problem 3

If I1 in question number one is increased by 25%, determine the ratio of the initial and final I3 values.

Discussion:

Diketahui:
I1 = 20 Ampere
I2 = 4 Ampere
I4 = 8 Ampere
I3 = 8 Ampere
I1’= 20 + (20 x 0.25) = 25 Ampere

Ditanyakan: I3:I3′?

Answer:

According to existing data, this problem can be solved using Kirchoff’s 1st law formula:

ΣImasuk = ΣIkeluar
I1′ = I2 + I3′ + I4
25 = 4 + I3′ + 8
25 = 12 +I3′
I3′ = 25-12= 13 Ampere
I3:I3’= 8:13

So the initial and final I3 comparison is 8:13.

Example of Kirchoff’s Law Questions 2 and Discussion

Problem 1

Discussion:

Diketahui:
R1 = 3 ohms
R2 = 2 ohms
R3 = 1 ohm
є1 = 12 Volts
є2 = 24 Volts

Asked: I?

Answer:

According to existing data, this problem can be solved using the Kirchoff 2 law formula:

Discussion:

First, determine the direction of the loop first. To make it easier to do, the direction of the loop is the same as the direction of the electric current (I)

To make it easier to calculate and write, they are written sequentially

Σє + ΣIR = 0
IR2 + є1 + IR1 + IR3 -є2 = 0
I(2) + 12 + I(3) + I(1) -24 =0
6I-12=0
I=12/6= 2 Ampere

So the current strength in I is 2 Amperes.

Problem 2

If it is known that ε1 = 16 V; ε2 = 8V; ε3 = 10V; R1 = 12 ohms; R2 = 6 ohms; and R3 = 6 ohms. How big is the electric current I?

Diketahui:
ε1 = 16 V
ε2 = 8 V
ε3 = 10 V
R1 = 12 ohm
R2 = 6 ohm
R3 = 6 ohm.

Asked: I?

Discussion:

First, determine the direction of the loop first.

The calculation starts from R1

Σє + ΣIR = 0
IxR1 – ε1 + I1xR2 = 0
I(6) – 16 + I1(6) = 0
12I + 6I1 = 16 ….. > dibagi 2
6I + 3I1 =8
karena I1+I2=I, maka
6(I1+I2) +3I1 = 8
6I1 + 6I2 + 3I1 = 8
9I1 + 6I2 = 8

Loop 2 which is on the right
In loop 2, the direction of current I1 is opposite to the direction of the loop until, I1 is negative (-), until

Σє + ΣIR = 0
I2xR3 + ε2 – I1xR2 + ε3 = 0
I2(6) + 8 – I1(6) + 10 = 0
6I2 – 6I1 + 18 = 0
– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18

Elimination

9I1 + 6I2 = 8
– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18
—————– (-)
15I1 + 0 = 26
I1 = 26/15 A
-6I1 + 6I2 = -18 …..> -6(26/15) + 6I2 = -18…> I2=12/5 A
I=I1+I2= (26/15) + (12/5) = 4,13 A

so the current strength in I is 4.13 Amperes.

Problem 3

A circuit is known as below. What will happen to the electric current in the circuit if switch S is closed. Then what is the power at R = 2 Ω? when R1 = 2 Ω, R2 = 4 Ω, R3 = 1 Ω, є1 = 12 V, є2 = 8 V

Discussion:

First determine the direction of the current and the direction of the loop. In this case the direction of the current is the same as the direction of the loop so that The image above becomes

Loop 1

ε + IR + 0 or Φ +ΙR = 0
-ε1 + I1 R2 + I R1 =0
-12 + 4I1 + 2I=0
4I1+2I=12
I=I1+I2
2(I1+I2)+4I1=12
2I1 +2I2+4I1=12
6I1+2I2=12 :2 = 3I1+I2=6

Loop 2

8 – I1 R2 +I2 R3=0
8 – I1 4 + I2 1=0
4I1-I2=8

Elimination

3I1+I2=6
4I1-I2=8
———- (+)
7I1=14
I1=2
3I1+I2=6
3(2)+I2=6
I2=6-6=0 Ampere
I=I1+I2=2+0=2 Ampere

Power on R1

P=(I^2)R1
=(2^2)2=8 Watt

So the power on R2 is 8 Watts

Problem 4

Determine the value of the current strength of the circuit below and the clamping voltage at the KJ point. If it is known, ε1= 5 volts, r1 = 1 Ω, R1= 2 Ω, ε2= 17 volts, r2 = 1 Ω, R2= 2 Ω.

Discussion:

Wanted: Determine the value of the current strength (I) of the circuit below and the clamping point voltage KJ(V)

Answer

The first step is to determine the direction of the current and the direction of the loop. To make it easy to direct current and unidirectional loops. Like the picture below.

VKJ= ε2+Ir2
VKJ= 17+1=18 Volts

The current strength (I) of the circuit is 1 Ampere and the KJ(V) point clamp voltage is 18 volts

All of the questions above were inspired by examples of questions in the Class XI SMA/MA Fundamental Physics book by Sunardi. This book presents regular physics questions specifically designed to be used as a practice ground for students in preparing themselves for various forms of physics exams, such as exams at the school level, national assessments, to state university entrance selection (PTN).

Thus the discussion of Kirchoff’s laws 1 and 2 along with examples of problems. After reading this article to the end, I hope it can add insight and be useful for Sinaumed’s.

 

Kirchhoff’s Law, Ohm’s Law, along with the questions and discussion – Some of you have probably heard or read the name Kirchhoff , right? Yep , Kirchhoff is one of the physicists who has contributed to the science of electricity. The laws of his famous research results are Kirchhoff’s Laws I and II.

Kirchhoff’s law was coined by Gustav Robert Kirchhoff who was a physicist from Germany. Kirchhoff explained his laws about electricity into two parts, namely Kirchhoff’s First Law and Kirchhoff’s Second Law.

Meanwhile, Ohm’s law is a law regarding electricity that was coined by a physicist who came from Germany as well, namely Georg Simon Ohm.

Then, what is the relationship between these 2 laws?

KIRCHOFF’S LAW

As the name implies, the sound of Kirchoff’s Laws was coined by a physicist from Germany named Gustav Robert Kirchoff. Gustav Kirchoff’s research discusses the subject of electrical conduction.

Quoting from Merriam-Webster, the definition of Kirchoff’s current law is:

In an electric circuit, the sum of the currents that exist in all branches and meet at any point is zero.

Besides that, Merriam-Webster also defines Kirchoff’s Law as follows:

In a closed electric circuit, the sum of the electromotive forces in the circuit is equal to the resistance times the current.

Then, what is the sound of Kirchoff’s Laws 1 and 2? Check out the explanation below:

Kirchoff’s Laws 1

In everyday life, we often encounter electrical circuits consisting of various connections. This means that the electric circuit has many branches and nodes.

This node is the result of a meeting of three or more branches. Pay attention to the following picture:

The sum of the currents entering the node is equal to the sum of the currents leaving. This law is also known as the law of conservation of electric charge.

Quoting from Acceleration Physics, the sound of Kirchoff’s 1st Law is:

“The sum of the electric currents entering a node is equal to the sum of the electric currents coming out of the node.”

Mathematically, Kirchoff’s Law 1 can be written with the formula:

So that You can understand more about Kirchoff’s Law 1, let’s practice the example questions below.

Look at this picture of the electrical circuit:

The current flowing in I1 = 5 A, I2 = 10 A, and I3 = 2 A, what is the total current in I4?

Completion:

If the sum of the incoming currents equals the outgoing currents, then:

I1 + I4 = I2 + I3

5 A + I4 = 10 A + 2 A

I4 = 12A – 5A

I4 = 7 A

So, the total strong current on I4 is 2A.

Kirchoff’s 1st law can be combined with series and parallel electrical connections in Ohm’s Law.

The series connection has the purpose of increasing the resistance in the circuit and as a voltage divider. In a series connection, the current through each resistor has the same value.

Meanwhile, for parallel electrical connections, the potential difference (V) or the voltage through each resistor is the same.

Parallel electrical connections have the purpose of minimizing the resistance that exists in the circuit and as a current divider.

Kirchoff’s Law Sounds 2

Kirchoff’s Law 2 has a function for more complicated electric circuits, which cannot be simplified using Kirchoff’s Law 1. This electric circuit is usually a closed electrical circuit or what is commonly called a loop.

In a closed electrical circuit, it does not only use one source of voltage or electromotive force (EMF), but can have two or more.

In a closed circuit, the algebraic sum of the electromotive forces with a voltage drop equals zero.

Mathematically, the formula for Kirchoff II’s Law can be written as follows:

When solving a closed electrical circuit using Kirchoff’s 2nd Law, use the following steps:

Selects the loop direction at each of the closed paths. The choice of the direction of the loop is free, but usually the direction of the loop is in the direction of the current in order to make it easier to work on.

The voltage drop (IR) has a negative value if the loop direction is opposite to the current direction. The voltage drop (IR) will have a positive value if the loop direction is in the same direction as the current.

When following the direction of the loop and the voltage source encountered first is the positive pole, the EMF also has a positive sign, and vice versa.

OHM’S LAW

In Electronics, the basic Law of Electronics that every Electronics Engineer or hobbyist must learn and understand is Ohm’s Law, which is the basic law that states the relationship between Electric Current (I), Voltage (V) and Resistance (R). Ohm’s Law in English is called “Ohm’s Laws”. Ohm’s Law was first introduced by a German physicist named Georg Simon Ohm (1789-1854) in 1825. Georg Simon Ohm published Ohm’s Law in a Paper entitled “The Galvanic Circuit Investigated Mathematically” in 1827.

Ohm’s Law sounds

Basically, the sound of Ohm’s Law is:

“The amount of electric current (I) flowing through a conductor or conductor will be directly proportional to the potential difference / voltage (V) applied to it and will be inversely proportional to the resistance (R)”.

Mathematically, Ohm’s Law can be formulated into the following equation:

V = I x R

I = V / R

R=V/I

Where :

V = Voltage (Potential Difference or Voltage whose unit is Volt (V))
I = Current (Electric Current whose unit is Ampere (A))
R = Resistance (Barriers or Resistance whose unit is Ohm (Ω))

In its application, we can use Ohm’s Law Theory which is in Electronic Circuits in order to minimize electric current, voltage, and also to obtain the appropriate resistance (resistance value).

The thing to remember in calculating the Ohm’s Law formula, the units used are Volts, Amperes and Ohms. If we use other units such as millivolts, kilovolts, milliamperes, megaohms or kiloohms, then we need to convert to Volts, Amperes and Ohms units first to simplify calculations and also to get the correct results.

Case Examples in Ohm’s Law

To make it clearer in understanding Ohm’s Law, we can do practical work using a simple electronic circuit like the following:

This practicum requires a DC Generator (Power Supply), Voltmeter, Ammeter, and a Potentiometer according to the required value.

From a picture of a simple electronic circuit, we can compare Ohm’s Law Theory with the results obtained from the Practicum in terms of calculating Electric Current (I), Voltage (V) and also Resistance / resistance (R).

Calculating Electric Current (I)

The formula that can be used to calculate Electric Current is I = V / R

Example Case 1:

Setting the Power Supply or DC Generator used to produce a 10V Output Voltage, then set the Potentiometer Value to 10 Ohms. What is the value of Electric Current (I) ?

Enter the Voltage value, which is 10V and also the Resistance Value of the Potentiometer, which is 10 Ohm, into the Ohm’s Law Formula as follows:

I = V / R
I = 10 / 10
I = 1 Ampere
So the result is 1 Ampere.

Example Case 2:

Setting the DC Generator or Power Supply to produce a 10V Voltage Output, then set the Potentiometer value to 1 kiloOhm. What is the value of Electric Current (I)?
First convert the resistance value of 1 kiloOhm to Ohm units. 1 kiloOhm = 1000 Ohms. Then, input the 10V Voltage value and also the Resistance value from the 1000 Ohm Potentiometer into the Ohm’s Law Formula as follows:

I = V / R
I = 10 / 1000
I = 0.01 Amperes or 10 milliAmperes
Then the result is 10mA

Calculating Voltage (V)

The formula that will be used to calculate Voltage or Potential Difference is V = I x R.

Sample case :

First, set the value of the resistance or resistance (R) Potentiometer to 500 Ohm, then set the DC Generator (Power supply) to get the amount of Electric Current (I) 10mA. What is the Voltage (V)? First convert the unit of Electric Current (I), which is still one milliAmpere, into Ampere units, namely: 10mA = 0.01 Amperes. Then, input the Potentiometer Resistance value of 500 Ohm and the Electric Current value of 0.01 Amperes into the Ohm’s Law Formula as follows:

V = I x R
V = 0.01 x 500
V = 5 Volts
Then the value is 5Volt.

Calculating Resistance / Resistance (R)

The formula that will be used to calculate the Resistance Value is R = V / I

Sample case :

If the Voltage value on the Voltmeter (V) is 12V and the Electric Current value (I) on the Ammeter is 0.5A. So, what is the value of the resistance on the potentiometer?

First, input the value of 12V Voltage and 0.5A Electric Current into the Ohm Formula as follows:
R = V / IR
= 12 /0.5
R = 24 Ohm
Then the resistance value is 24 Ohm

Questions and Discussion

1. In the simple circuit example in the previous figure, the current flowing at I1 = 20 Amperes, I2 = 4 Amperes and I4 = 8 Amperes.

Determine the value of I3.

Discussion:
It is known that:
I1 = 20 Ampere
I2 = 4 Ampere
I4 = 8 Ampere

Asked: I3 =… ?

Answer :

Based on the data contained in question no. 1 can be solved by Kirchoff’s law 1 namely,

ΣI in = ΣI out

I1 = I2 + I3 + I4
20 = 4 + I3 + 8
20 = 12 +I3
I3 = 20-12= 8 Amperes

Then it is obtained that the current strength on I3 is 8 Amperes.

2. In this simple circuit, the current flowing at I1 = 15 Amperes, I3 = 7 Amperes, I4 = 8 Amperes and I5 = 5 Amperes. Determine the value of I2.

Discussion:

Is known :

I1 = 15 Amperes

I3 = 7 Amperes

I4 = 8 Amperes

I5 = 5 Amperes

Asked: I2 =… ?

Answer :

Based on the existing data in question no. 2 can be solved by Kirchoff’s law 1 namely,

ΣIn = ΣI out

I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 + I5

20 + I2 = 7 + 8 + 5

I2 = 20-15

I2 = 20-15 = 5 Amperes

Then it is obtained that the large current strength on I2 is 5 Amperes.

How much current flows in an electric current circuit if R1 = 3 ohms, R2 = 2 ohms, and R3 = 1 ohm and є1 = 12 Volts and є2 = 24 Volts.

Discussion:

Is known :

R1 = 3 ohms

R2 = 2 ohms

R3 = 1 ohm

є1 = 12 Volts

є2 = 24 Volts

Asked: I =… ?

Answer :

Based on the existing data, question no. 2 can be solved using Kirchoff’s 2nd law

Step:

First, determine the direction of the loop. To make it easier, the direction of the loop is the same as the direction of the electric current (I)

From the picture, the electric current (I) meets the pole (+) at є1 so that it has a positive value є1 (+) while є2 has a negative value є2 (-)

In order to make it easier to calculate and also write, it is written sequentially Σє + ΣIR = 0

IR2 + є1 + IR1 + IR3 -є2 = 0

I(2) + 12 + I(3) + I(1) -24 =0

6I-12=0

I=12/6= 2 Amperes

Then it is obtained that the large current strength at I is 2 Amperes.

2. If it is known that ε1 = 16 V; ε2 = 8V; ε3 = 10V; R1 = 12 ohms; R2 = 6 ohms; and R3 = 6 ohms. So, the magnitude of the electric current I is…

Discussion:

Is known :

ε1 = 16 V

ε2 = 8 V

ε3 = 10 V

R1 = 12 ohms

R2 = 6 ohms

R3 = 6 ohms.

Asked: I =… ?

Answer:

The calculation starts from R1

Σє + ΣIR = 0

IxR1 – ε1 + I1xR2 = 0

I(6) – 16 + I1(6) = 0

12I + 6I1 = 16 …..> divided by 2

6I + 3I1 = 8

because I1+I2=I

so

6(I1+I2) +3I1 = 8

6I1 + 6I2 + 3I1 = 8

9I1 + 6I2 = 8

Loops 2

In loop 2, the direction of current I1 is opposite to the direction of the loop so that, I1 is negative (-), so

Σє + ΣIR = 0

I2xR3 + ε2 – I1xR2 + ε3 = 0

I2(6) + 8 – I1(6) + 10 = 0

6I2 – 6I1 + 18 = 0

– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18

Elimination

9I1 + 6I2 = 8

– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18

—————– (-)

15I1 + 0 = 26

I1 = 26/15 A

-6I1 + 6I2 = -18 …..> -6(26/15) + 6I2 = -18…> I2=12/5 A

I=I1+I2= (26/15) + (12/5) = 4.13 A

Then it is obtained that the current strength at I is 4.13 Amperes.

That’s all, a brief summary of Kirchoff’s law and Ohm’s law, thank you for reading and I hope this is useful for all of you.

sinaumedia Literacy – Protists are eukaryotic microorganisms that are not animals, plants, or fungi. Although protists cannot be categorized in groups of animals, plants, or fungi, they have characteristics that are similar to the three groups. Therefore, the classification of protists is divided into 3 types, namely animal-like protists, plant-like protists, and mushroom-like protists. Check out a more complete explanation of the following protistas, Sinaumed’s!

DEFINITION OF PROTISTS

Protista is a kingdom that consists of one cell or many cells and has a nuclear membrane (eukaryotic organisms) and is single-celled. Protists can be grouped into three parts, namely animal-like (protozoa), plant-like (algae) and mushroom-like. Most of the Protists live in water, because they do not have a protective body to protect them from dry weather.

So, Kingdom Protista is a simple kingdom because it is only composed of one cell so that it can be grouped in its own kingdom. But there are also those that are multicellular but are still very simple compared to other organisms.

Indonesia as a mega-biodiversity country has a wealth of microorganisms which until now have not been completely recorded and utilized optimally. The book Knowing Indonesian Microorganism Biodiversity for the Welfare of the Nation, written by Indrawati Gandjar Roosheroe, will discuss various microorganisms including protists.

 

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE KINGDOM OF PROTISTS

Protists generally have microscopic and macroscopic sizes: Microscopic organisms are organisms that are about 5 µm – 3 mm in size. besides that there are also those that are macroscopic in size with a length of up to 60 meters or more. The following are other characteristics of Kingdom Protista Sinaumed’s:

• Generally Unicellular: Kingdom Protista is composed of a single cell or unicellular. But there are also multi cellular or many cells. In research of the kingdom Protista, which have many cells or multicellular will live in groups (form colonies).
• Eukaryotic Cell Type: Protists have a nucleus membrane so they are called as eukaryotic cells. Cells that have a nuclear membrane, but Protists are the simplest prokaryotic living things but are far more complex in terms of structure, function, behavior and ecology when compared to Archaebacteria and Eubacteria.
• Free Living or Symbiosis: Kingdom Protista can live freely by benefiting each other. But it can also be parasitic to other organisms. If it is parasitic, it will cause many diseases around it.
• Habitat Generally in Humid Places: As explained above that these Protists live in water or damp places. Not only in fresh water but also in the sea where there is a lot of salt, protists can also live. Protists that live in the sea mostly act as phytoplankton which are the main contributors in the energy supply of food webs.
• Aerobic and Anaerobic: Aerobic in nature because it requires oxygen for the respiration process which takes place in the mitochondria. It is anaerobic because it does not require oxygen for respiration by symbiotic with aerobic bacteria.
• Heterotrophic and heterotrophic because they obtain food by absorbing organic molecules and some are photoautotrophic because they have chloroplasts as a place to capture solar energy.
• Are Motile: There are some Protists that have locomotion tools such as flagella or whip hairs, cilia or vibrating hairs, and pseudopodia or pseudo feet. Thus Protista can be called motile which moves freely.

CLASSIFICATION OF PROTISTS

ANIMAL-LIKE PROTISTS (PROTOZOA)

Characteristics of Protozoa

Protists that are similar to animals have certain characteristics, including:

• Protozoa are single-celled animals known as unicellular with a body size of only 10-200 µm.
• Does not have a cell wall.
• In general, they are heterotrophs, only a small number are autotrophs.
• Free-living or as a parasite for other organisms.
• Reproduction sexually or asexually.
• In general, have a means of movement.

Classification of Animal-Like Protists (Protozoa)

Protozoa are then classified based on their locomotion into four groups, namely:

PHYLUM RHIZOPODA (SARCODINA)

The movement of Rhizopoda is carried out using pseudopods (pseudopods). Rhizopods do not have a fixed shape because they always change according to their movements. Besides functioning to move, pseudo feet also function to catch food. After the food is digested, the waste products of digestion will condense and pull over to the end of the body and then leave the body. Because they cannot produce their own food, rhizopods are heterotrophic organisms. Rhizopods reproduce by direct division (binary fission). An example of a member of the rhizopoda phylum is Amoeba.

CILIATA phylum

Phylum Ciliata (Ciliophora or Infusiora): As the name implies, ciliates move using cilia (tibbling hairs). Apart from functioning as a means of locomotion, the cilia found in all parts of the body also function to move food so that it can enter through the mouth. Because they cannot produce their own food, ciliates are heterotrophic organisms. Ciliates usually have two cell nuclei called macronucleus (larger size) and micronucleus (smaller size). Asexual reproduction is done by dividing, and sexual is done by conjugation (attaching bodies to each other and exchanging nuclei). An example of a member of this phylum is paramecium sp.

PHILUM FLAGELLATES

Phylum Flagellata (Mastigophora): Flagella comes from the Latin word which means whip. Mastifophora comes from the Greek “mastig” which means whip, and “phora” which means movement. Most flagellates have two whips on the back of their body, so that when moving it looks as if they are being pushed from behind. Flagellates can be found in sea, water, freshwater, also in symbiosis with other living things, or live as a host or parasite.

SPOROZOA phylum

Sporozoa (Apicomplexa): Sporozoa (Sporo = seeds, zoa = animals) are unicellular organisms that do not have locomotion. These organisms move by contracting all the cells. All Sporozoa live as parasites, and food is absorbed directly from the host. Sporozoan reproduction can take place sexually or asexually. Sexually occurs by the meeting of microgametes and macrogametes in the host’s body. While asexual is done by cell division. Examples of sporozoa are plasmodium vivax, malaria, and ovale which are the causes of malaria in humans.

MUSHROOM-LIKE PROTISTS

Fungus-like protists are protists with the following characteristics: are eukaryotic, do not have chlorophyll, can produce spores, are heterotrophic. Fungi-like protists are not part of the kingdom Fungi because their body structure and way of reproduction are different from the Fungi group. Fungus-like protists are classified into three phyla, namely:

MYXOMYCOTA (MUSIC FUNGUS)

Myxomycota are also called plasmodial slime molds. All Myxoycota members are heterotrophs because they cannot carry out photosynthesis so they are unable to produce their own food. Usually, plasmodium slime molds have bright colored pigments, which can be yellow or orange.

Plasmodium can grow up to a centimeter (cm) in diameter, however they are unicellular organisms, their body size is large because this group can have many nuclei. Myxomycota habitat can be found in wet forests, weathered wood, and moist soil. In its life cycle there is a collection of amoeboid cells called plasmodium.

Amoeboid cells are free-living cells produced by slime molds. Plasmodium can eat bacteria, pests, spores and other organic components, the food is then digested by the mechanism of phagocytosis. When food is lacking, these cells will combine to form something like mucus. Then this slime-like mass will seek a new environment that better supports its needs.

The mass movement is carried out by contraction of each of the cells that joined earlier. When the habitat is dry and unable to provide food, the plasmodium will stop growing and developing, and will differentiate into a life cycle stage that functions for sexual reproduction.

ACRASIOMYCOTA

Acrasiomycota is a cellular slime mold. Unlike the myxomycota which is a plasmodium slime mold. The basic difference between the two is that Acrasiomycota is a haploid organism (only has one set of chromosomes), only the zygote is diploid (has two sets of chromosomes). Meanwhile, Myxomycota lived a more dominant life as a diploid organism. In addition, Acrasiomycota or cellular slime molds have bodies that function to produce spores during asexual reproduction. Acrasiomycota does not have a flagellated life cycle.

OOMYCOTA

OOMYCOTA (water mushroom): Actually the name for water fungus for Oomycota is not quite right, because it is one of the species of this phylum. “Oomycota” comes from the word “Oo” which means egg and “Mycota” which means mushroom. Most oomycota live as decomposers and play an important role in aquatic habitats. Some of its members also live as parasites. Oomycota reproduction can occur asexually or sexually. Asexually they will form zoospores which, if they fall into a suitable environment, will become new organisms. Meanwhile, sexually with the meeting of male gametes and female gametes.

PLANT LIKE PROTISTS (ALGAE)

Algae Characteristics

Algae characteristics include:

• Are unicellular or multicellular.
• Body size varies, ranging from microscopic algae with a size of 8 µm to macroscopic algae with a size of 60 µm.
• The shape of the body is fixed due to the presence of a cell wall.
• Unicellular algae can live solitary or form colonies.
• Has several types of chlorophyll (chlorophyll a, chlorophyll b, chlorophyll c, and chlorophyll d) stored in chloroplasts.
• Have photosynthetic pigments besides chlorophyll (xanthophyll [yellow], phycocyanin [blue], fucoxanthin [brown], phycoerythrin [red], and carotenoids).
• Have a variety of chloroplast shapes (spiral, disc, mesh, bowl, round, and others).
• Can live like plankton, neuston, or benthos.
• Reproduce asexually (by binary fission, fragmentation and vegetative spore formation) or sexually (by conjugation, singami and anisogamy).

Classification of Plant-like Protists (Algae)

Plant-like protists are classified into seven phyla, namely:

EUGLENOPHYTA

Phylum Euglenophyta are unicellular organisms that have flagella (whip hairs), eye-catching spots (called stigmas), and chloroplasts. Some members of the phylum Euglenophyta can live as autotrophs (produce their own food) or heterotrophs (hunt for food). When there is enough light, they will live as autotrophs, whereas when the light is weak, they will live as heterotrophs. Usually found in waters and reproduce by dividing. Euglenophyta is a plant-like protist (capable of photosynthesis) and animal-like (capable of active movement).

CHRYSOPHYTA

Chrysophyta (Golden Algae): Phylum Chrysophyta are organisms whose members have a variety of shapes and structures. Algae are usually golden brown in color. Many habitats in fresh water and moist soil, can also be found in the ocean. The dominant color pigments found in the body of Chrysophyta are carotene and phycoxanthin so that the body is golden-brown. But it can also have chlorophyll which gives it a green color.

PYRROPHYTA

Pyrrophyta or Dinoflagellates (Fire Algae), The name of the fire algae arises because of several characteristics of the plant-like protist members of this group, for example they appear to glow at night. Some pyrrophyta numbers will increase rapidly at certain times, for example when the water is warm and rich in nutrients so that it makes the ocean appear red-brown ( red tide ). When a red tide appears, the water conditions will be oxygen-poor, and sometimes it becomes toxic, so that when this phenomenon occurs many other living things die.

Actually the color of fire algae can vary, green, yellow, brown and others, this color depends on the pigment that is more dominant in composing its body. Usually fire algae have chlorophyll a and c pigments, xanthophyll, dinosatin and fikobilin. Dinoglagellate species are usually unicellular organisms but some are multicellular. This flaming algae has two flagellates which can make circular motions so they are often also called dinoflagellates (dino = whirlpool). Algae are generally photoautotrophic organisms, but there are also species that live as parasites.

PHAEOPHYTA

Phaeophyta (brown algae) are a group of plant-like protists that have a dominant pigment in the form of carotene, namely fucoxanthin, which gives their bodies a brown color. The name of this algae is in accordance with its characteristics, “phaeophyta” comes from the Greek word “phaeios” which means brown. In addition to fucostatin, brown algae also have chlorophyll a, c, and xanthophyll pigments.

Members of the Phaeophyta which have been recognized by more than 1000 species. Almost all brown algae live on the coast, they are mostly thread-like multicellular organisms. The structure of the phaeophyta is very similar to that of a real plant in that it has roots, stems and leaves. Reproduction asexually by dividing to produce zoospores or by fragmentation. Meanwhile, sexually by producing male and female gametes.

BACILLARIOPHYTA

Bacillariophyta (Diatoms) This phylum is the phylum that has the most members compared to other groups in plant-like protists. Its known species number about 10,000. In general, Bacillariophyta are unicellular organisms that do not move and live as plankton. Diatoms can be thread-like, round, or triangular in shape. Diatoms have a very distinctive body structure, namely the body consists of a box (hipotheka) and a lid (epitheka), between the box and the lid there is a gap called a rafe. The cell walls contain pectin and silicates, when these organisms die, the shells form soil. Diatoms have a hefty selling price because they can be used for various things.

RHODOPHYTA

Rhodophyta (Red Algae) is a phylum that has the dominant phycobilin pigment, namely phycoeitrin, which gives a red color to its body, but Rhodophyta also has phycocyanin pigment, which gives a blue color (not dominant). The known members of this phylum range from about 4000 species, most of which are multicellular organisms. Most rhodophyta live in the sea, and a few can be found in fresh water. Reproduction can take place asexually and sexually. Rhodophyta asexually by forming tetraspores. While sexually directly with male and female gametes.

CHLOROPHYTA

Chlorophyta (Green Algae) As the name implies, Chlorophyta has a greenish body. The dominant pigment that makes up their body is chlorophyll, besides that they also have a little carotene (yellow pigment). In the body of green algae, chlorophyll gathers in a place called chloroplast. The shape of the chloroplast in each member varies, some are round, spiral, like a star, and others.

Chlorophyta are unicellular organisms that can colonize to form simple multiseller organisms. They are often found living in watery habitats. Because it has chlorophyll, green algae are autotrophic living things that produce food through the process of photosynthesis. Reproduction can occur asexually (through binary fission) or sexually (through conjugation).

BENEFITS OF PROTISTS

Most of the zooplankton in aquatic ecosystems are protists with chlorophyll which are useful as food for fish and aquatic arthropods. In addition, here are some benefits that fall into the Protista category:

• Entamoeba coli in the large intestine of mammals plays a role in the process of decomposing food scraps.
• Foraminifera has an exoskeleton of limestone and its fossils in a certain amount can form globigerina soil deposits which can be used as an indication of the presence of petroleum.
• Radiolaria have a skeleton of a gritty substance. Radiolarians die and leave their shells to form radiolarian soil which can be used as a scouring agent.
• Paramaecium can also be used as an indicator organism for water pollution by organic matter.
• In addition to acting as a producer in aquatic ecosystems, Chlorella can also be used as a basic ingredient for making single cell protein (PST).

BAD EFFECTS OF PROTISTS

In addition to beneficial protists for human life, there are some that are detrimental, including:

• Entamoeba histolytica lives in the human intestine, causing intestinal tissue damage and diarrhea.
• Entamoeba hartmani lives in the human intestine, causes dysentery but its effects are no worse than Entamoeba histolytica.
• Entamoeba gingivalis lives in the human oral cavity, between the teeth or on the neck of the teeth, throat and tonsils. Not pathotenic but can exacerbate gingivitis.
• Trypanosoma gambiense causes sleeping sickness in humans (sleeping sickness or trypanosomiasis). These protists live in human blood. The intermediate vector is the tse-tse fly of the type Glossina tachionides.
• Trypanosoma evansi causes surrah disease in cattle, horses and buffaloes. Many outbreaks in the tropics, including Indonesia. The intermediate vector is a fly from the genus Tabanus.
• Leishmaania donovani causes kala azar disease in humans. Sufferers usually have a prolonged fever, enlarged liver and spleen, and ulcers or sores in the intestines.

Examples of Protist Questions and Answers

1. What is the classification of unicellular plant-like protists often called?
Answer: phytoplankton

2. Mention some characteristics of mushroom-like protists?
Answer: Are eukaryotic, do not have chlorophyll, can produce spores, are heterotrophic

3. What is the kingdom protista?
Answer: Protista is a kingdom consisting of one cell or many cells and has a nuclear membrane (eukaryotic organisms) and is single-celled.

Thus the definition, characteristics, classification, benefits and negative effects of protist microorganisms in everyday life, I hope this information is useful, Sinaumed’s. Have a good study!

Kingdom Protista Question Book from EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. REGISTER and you can access lots of question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan “Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as synonyms, antonyms and other CPNS questions.

sinaumedia Literacy – Did you know, some evidence shows that there have been algae on land since 1.2 billion years ago. Algae as part of the Plantae or plants have existed since the Ordovician period (450 million years ago) to the Silurian period (420 million years ago). Linnaeus then classified the entire division of organisms into 2 kingdoms, namely animalia and vegetabilia (plantae). Let’s get to know plant organisms or plantae more closely, see the full explanation below, Sinaumed’s.

DEFINITION OF PLANTAE

Kingdom Plantae or better known as plants is a multicellular eukaryotic organism with a cell wall and chlorophyll. Chlorophyll is a green leaf substance that functions in the process of photosynthesis, so that plants are able to make their own food (autotroph). This is the difference between Kingdom Plantae and Kingdom Animalia.

Outside the formal context, the word “plant” refers to organisms that have certain characteristics such as being able to carry out photosynthesis, produce cellulose, and be multicellular. There has been much criticism regarding fungi, including parts of the kingdom plantae, because fungi obtain food not through the process of photosynthesis, but from the remains of organic matter.

In addition, the building blocks of the cell walls of fungi are not the same as those of plants, they are more similar to those of animals. Therefore, the fungi were removed from the kingdom Plantae and made a separate kingdom called the kingdom fungi. Most types of algae are also excluded from the kingdom plantae because they do not have chlorophyll.

With such a variety of cells that make up plants, the tissues in them, make the various types of plants that exist. In the Textbook of Plant Tissue Culture you can learn about plant tissue culture.

PLANTAE CHARACTERISTICS

Plants are said to have evolved before animals and are located at the very beginning of the food chain. Without plants, most organisms could not survive. Plants can thrive even in the harshest conditions. Even the cold tundra regions of the Earth even contain some vegetation. Here are some of the characteristics of plantae that you need to know:

• Multicellular or having many cells
• Autotrophs, can make their own food
• Eukaryotic, is a cell that already has a cell nucleus membrane.
• There is a cell wall made of cellulose
• Live on moist land or water
• Can store food reserves in the form of starch (starch)
• Obtain food by means of photosynthesis assisted by sunlight
• Reproduce sexually (pistils and stamens) or asexually (grafts, shoots, cuttings and others)
• It has roots that are useful for absorbing water and strengthening plants
• It has leaves to collect sunlight which is used to produce glucose. Having organs and organ systems Having flowers as a means of sexual reproduction.
• Having alternation of offspring in its life cycle is called metagenesis. Metagenesis in kingdom plantae is the life cycle of a plant that displays an alternation of generations. The cycle is composed of the gametophyte generation which is a multicellular individual producing haploid gametes and the sporophyte generation which is a multicellular individual which produces spores produced by spore-producing cells (sporogenic cells).

CLASSIFICATION OF KINGDOM PLANTAE TYPES

PTERIDOPHYTA PHYLUM (NAIL PLANT)

Pteridophyta or ferns already have a carrier network (kormus) and true organs. Ferns reproduce asexually by means of spores. This plant undergoes metagenesis. In general, ferns live on land, especially in tropical rain forest areas. However, there are several types of nails that live floating in water.

Pteridophyta are plants that already have true stems, roots and leaves, reproduce by spores (spore-forming cormophytes) and experience an alternation of generations. In addition, ferns also have chlorophyll, xylem and phloem vessels, and fibrous roots. Get to know more closely about the characteristics of the following Pterydophyta (fern plants), Sinaumed’s:

• Spores are produced on sporophylls, especially on the underside of the leaves.
• Stems, roots and leaves can be easily distinguished.
• Young leaves on ferns grow coiled (circinnatus).

Types of Pterydophyta (ferns):

• True ferns (Pteriopsida): This species has true stems, roots and leaves. On young leaves grow roll (circinnatus). The highest number of species is about 12,000 species. Example: Suplir (Adiantum cuneatum) and Semanggi (Marsilea crenata).
• Ancient ferns (Psilopsida): This species produces one type of spore (homospore). The gametophyte lacks chlorophyll and nutrients obtained from symbiosis with fungi. The number of fern species is almost extinct, namely the remaining 10-13 species. Example: Psilotum and Rynia.
• Horsetail nails (Spenopsida): This type is called horsetail because of the shape of the stem that looks like a horse’s tail. The habitat of this plant is in subtropical or humid places. Sporangium in the form of strobilus, bisexual gametophyte and has chlorophyll. This type of fern is a homosporous fern (produces one kind of spore) with about 15 species. Example: Equisetum.
• Wire ferns (Lycopsida): Wire ferns can produce two kinds of spores (heterospores), the gametophytes do not have chlorophyll. The gametophyte also consists of two, namely bisexual and unisexual. The number of species of wire nails is about 1000 species. Example: Lycopodium and Selaginela.

PHYLUM BRYOPHYTA (MOSS PLANTS)

Bryophytes do not have true organs such as stems, roots or leaves, and do not have xylem and phloem vessels. Bryophyta have a small rhizoid that allows them to stick to the ground. Bryophyta usually grows in moist and shady areas. Bryophyta is a transitional plant between cormophytes (kormophytes) and thallus plants (talophytes). Similar to pteridophyta, bryophyta also undergoes metagenesis and undergoes an alternation of generations. The characteristics of Bryophyta (Moss Plants) include:

• Moss plants are macroscopic in size 1-2 cm, and some are up to 40 cm in size.
• Kormophytes are plants that can be differentiated into stems, roots and leaves.
• It has two forms of generation, namely the sporophyte generation and the gametophyte generation.
• It is a transitional plant because there are plants in the form of thallus (sheets, namely liverworts), and plants that already have a body structure similar to true stems, roots and leaves (leverbs).
• Talophytes are plants that cannot be distinguished between stems, roots and leaves.
• Moss plants are pioneer vegetation (a pioneer plant or grows before other plants can grow).

Some moss plants that live in rainforest areas can be used as erosion barriers and used to absorb water. Marchantia can also be used as a medicine for liver disease, and spatial ornaments. Some of these plant species, such as Sphagnum, can be used as an eye and skin remedy. Types of Bryophyta (Mosses) include mosses, liverworts, and hornworts.

• Bryopsida (leaf moss): It is a true moss because its body shape resembles a small plant that has true stems, roots and leaves. Live in groups to form thick, velvety beds. Example: Spagnum and Polytricum.
• Hepaticopsida (liverworts): Is a moss with two houses (deoceus). This type of lichen is talus-shaped, lobulated like the shape of a human heart. Moreover, this type of lichen forms a zygote. Asexual reproduction by fragmentation in the formation of spores and gemmacups (buds). Gemmacup is a distinctive structure that exists on a gametophyte which is a cup and contains a collection of small mosses. Gemma can be dispersed and released by water which then grows and forms new moss. In sexual reproduction by means of fertilization between the ovum and sperm. For example: Marchantia polymorpha
• Anthocerotopsida (hornworts): The gametophyte of this moss is similar to that of liverworts, but the location of the sporophyte is different. The hornwort sporophyte has an elongated capsule that grows like a horn from the gametophyte. Example: Anthoceros laevis.

phylum Spermatophyta (seed plants)

The characteristics of Spermatophyta (seed plants) include having 2 subdivisions, namely closed seeds (Angiospermae) and open seeds (Gymnospermae) and having seed or flower organs produced by flowers or strobilus. The benefits of Spermatophyta (seed plants) in everyday life are as a staple food.

Examples include: rice, sago, corn and wheat as well as shade, oxygen source, carbon dioxide absorber and water storage. Examples include: pine, mahogany, teak and Angsana. For building materials and furniture, examples are meranti and teak. The types of Spermatophyta (seed plants) include:

• Closed seed plants (Angiospermae): Angiosperms are plants whose ovaries are inside the ovaries. The characteristics of Angiosperms include wide and flat leaves, leaf bones are finger-shaped, pinnate, parallel or curved. Live as shrubs, trees, shrubs and herbs. Breeding tools are in the form of stamens and pistils. Has true flowers with ornaments in the form of crowns and flower petals, based on the number of seed pieces, angiosperms are divided into two classes, namely monocots or seed plants with one or single pieces and dicots which have two institutional leaves (dicotyldons).
• Open seed plants (Gymnospernae) are plants whose ovaries are not covered or protected by ovaries. The characteristics of gymnospernae include that gymnospernae have separate genitals, where eggs are found in female strobilus and pollen is found in male strobilus., ovaries are arranged in strobilus, strobilus or conifers are conical reproductive organs, stems and roots have cambium, so that it can grow larger, the leaves are stiff, thick and narrow, the leaf bones are not varied, do not have true flowers, the roots are in the form of a mount, usually trees or shrubs do not have herbs. Gymnospernae is divided into 4 classes including:
• Ginkgoinae : Is a native plant originating from mainland China. The tree height can reach 30 meters, and the leaves are fan-shaped and fall easily. The seeds and pollen of these plants were obtained from different individuals. There is only one species of this plant, namely Ginkgo biloba.
• Cycadinae plants are dioecious, which means they have only female strobilus or only male strobili. Example: Cycas rumphii (pilgrim fern).
• Gnetinae: Members of the group of this plant species, namely in the form of shrubs, trees and lianas (climbing plants). The leaves are oval or oval in shape with pinnate leaf veins. Example: Gnetum gnemon (melinjo).
• Coniferinae : This plant has a characteristic that is always green all year round (evergreen). Strobilus conical. Example: Pinus merkusii (pine), Agathis alba (resin), Araucaria sp., Cupressus sp., Sequoia sp., Taxus sp. and Juniperus sp.

KINGDOM PLANTAE BENEFITS

Kingdom Plantae are multicellular eukaryotic organisms that have chlorophyll and a cell wall. There are about 400,000 species in the kingdom Plantae. In the food chain, this kingdom acts as a producer. Kingdom plantae is very useful for human life, starting from ferns which are useful as green manure in rice plants, can be used as vegetable ingredients, can be used as ornamental plants and processed as wound medicine.

Moss plants with Sphagnum species can also be used as skin, liver and eye medicine. Some moss plants that grow in the rain forest also function as a barrier to erosion and absorb water. Here are some other benefits of plantae, including:

• Several types of Kingdom Plantae, such as rattan and teak trees, can be used as building materials, paper, furniture, playing cards, sports equipment and musical instruments.
• Some types of Kingdom Plantae, such as flax, are capable of producing linen fiber. Linen fibers are used in a variety of household textiles (towels, tablecloths, etc.), fittings (curtains, wall coverings and wall hangings) as well as in the manufacture of clothing.
• Most of the nutrition that humans get comes from plants, such as corn, rice, potatoes, wheat and cassava as staple foods or sources of carbohydrates. In addition, there are also vegetables, fruits, spices and nuts as sources of protein, vitamins and other nutrients. Apart from food, kingdom plantae can also be used as a beverage, such as tea, coffee, beer, wine and other alcoholic beverages. Sugarcane is used to make sugar and flavorings such as monosodium. The manufacture of margarine and cooking oil uses ingredients from plantae, such as corn, palm oil, soybeans, olives and sunflowers.
• Several types of plants from kingdom plantae can also be used as ornamental plants, such as orchids, roses, sun, and other plants that are useful for beautifying your environment or your yard. Plants can also be used as a venue for artistic creations such as bonsai plants (Adenium Bonsai, Bougenville Bonsai, Azalea Bonsai, Dutch Tamarind Bonsai, Tamarind Bonsai, Banyan Bonsai, Kimeng Bonsai, to Pine Shrimp Bonsai)
• Plants can also be used as industrial materials, such as soap, rubber, paint, wax, tannins, shampoo, cosmetics, perfume, oil, ink, plastics, and so on.
• Many types of plants from the kingdom plantae can be used as medicinal ingredients, such as herbal medicines, food supplements and pesticides, as well as:
  • Ginkgo biloba extract which is used as a medicine to increase stamina, is able to relieve dizziness, to treat the dangerous disease cancer.
  • Rane nails can be processed into wound healers.
  • The guava tree leaves can be used as a medicine for stomach ache.
  • Marchantia polymorpha can be used as a medicine for inflammation of the liver or treating hepatitis.

 

sinaumedia Literacy does not have chlorophyll. Thus it cannot carry out photosynthesis and produce its own food, so that fungi are then also called heterotrophic organisms because they resemble animal cells. Check out a more complete description of the following Fungi, Sinaumed’s!

 

DEFINITION OF MUSHROOMS

The word mushroom comes from the Latin word fungus. Fungi (fungi) reproduce asexually which produces spores, buds, and fragmentation. Meanwhile, by sexual means on zygospores, ascospores, and basidiospores. Mushrooms (fungi) live in damp places, sea water, fresh water, acidic places and form symbosis with algae to form moss (lichenes). According to Gandjar (2006) fungi or fungi are eukaryotic cells that do not have chlorophyll, grow as hyphae, have cell walls containing chitin, are heterotrophic, absorb nutrients through their cell walls, excrete extracellular enzymes into the environment through spores, and reproduce sexually and asexual. Meanwhile, according to Campbell (2003) Fungi are eukaryotes, and most of them are multicellular eukaryotes.

In learning more deeply about plants, as well as the structure and function of the tissues in them, the book Structure & Function of Tissues in Plants is here to explain the ins and outs of plants in depth.

MUSHROOM BODY STRUCTURE

The mushroom body is composed of basic components called hyphae. Hyphae form a network called mycelium. The mycelium arranges pseudo networks to form fruiting bodies. Hyphae themselves are thread-like structures composed of pipe-shaped walls. This wall surrounds the plasma membrane and cytoplasm of hyphae. The cytoplasm contains eukaryotic organelles. Most hyphae limited by transverse walls or septa. Septa have large pores that are large enough for ribosomes, mitochondria, and cell nuclei to pass from cell to cell. However, there are hyphae that do not have septa or hyphae that are senocytic. The senocytic hyphae structure is produced by multiple divisions of the cell nucleus which are not followed by division of the cytoplasm.

• Obligate parasite: This is the nature of a fungus that can only live on its host, while outside its host it cannot live. For example, Pneumonia carini (a yeast that infects the lungs of people with AIDS).
• Facultative parasite: Fungi that are parasitic if found a suitable host, but are saprophytic if not found a suitable host.
• Saprophyte: Is a decaying fungus and modifier of the composition of dead organic matter. Saprophytic fungi absorb food from dead organisms such as fallen wood and fallen fruit.

Most saprophytic fungi secrete hydrolase enzymes on food substrates to decompose complex molecules into simple molecules so that they are easily absorbed by hyphae. In addition, hyphae can also directly absorb organic matter in a simple form released by its host.

The way of life of other fungi are doing symbiotic mutualism. Fungi that live in symbiosis, in addition to absorbing food from other organisms, also produce certain substances that are beneficial to their symbionts. Mutualism symbiosis of fungi with plants can be seen in mycorrhizae, namely fungi that live on the roots of legume plants or on lichens. Fungi inhabit various environments and are associated with many organisms. Although most live on land, some fungi live in water and are associated with aquatic organisms. Fungi that live in water are usually parasitic or saprophytic, and most are from the Oomycetes class.

In studying the stems and leaves of other plants as well as other aspects of plants, the book Plant Anatomy is the right choice because it discusses various aspects of plant composition in a clear and concise manner.

FUNGUS REPRODUCTION

Reproduction in fungi consists of two, namely generative (sexual) and vegetative (asexual) reproduction. Here’s the explanation Sinaumed’s!

GENERATIVE (SEXUAL) REPRODUCTION

Usually, fungi reproduce generatively due to changing environmental conditions or other emergency conditions. The offspring produced by themselves are genetically diverse and more adaptive to environmental changes. Generative reproduction is preceded by the formation of sexual spores which have different types of hyphae. Hyphae (+) and hyphae (-) with haploid chromosomes approach and form gametangia (organs that produce gametes). The plasmogamous gametangium is the fusion of the cytoplasm and then forms a dikaryotic (heterokarotic) zygosporangium with a pair of haploid nuclei that have not yet united. This zygosporangium has a thick and rough cell wall that allows it to survive in harsh and dry environmental conditions.

If the environmental conditions improve, the zygosporangium will become karyogamous (fusion of nuclei) so that the zygosporangium has a nucleus with diploid chromosomes (2n). A zygosporangium with a haploid core (2n) will undergo mitotic division to produce haploid zygospores within the zygosporangium. Haploid zygospores will germinate to form short-stemmed sporangia with haploid chromosomes. Haploid sporangium will produce haploid spores that have genetic diversity. If the haploid spores land on the right spot, the spores will germinate into haploid fungal hyphae. Hyphae will grow to form a mycelium network which is all haploid.

VEGETATIVE (ASEEXUAL) REPRODUCTION

In unicellular fungi, vegetative reproduction is carried out by forming shoots which will grow into new individuals. In multicellular fungi, this is done by hyphae fragmentation and vegetative spore formation. Hyphae fragmentation (hyphae termination), hyphae fragments that break off grow into new individuals. Formation of vegetative spores in the form of sporangiospores and conidiospores. Mature fungi produce spongiophores (spore box stalks). At the end of the sporangiophore there is a sporangium (spore box). Inside the spore box, cell division is carried out by mitosis and produces many sporangiospores with haploid chromosomes (n). The other types of fungi produce conidiophores (conidia stalks). At the end of the conidiophore there is a conidium (conidiospora box). Inside the conidium, mitotic cell division occurs which produces many conidiospores with haploid chromosomes (n). Both sporangiospores and conidiospores, if they fall in the right place, will grow into new hyphae which are haploid (n).

In studying the characteristics, structure, and anatomy of plants. You can make the book Plant Anatomy by Sri Mulyani ES as a reference where it discusses the organs that make up plants, namely roots, stems, leaves and flowers.

CLASSIFICATION OF MUSHROOMS

Based on the structure of the body and the way of reproduction, fungi are divided into 4 divisions, namely:

ZYGOMYCOTA DIVISION

Zygomycotina is also known as the coenocytic true fungus. The well-known type of fungus from this group is the black bread mold or Rhizopus sp. The Zygomycotina division has members that live in almost all terrestrial habitats, most of them living as saprophytes. The body is multi-celled, in the form of threads (hyphae) that are not insulated, and do not produce flagellated spores. Zygomycotina reproduction occurs asexually and sexually.

In sexual reproduction, this fungus produces zygospores. While asexual reproduction by germination (germination) spores. The spores are stored in the sporangium (spore box). When the spores mature, the sporangium bursts open, allowing the spores to be carried by the wind. If the spores fall in the right place, they will grow into new hyphae. Zygomycotina has several types that are easy to find in everyday life. Some of them are mushrooms in food. These types of mushrooms include:

• Rhizophus stolonifera: This fungus appears as white threads, has rhizoids and stolons. It is a saprophyte that lives on soybean meal and is useful in making tempeh.
• Rhizophus nigricans: This fungus can produce fumaric acid.
• Mucor mucedo: This fungus lives as a saprophyte. Often found in bread, food scraps and livestock manure. This mushroom mycelium develops in the substrate. Has a sporangium which is equipped with a sporangiophore.

ASCOMYCOTA DIVISION

Ascomycotina is also known as the sac fungus. Is a fungus that reproduces sexually by making ascospores in the ascus (ascus = sac or sac or coffers). Ascus is a kind of sporangium that produces ascospores. Several asci are usually clustered and gathered to form a fruiting body called an ascorcarp or ascoma. Askomata can be shaped like a bowl, bottle, or like a balloon).

The hyphae of Ascomycotina are generally monokaryotic (uninucleate or have a single nucleus) and the cells are separated by simple septa. So, the ascus is the general structure that belongs to members of the Ascomycotina Division. There are bodies that are unicellular and some are multicellular. Live as saprophy t and parasite. Some types of them can also be symbiotic with living things, blue-green algae and one-celled green algae to form lichens.

The life cycle of Ascomycotina begins with ascospores which grow into branching threads (hyphae). Then, one of several cells at the end of the hyphae differentiates into ascogonia, which are much wider than normal hyphae. While the other end of the hypha forms anteridium. The anteridium and ascogonium are located close together and have a number of haploid nuclei. Here are some examples of fungi belonging to the Ascomycotina Division:

• Saccharomyces cerevisiae: Is a microscopic fungus, single-celled and does not have a fruiting body, often referred to as yeast, yeast, or yeast. In human life, S. cerevisiae is used in the manufacture of bread, tape, peuyeum, wine, beer and sake. The process that occurs in the manufacture of these foods is fermentation.
• Penicillium spp: As saprophytes on substrates that contain a lot of sugar, such as rice, bread and ripe fruit. On the sugar substrate, this fungus looks like blue or greenish stains. These two types of mushrooms are commonly used in flavoring or scenting of cheese.

BASIDMYCOTA DIVISION

The Basidiomycota division includes about 25,000 species. This mushroom is easy to recognize because it generally has a fruiting body like an umbrella. Although some mushrooms of this division are edible, some mushrooms can also be deadly. Several other types of Basidiomycota can also harm plants, for example causing death in field crops. Examples of Basidiomycotina:

• Volvariella Volvacea
• Auricularia Polytricha
• Puccinia Graminis
• Amanita Phalloides
• Agaricus Campertis
• Lycoperdon
• Lentinus Edodes
• Ezobasidium Vexans

DEUTEROMYCOTA DIVISION

The life cycle of deuteomycota, in the way of asexual reproduction by producing conidia or producing special hyphae called conidiophores. This fungus is saprophytic in many types of organic matter, as a parasite on high-level plants and destroys cultivated plants and ornamental plants. This fungus also causes disease in humans, namely dermatokinosis (ringworm and tinea versicolor) and causes weathering of wood. An example of this fungus is monilia sitophila, namely oncom mushrooms. Often used for making oncom from peanut meal. Monilia can also grow from bread, food scraps. Examples of fungi Division Deuteromycota:

• Aspergillus: Is a fungus that lives in a medium with a high degree of acidity and sugar content.
• Epidermophyton and Mycosporium: Both types of fungi are parasitic in humans. Epidermophyton causes athlete’s foot, while Mycosporium causes ringworm.
• Fusarium, Verticellium, and Cercos: These three types of fungi are parasites on plants. If this fungus is not eradicated with fungicide it can be detrimental to the plants it attacks.

With so many types of mushrooms, one way to differentiate them is through the cells and tissues in them being one of the factors. In studying tissue in plants, the Textbook of Plant Tissue Culture can be used as a reference by Sinaumed’s.

 

MUSHROOM BENEFITS

Human use of mushrooms for food preparation or preservation and other purposes is extensive and has a long history. The study of the historical and sociological uses of fungi is known as ethnomycology. Recently, methods have been developed for the genetic engineering of fungi, which allow the metabolic engineering of fungal species. For example, genetic modification of a yeast species that easily grows at a fast rate in large ferments. Here are some other benefits of various types of mushrooms:

• Zygomycetes species are useful in making food for example Rhizopus. Several species of members of the Zygomycetes include Rhizopus sp, Pliobolus sp and Muncor sp. The Role of Ascomycotina in Life.
• Role in Fermentation: For example in the process of making tape, namely the fungus Aspergillus oryzae, the process of making bread, namely the fungus Saccharomyces cereviceae, the process of making soy sauce, namely the fungus Aspergillus wentii, the process of making oncom, namely Neurospora sithophila, the process of making cheese by Penicellium camemberti and Penicellium requoforti , last The process of making alcohol by Saccharomyces ovale
• Medical Field: Alexander Flemming was the first to know about the efficacy of penicillin, which is an antibiotic substance produced by the fungi Penicillium notatum and Penicillium chrysogenum. However, these drugs (antibiotics) were only developed on a large scale after World War II. This fungus can grow everywhere, especially on ripe fruit and appears as green or blue stains.
• Agriculture: There is no doubt that fungi as saprophytic organisms are very important in helping restore soil fertility. Saprophytic fungi destroy woody leaves so that they become minerals again.

Various types of mushrooms can be consumed, and one example is the oyster mushroom which generates large profits for its entrepreneurs. Learn how to cultivate oyster mushrooms in the book Big Profits in Cultivating Oyster Mushrooms.

 

NEGATIVE EFFECTS OF MUSHROOM (FUNGI)

Mushrooms not only have benefits for humans, but can also be detrimental to humans, to the point of damaging plants. Here are some of them Sinaumed’s:

• Aspergillus nidulans and Aspergillus niger are types of fungus that often live in the middle ear canal and cause a disease known as otomicos. In addition, the Deuteromycetes fungus often causes a skin disease called dermatomikos.
• An example of parasitic fungi in animals is Aspergillus fumigatus. This fungus lives and causes bird lung disease. In general, an infectious disease caused by Aspergillus is known as aspergillosis.
• Parasitic fungi on cultivated plants, for example Phytophthora infestans, also known as lanas fungus, are parasites on potato plants. This fungus causes rotting shoots or leaves of potato plants. Another type of lanas fungus is Phytophthora nicotianae, a parasite on tobacco leaves. While Phytophthora palmifora parasites on coconut plants.
• Mushrooms that produce poison, although many mushrooms are delicious to eat, not a few also contain poisons that cause death in both livestock and humans. Example: Aspergillus flavus, which produces aflatoxin poison, Amanita phaloides produces falin poison, which can damage red blood cells.

Thus the definition, structure, reproduction, classification, role and negative impact of fungi in everyday life, I hope this is useful, Sinaumed’s. Eager to learn!

Fungi Problem Book from EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. REGISTER and you can access many practice books on functions like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan “Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as synonyms, antonyms and other CPNS questions. Check the YouTube account directly, click here.

Kinetic Energy – In Physics, Sinaumed’s will often find formulas for kinetic and potential energy. Energy is a capability that is used to do work.

Energy is divided into several types, one of the most basic forms of energy is kinetic energy. Kinetic energy is also known as motion energy, where this energy can be converted into other energy.

Motion energy or kinetic energy is a source of energy that can be used widely in various fields for the needs of society. Unknowingly, Sinaumed’s often witnessed these energy events firsthand.

But does Sinaumed’s know what kinetic energy really is? Following are the definitions, benefits and kinetic energy formulas that Sinaumed’s needs to know.

Definition of Kinetic Energy

Kinetic energy was discovered around the seventh century. According to the Physics LibreTexts site at that time, the science of mechanics has explained about plants between two objects where the first object is moving, then the second object is at rest.

When the first object moves, it bumps into a second object which is stationary and the first object stops moving. However, the second object, which was initially stationary, was moving with the first object’s speed when it collided with the second object.

That is, there is a certain amount of energy transferred by the first object to the second object. Thus, the first object that was initially still becomes moving. From this, the idea of ​​this energy was born.

The rule in classical mechanics stating that E ∝ mv² was first stated by Gottfried and Johann Bernoulli, both of whom stated that kinetic energy is a living force. To prove this, Willem Gravesande from the Netherlands conducted an experiment. He dropped objects from different heights on a block of clay. From these experiments, Gravesande then came to the conclusion that depth in clay is directly proportional to the square of speed.

According to the HyperPhysics Concept page, energy of motion is defined as an expression of the fact that a moving object can do work on whatever it hits or hits. The object that is hit by the blow then has the ability to do business as a result of its movement.

In simple terms, this energy is the energy possessed by an object due to certain movements. Because of this, this energy is also referred to as the energy of motion, because it is produced by objects that are in motion and these objects produce other energy.

Etymologically, the term kinetic energy comes from the Greek word energia. The meaning is effort and the word kinesis which means motion.

An easy example of the energy of motion is when an object experiences repeated friction on different surfaces. When the object continues to experience friction, the energy of motion will become heat energy. The heat energy that is formed can then be utilized by humans for other purposes.

Another example of motion energy is when the palm of the hand is touched to the cheek while the hand is still and does not move. When the palms don’t move, the cheeks won’t hurt or feel a certain effect.

However, when the palm starts to be moved like a slapping motion, the cheek will feel the effect, which is pain. This can happen, because the kinetic energy from the movement of the hand has been transferred to the cheek, so that the cheek feels sore.

As previously explained, this energy is affected by the mass and speed of the motion of the object itself. So that means, the mass, weight or weight of an object will affect the speed of the object’s movement. The energy produced will also be affected by the speed of the motion.

Kinetic energy which is included in the category of mechanical energy is measured in joules. The joule is the unit of power for energy, just as power produced by the passage of force is a unit Newton.

From the explanation above, did Sinaumed’s wonder, if a moving object has kinetic energy, then does a stationary object have no energy? Please note that a stationary object actually also has energy, namely potential energy.

Potential energy itself is the energy possessed by an object, because of the object’s position relative to a reference. Reference of an object, can be measured based on the height of the object from the ground.

From the explanation of the definition of kinetic energy above, it can be concluded that kinetic energy has the following three characteristics.

• An object that is moving must have kinetic energy.
• This energy is affected by the speed and mass of an object.
• The movement of an object, has a variety of directions.

Benefits of Kinetic Energy

Kinetic energy is the same as other energy sources that can be utilized to support human activities and life. In general, the benefits of a kinetic energy source are in accordance with the type of energy produced. Here are some examples of kinetic energy used in everyday life.

1. Power plant

Motion energy can be converted into electrical energy which is very important for everyday human life. This energy change, generally by utilizing a generator.

When the generator moves, the generator will move the electric conducting coil in a magnetic field and produce an electric current.

A simple example of a power plant using kinetic energy is a wind power plant which is capable of converting the kinetic energy of the wind with wind turbine blades.

Apart from wind power plants, another example is hydro power plants which are capable of changing the kinetic energy of water through the movement of water currents from dams.

2. Means of transportation drive

Besides being useful for generating electricity, kinetic energy can also be used to drive transportation equipment that is often used in everyday life.

An example is a sailing ship that utilizes the kinetic energy of the wind, so it can help propel the ship in the middle of the ocean.

3. Food processor

Kinetic energy can be used by humans to drive food processing equipment, for example, such as a tool to separate certain food ingredients from their skins.

In addition, kinetic energy can also move tools to change the forms of food ingredients. Like windmills that are used to grind wheat seeds and turn them into flour.

4. Games and entertainment

Besides being able to be used to meet basic human daily needs, such as transportation and electricity, kinetic energy is also used as games and entertainment. One of the games that use kinetic energy is the traditional Indonesian game, namely kites.

Kites can move and fly using the kinetic energy of the wind. Another example is a traditional Indonesian game, namely a spinning top that uses kinetic energy.

Types of Kinetic Energy

As previously explained, that kinetic energy in general can be utilized by humans for various kinds of needs. However, before it can be used and utilized, kinetic energy must first be converted into another form of energy.

Therefore, there are several types of kinetic energy seen from the energy produced. Here’s an explanation.

1. Radiant energy

Radiant energy is a type of kinetic energy which is also known as electromagnetic energy. For example, when you listen to the radio, it means that Sinaumed’s is taking advantage of the electromagnetic energy that is happening. Radiation energy is included in various types of kinetic energy because radiation also experiences movement during the energy change process.

Although it cannot be seen with the naked eye, radiation is actually around human life. Radiation has many benefits, but it has to be in the right amount.

Because the radians that come out in large quantities and quickly escape into the air, it will actually result in dangerous things such as death. In general, radiation or the process of releasing energy can move in the form of particles or rays.

An example is the sun which is a source of energy that radiates its energy through particles and light. Radiation has two types.

The first is non-ionic radiation, which is radiation emitted by waves, such as radio waves, ultraviolet or sound waves. The radiation also makes other things like radios, cell phones, microwaves or ultrasound machines work.

Non-ionic radiation has a lower level of the electromagnetic spectrum. Even though large amounts of non-ion radiation can still be harmful to humans. However, non-ionic radiation cannot change the molecular chemistry of humans or objects.

The second type of radiant energy is ion radiation. Some sources of natural ion radiation energy are cosmic light from the sun, stars and elements in the soil.

Meanwhile, man-made ion radiation sources can be seen through X-rays, CT scans and radiation therapy to treat cancer.

Ion-type radiation is a type of radiation that has a high frequency. In addition, ion radiation also has enough strength to be able to strike atoms and change the chemistry of molecules.

In addition, high doses of ionizing radiation in humans can change DNA which is useful for cancer therapy. However, this will still be dangerous if the radiation dose given is not properly regulated.

2. Sound energy

The second type of kinetic energy is sound energy. As Sinaumed’s knows, sound is a vibration or movement that comes from various materials, such as air and water.

An example of sound energy is when a person is listening to a gong being beaten or hit, if you pay attention the gong can make a sound because there is a trigger, namely beating.

It is the beating of the gong that causes vibrations to propagate, thus producing a distinctive sound from the gong.

Sound energy can be formed if there is a vibrating object. The vibration of the object is what causes sound waves. However, sound waves must travel by means of air as well as water, in order to be heard by humans.

If a vibration moves quickly, what happens is that the sound waves become shorter and the pitch heard is higher.

On the other hand, when an object experiences vibrations that move slowly, then the sound waves produced will be longer and the tone heard will be lower.

Not only that, voice energy can also appear when someone speaks, sings or when a bell rings. Sound energy can be found easily in everyday life.

3. Heat energy

Sinaumed’s may be wondering, is heat energy a type of kinetic energy? The answer is of course yes, maybe Sinaumed’s is confused, how does heat energy enter into kinetic energy and what is the process of motion from kinetic energy that changes or produces heat energy?

It should be noted that heat energy has molecules and atoms that have fast motion and these atoms and molecules rub against each other. As previously explained, that kinetic energy can be generated from the effort of motion by an object.

That way, molecules and atoms that rub together continuously will certainly generate heat energy. For example, when near a bonfire, Sinaumed’s will certainly feel warm from the bonfire.

Then Sinaumed’s may wonder, where does the heat energy come from? One source of heat energy is the sun.

Heat energy from the sun can help the process of making food or help photosynthesis in plants. As Sinaumed’s knows, the sun’s heat energy can illuminate the earth, so the air on earth becomes warmer.

In addition, solar thermal energy can be used for various human activities in everyday life, for example, such as helping the process of drying clothes and others.

Another example of a source of heat energy is that Sinaumed’s could try rubbing his hands together for a period of time. When Sinaumed’s continues to rub his hands together, gradually Sinaumed’s will feel a warm feeling.

In ancient times, fire could be obtained by rubbing two objects together, such as a dry stick or stone. To obtain fire in this way, one would need to perform the motion repeatedly, triggering sparks.

Heat energy from the sun has been proven to have many benefits for life on earth, not only for humans but for plants and plants as well. Solar thermal energy has several benefits, one of which is to help the human body form vitamin D, and become an alternative energy source.

Heat energy does not only come from the sun, but also from rocks in the earth. Thermal energy from the earth is usually referred to as geothermal energy. In general, geothermal energy can be used as an alternative energy source to generate electricity.

Another source of heat energy is fire, which is a substance in the form of light and heat. Fire can be generated with various fuels, such as coal, oil or gas. Another source of heat energy is electricity. Electrical energy can be turned into heat energy. An easy example is when Sinaumed’s uses electronic equipment such as hair dryers or irons,

4. Mechanical energy

The last type of motion energy is mechanical energy stored in a body or in certain objects. When an object moves fast or fast, the energy that will be generated will be even greater.

An example is the wheel. When Sinaumed’s pedals a bicycle or uses roller skates, the faster Sinaumed’s pedals, the faster the bicycle or roller skates move. Vice versa, the bicycle will move slowly if Sinaumed’s pedals slowly.

That’s a little explanation about the energy of motion that Sinaumed’s needs to know. If it’s not clear or Sinaumed’s wants to understand the material about kinetic energy further, Sinaumed’s can find further information by reading books, one of which is a Natural Sciences textbook for elementary schools.

Sinaumed’s can read books related to kinetic energy and Natural Sciences at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, we provide original and useful textbooks for Sinaumed’s.

 

Kinds of Sujud and Their Prayers – Sujud is one part of the prayer movement. This prostration movement is also one of the movements favored by Rasulullah SAW, therefore it is a noble movement.

Sujud is also a form of surrendering oneself to Allah SWT. because we are small helpless servants without the help of Allah SWT.

Although prostration is part of the prayer movement, prostration can also be performed under certain conditions. The prostration prayer also varies depending on the prostration we do.

The proper way to prostrate according to the rules of prayer is to place the forehead, nose, palms of both hands, knees and the tips of the toes with the prayer mats used. Don’t forget to space your feet slightly apart. The movement is repeated several times in prayer. Likewise with other prostrations, but not repeated continuously like when praying.

The beauty of a prayer is when we realize that we are weak, helpless and cannot do anything without His permission and power. This book is a suggestion or a reminder that praying in prostration is the right thing to do so that what you want can come true.

This article will provide an explanation of the various prostrations along with the prayers for each prostration that is performed. To find out more details, let’s look at the following review!

The Meaning of Prostration in Prayer

Sujud is one of the prayer movements. This movement must be done when performing prayers. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary, prostration means a statement of respect by kneeling and bowing your head. This means that when we prostrate we worship Allah SWT. as a form of respect because He is the Lord of the universe.

Rasulullah saw. also said regarding prostration which has physical and spiritual privileges that, “You should make more prostrations (pray more) to Allah. Because you do not increase your prostration for Allah, but Allah will exalt your rank and erase your sins.

1. The Law of Prostrating in Prayer

In the view of the Jumhur Ulama, namely the scholars from the schools of Al-Hanafiyah, Al-Malikiyah, and Asy-Syafi’iyah, they say that the pronouncements when prostrating are in the form of takbir, tasbih, and prostration prayers according to him are sunnah. If it is not read at all, intentionally or unintentionally, the prayer will still be valid.

In the hadith of Rasulullah SAW. also he taught how to prostrate properly, but he did not say that he had to read something when prostrating. If the reading of prostration is a must, surely the Prophet Muhammad. teach it to the people.

However, in another view, the Al-Hanabilah school of thought says that reciting prayers during prostration is obligatory. If someone deliberately does not recite the prayer during prostration, the prayer will be invalidated. However, if a person forgets to read the prayer, his prayer is still valid, then it is sunnah to perform prostration for forgetfulness.

Basically they believe that Rasulullah SAW. doing this practice and has ordered his people to read prayers at the time of prostration.

2. Prostration Prayer in Salat

There are seven kinds of prayer at the time of prostration in prayer that has been taught by Rasulullah SAW. Therefore, we should practice it by reading it alternately at different prayer times. The following are the prayers of prostration in prayer.

• سُبْحَانَ رَبِّيَ الْأَعْلَى

Subhaana rabbiyal a’laa (3x)

Meaning: “Glory be to my Lord, the Most High.”

• سُبْحَانَ رَبِّيَ الْأَعْلَى وَبِحَمْدِهِ

Subhaana rabbiyal a’laa wa bihamdih (3x)

Meaning: “Glory be to my Lord, the Most High, and I praise Him.”

• سُبُّوحٌ قُدُّوسٌ، رَبُّ الْمَلَائِكَةِ وَالرُّوحِ

Subbuuhun qudduusun rabbul malaa-ikati war ruuh.

Meaning: “Glory, Glorious, Lord of the Angels and Spirits.” (HR Muslim No. 487).

• Amen _ _ _ _ _ _

Subhaa-nakallahumma rabbana wa bihamdika, allahummaghfir-lii.

Meaning: “Glory to You, O Allah, O Lord you, and by praising You, O Allah, forgive me.”

• O Allah , O Allah , grant us peace _ _

Allahummagh-fir-lii dzan-bii kullahuu, diqqahuu, wa jullahuu, wa awwa-lahuu, wa aa-khirohuu, wa ‘alaa-niya-tahuu wa sirrohuu.

Meaning: “O Allah, forgive all my sins, the smallest and the biggest, the first and the last, the open and the hidden.”

• اللهُمَّ لَكَ سَجَدْتُ، وَبِكَ آمَنْتُ، وَلَكَ أَسْلَمْتُ، سَجَدَ وَجْهِي لِلَّذِي خَلَقَهُ، وَصَوَّرَهُ، وَشَقَّ سَمْعَهُ وَبَصَرَهُ، تَبَارَكَ اللهُ أَحْسَنُ الْخَالِقِينَ

Allahumma laka sajad-tu, wa bika aamantu, wa laka aslam-tu. Sajada wajhii lilladzii khala-qohuu, wa shawwa-rohuu, wa syaqqo sam’ahuu wa basharahuu, tabaarokallahu ahsanul kholiqiin.

Meaning: “O Allah, to You I prostrate, to You I believe and to You I submit myself. And You are my Lord. My face prostrate to the One Who has created and shaped it, so be good to me. And who has made me hear and see, then Glory be to Allah, the best creator.”

• God bless you _ _ _

Subhaana dzil jabaruut, wal malakuut, walkibriyaa, wal ‘adzamah.

Meaning: “Glory be the owner of Might, and Power, and Arrogance, and Majesty.”

Prostration of gratitude

Prostration of gratitude is usually done by Muslims when they are receiving pleasure from Allah SWT. This is done to thank Allah SWT. for the pleasure that has been given to His servant.

Prostration of gratitude is sunnah. If you do it, of course you will get a reward because we are always grateful and grateful to Allah SWT. for the abundance of grace and privilege given to us. However, if we don’t do it that’s fine too, just say Alhamdulillah.

1. Procedures for Prostration of Gratitude

In doing so, prostration of gratitude also has its own way. Not only by saying hamdalah when you get pleasure, you can also do prostrations of gratitude. This has been mentioned in the word of God in the Qur’an QS Ibrahim verse 7, “If you are grateful, I will surely increase it. But if you deny it, My punishment will be very painful.”

Here are the procedures for prostration of gratitude.

• Cleanse yourself from major and minor hadas and from uncleanness;
• Taking ablution;
• Covering the genitals and facing the Qibla;
• Perform takbir and recite the intention of prostration of gratitude silently;

Nawaitu prostrates gratitude sunnatan lillahi ta’aala

Meaning: “I intend to perform sunnah prostrations of thanksgiving for Allah ta’aala.”

• Perform a prostration of gratitude by reading a prayer of prostration of gratitude.
• Sitting between two prostrations without reciting tasyahud
• Regards

2. Prayer of Thanksgiving

سَجَدَ وَجْهِى لِلَّذِى خَلَقَهُ وَصَوَّرَهُ وَشَق release

Sajada wajhi lilladzi khalaqahu, wa shawwarahu, wa syaqqa sam’ahu, wa basharahu bi khaulihi wa kuuwatihi fatabarakallahu ahsanul kholiqiin.

Meaning: “My face prostrate to the Substance that created it, who formed it, and gave hearing and sight, Glory to Allah, the best Creator.”

Apart from offering prayers of gratitude, you can also read other prayers such as tasbih, tahmid, and tahlil, as well as read fragments of QS An-Naml verse 19.

• Read tasbih, tahmid, and tahlil.

Subhaanall a hi walhamdulillaahi walaa ilaaha illall aa hu wall aa huakbar , walaa haula walaa quwwata illaa billaahil aliyyil azhiim .

Meaning: “Glory be to Allah, all praise be to Allah, there is no god but Allah, Allah is the Greatest, there is no power and strength except for the help of Allah, the Most High, the Most Great.”

• S An-Naml verse 19.

فَتَبَسَّمَ ضَاحِكًا مِّن قَوْلِهَا وَقَالَ رَبِّ أَوْزِعْنِىٓ أَنْ أَشْكُرَ نِعْمَتَكَ ٱلَّتِىٓ أَنْعَمْتَ عَلَىَّ وَعَلَىٰ وَٰلِدَىَّ وَأَنْ أَعْمَلَ صَٰلِحًا تَرْضَىٰهُ وَأَدْخِلْنِى بِرَحْمَتِكَ فِى عِبَادِكَ ٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ

Fa tabassama ???ikam ming qaulih? wa q?la rabbi auzi’n? an asykura ni’matakallat? an’amta ‘alayya wa ‘al? w?lidayya wa an a’mala ??li?an tar??hu wa adkhiln? bira?matic f? ‘ib?dika?-??li??n .

Meaning: So he smiled and laughed because (heard) the words of the ant. And he prayed: “O my Lord, give me inspiration to continue to be grateful for Your blessings that You have bestowed on me and my two parents and to do good deeds that You are pleased with; and admit me by Your mercy among Your righteous servants.”

This ebook is a prayer for the author to subdue the thousand prides attached to oneself as an ordinary human being, I hope this ebook becomes writing that can lead us all to explore the meaning of life.

Sujud recitations

Sujud recitation is a combination of two Arabic words, namely prostration and recitation. Sujud means to bow your head or humble yourself and recitations mean to read the Koran. More fully, prostration of recitations is a prostration that is performed when after reading or hearing the recitation of verses from the sadjah of the Al-Quran while praying or not. Recitation prostrations can also be referred to as reading prostrations.

Sadjah verses are found in several letters in the Al-Quran. These letters include, Surat Al-A’raf, Ar-Ra’d, An-Nahl, Al-Isra’, Maryam, Al-Furqan, An-Naml, As-Sadjah, Fussilat, An-Najm, Al -Insyiqaq, Al-Alaq, and Al-Hajj.

In addition, there are also several verses in the Koran and also hadiths that explain the prostration of recitations. The first is from a fragment of QS Al-Isra’ verses 107-109.

قُلْ آمِنُوا بِهِ أَوْ لَا تُؤْمِنُوا إِنَّ الَّذِينَ أُوتُوا الْعِلْمَ مِنْ قَبْلِهِ إِذَا يُتْلَى عَلَيْهِمْ يَخِرُّونَ لِلأذْقَانِ سُجَّدًا (107) وَيَقُولُونَ سُبْحَانَ رَبِّنَا إِنْ كَانَ وَعْدُ رَبِّنَا لَمَفْعُولا (108) وَيَخِرُّونَ لِلأذْقَانِ يَبْكُونَ وَيَزِيدُهُمْ خُشُوعًا (109)

Meaning: Say, “You have faith in him or you don’t have to believe (it’s the same for Allah). Indeed, those who were given prior knowledge when the Qur’an is recited to them, they bow down on their faces while prostrating, and they say, ‘Glory be to our Lord; verily the promise of our Lord shall be fulfilled.” And they fell on their faces while weeping and they became more solemn’.” (QS Al-Isra’: 107-109).

Then, in a hadith narration from Abu Hurairah, Rasulullah SAW said:

إِذَا قَرَأَ ابْنُ آدَمَ السَّجْدَةَ فَسَجَدَ اعْتَزَلَ الشَّيْطَانُ يَبْكِى يَقُولُ يَا وَيْلَهُ – وَفِى رِوَايَةِ أَبِى كُرَيْبٍ يَا وَيْلِى – أُمِرَ ابْنُ آدَمَ بِالسُّجُودِ فَسَجَدَ فَلَهُ الْجَنَّةُ وَأُمِرْتُ بِالسُّجُودِ فَأَبَيْتُ فَلِىَ النَّارُ

Meaning: “If the son of Adam recites the verse of the prayer mat and then prostrate, then the devil will leave while crying and say, “Woe to me, he (the son of Adam) is ordered to prostrate and he obeys and then prostrate, then heaven will be for him. While I myself was ordered to prostrate but I refused, then for me hell.” (Narrated by Muslim, and Ibn Majah in Nashbur Roayah Volume 2 page 178).

1. Prayer of prostration of recitations

When you have read and heard the sadjah verse, you must prostrate and read the recitations of prostration prayers. The following is a prayer of prostration of recitations that must be read.

سَجَدَ وَجْهِى لِلَّذِى خَلَقَهُ وَصَوَّرَهُ وَشَق release

Sajada wajhi lilladzi kholaqohu, wa showwarohu, wa syaqqo sam’ahu, wa bashorohu bi khaulihi wa kuuwatihi fatabarakallahu ahsanul kholiqiin.

 

Meaning: “My face prostrate to the One who created it, who formed it, and who gives hearing and sight, the blessing of Allah is the best creator,” (Narrated by Ahmad, Abu Dawud, Hakim, Tirmidhi, and Nsa’i)

2. Procedures for Prostrating Recitations

There are two ways to prostrate recitations, namely prostration in prayer and also outside prayer.

• Prostrate in prayer

When we are in the prayer position and we read the sadjah verse, we should immediately perform prostrations without having to bow and i’tidal first. After completing the prostrations, return to the position before the prostration and continue the prayer.

Meanwhile, when praying in congregation and the priest reads the sadjah verse, the congregation cannot perform the prostration alone if the priest does not do it. However, if the priest performs prostration, then the congregation must also follow it.

• Prostrate outside of prayer

When you hear or recite a sadjah verse, you can immediately recite the takbir and then perform one prostration of recitations, then recite the takbir again after waking up from the recitation of prostrations. In addition, you can just prostrate without being preceded by takbir like in prayer.

Sujud Syawi

Syahwi comes from Arabic which means neglect or forget. The prostration of syahwi is done when we are negligent in the movement or reading of the prayer when we carry it out. When we are in doubt about the cycles we have performed during the prayer, we can make prostrations of syahwi so that the prayer remains valid.

In doing so, there is also a procedure for prostration of syahwi. Here are some procedures for performing prostrations of syahwi.

1. Procedure for Prostrating Syahwi

In doing so, the procedure for prostrating syahwi is also divided into two, namely before greeting and after greeting.

The prostration of syahwi before greeting is done when:

• Left out some of the prayer movements because they forgot;
• Doubt about the number of prayer cycles that have been carried out.

Sujud syahwi after greeting can be done when:

• Adding cycles due to forgetting the cycles that have been carried out during prayer;
• Added prayer movement for forgetting.

With this in mind, the scholars have agreed that performing prostrations of syahwi after or before greetings is a recommendation because of being negligent in the movements and cycles of prayer. If there is prostration of syahwi in prayer then the prayer is still valid. This is also in accordance with the statement of Al-Khithabi.

• The prostration of syahwi is the same as the prostration in prayer;
• The syahwi prostrations are performed twice, by sitting between the two prostrations;
• It is prescribed to recite the takbir when performing prostrations and after prostrations such as during prayers.

2. Syahwi Prayer

Sujud syahwi does not have a special prayer when we do it. Therefore, the scholars agree that when performing the prostrations, the syahwi read the prostration prayers as during the prayers. This is in accordance with what was said by Ibn Qudamah Rahimahullah.

“Let him read in his prostration sahwi, the reading that is said in prostration during prayer, because prostration for sahwi is a prostration similar to prostration for prayer.” (Al-Mughni, 2:432–433).

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Sinaumed’s, this is an explanation of the types of prostrations and prayers. Hopefully you can remember and practice the knowledge you just got. If you already know it, maybe you can practice it on other people who don’t know it yet.

If you want to learn a lot about Islam, you can read and buy books available at sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits provides quality books that you can get. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

This book reminds us to always prostrate to allah swt. to receive forgiveness for the sins we have committed. Prostration is also useful so that the prayers we offer to Allah SWT. acceptable and acceptable.

Kinds of Reflective Sounds – In everyday life, does Sinaumed’s realize that the sound we hear actually reflects?

Yep, just like a ball that is reflected on the ground, the sound produced by humans, animals, or inanimate objects also bounces, you know… It’s just that the appearance of the reflected sound is intangible because sound also doesn’t have a form . Sinaumed’s also needs to know that sound is also a form of energy.

Then, what are the kinds of reflected sounds? Let’s look at the following review so that Sinaumed’s understands the reflected sound.

What the heck is that sound?

Before discussing the various types of reflected sounds, we must first understand what sound is. Yep, the sound is the same as the sound. This sound or voice can be produced by humans, animals, even objects that are around us.

Based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) sound means something that is heard or heard by the human ear. If an illustration is made, the sound has a wave shape. Well, as explained earlier that sound is also a form of energy. The sound energy comes from a vibrating object, from the vibrations that propagate it is called a wave.

Sound is a longitudinal wave that propagates in a dense and stretched manner formed by intermediary particles (air molecules) and generated by sound sources that experience vibrations. From the sound that propagates will later reach the ear until finally it can be heard and understood by the brain.

Most sounds can be measured in Hertz (Hz) and loudness can be measured in decibels .

What Is Sound Energy?

Sound energy is all abilities that occur due to the influence of sound. Even when we talk or walk later it will make a sound. Well, all of these sounds are of course produced by a sound source.

Sound Source

Sound sources are objects that produce a sound, and there are many types because not all sounds are produced by a single source. An example is the guitar musical instrument, the source of the sound is in the form of strings. In addition, the way the sound source works in order to produce a sound also varies.

Discussion about the source of the sound will not be separated from the existence of resonance. Resonance is the vibration of an object because of another object, so that the sound produced becomes louder and stronger. The existence of this resonance is usually used in musical activities, with a tool called a resonator.

Please note that the sound will sound strong or loud when our ears are near the sound source. Well, the resulting sound will be strong, weak, shrill, or low-pitched.

Based on the strength and weakness of the sound (frequency), the sound can be divided into 3 types, namely:

1. Infrasound

Infrasound is a very weak sound with an approximate number of sound vibrations of less than 20 Hz per second. The human ear cannot hear the sound, only certain animals can hear it, for example dogs, cats, crickets, and others.

2. Audiosonics

Audiosonics is a type of sound that has a vibration of about 20 to 20,000 Hz per second. With this vibration size, of course the human ear can catch and hear it.

3. Ultrasonic

Ultrasonic is a type of sound that has a very strong frequency, even above audiosonic. The number of sound vibrations is more than about 20,000 Hz per second. However, even though it has strong sound vibrations, the human ear cannot perceive and hear it. Only certain animals can hear it, such as dolphins and bats.

Kinds of Reflective Sounds

It should be noted that the reflected sound is the sound that occurs because a sound wave hits a reflective surface, then the sound wave will be reflected back by the reflective surface. There are several types of reflected sounds, namely echoes and echoes.

1. Echoes

An echo sound is a type of reflected sound that sounds less clear, not even as clear as the original sound. This echo sound usually occurs because the reflected sound has been mixed with the original sound.

Reverberation usually occurs at a distance between reflective walls of about 10 to 20 meters, and occurs inside buildings, such as concert halls, cinema halls, and conference halls.

For example, you are watching a DAY6 concert, then the vocalist shouts the word “Lari”, later as a result of the echo sound, you will hear the word “run” with a pause. Here’s an illustration:

Original sound: la – ri

Reflected sound: la — ri

Sounds heard: la ———— ri

2. Echo Sound

Echo sound is a type of reflected sound that is heard after the original sound. This means that the sound of the reflected sound will appear with a delay not too long after the original sound has been produced. This echo occurs because the sound source and the reflecting wall are far apart.

In contrast to echoes, this echo occurs on cliffs, caves, hillsides, to football stadiums, which have a distance between the reflecting walls of more than 20 meters. For example, when you are in a cave, you shout the word ” Help “, then the reflected sound of the word ” Please ” will come out after the original sound disappears.

3. Amplify Original Sound

The next type of reflected sound is that which strengthens the original sound. Unlike the previous reflected sound, in this type the reflected sound will actually amplify the original sound, because the distance between the sound source and the reflecting wall is very close, so the time needed for the sound to reflect back is also very short.

Therefore, this type of reflected sound will be heard and considered at the same time as the original sound, even the original sound can be heard louder. Usually this happens when you sing in the shower.

The strength of the sound depends on several factors, namely:

• Resonance
• Amplitude (maximum deviation of a wave that will affect the sound strength ) of the sound source
• The distance between the sound source and the listener
• The distance between the listener and the reflecting wall

Benefits of Reflected Sound

1. Can be used to measure the depth of the sea, especially in the ultrasonic sound.
2. To detect the fetus in the womb, usually using infrasound.
3. To detect damage to a metal.
4. There are speakers on the radio, television, to cell phones. Usually using audiosonic sound.
5. For the search for ships or metal treasures on the seabed.

What are the Properties of Sound Energy?

Sound energy has special properties, namely it can move to another place, by propagating through certain media. Not only that, sound can also be reflected and absorbed.

1. Sound Can Travel Through Solids, Liquids, and Gases

Many people think that sound can only propagate through solids, when in fact, sound can also propagate in liquids and gases, you know…

The vibrations produced by sound will later propagate in the form of waves, therefore they are called sound waves. Well, sound waves can travel through solids, liquids, and gases. Even the fastest propagation is when through the air. An example is when ringing a bell.

• Through solid objects, for example when playing the telephone using strings and cans. Sound waves will propagate through the strings to our ears.
• Through liquid objects such as when two stones are dropped into water
• Through gaseous substances, for example when birds sing and their sound vibrations enter our ears. Then, there is also the sound of thunder when it rains.

You also need to know, Sinaumed’s, that sound cannot travel in a vacuum. A vacuum is a room that has no air in it.

2. Sound Can Be Absorbed and Reflected ( Reflection )

When a sound wave propagates in a solid object and hits the surface of the object, the sound will be absorbed or even reflected. For example, sound hitting the surface of a cave will reflect off to form an echo.

The types of reflected sounds have been discussed in the previous point, namely there are echoes, echoes, and sounds that are heard after the original sound. Even though the sound is reflected and causes the original sound to not be heard clearly, there are many benefits, you know, from the presence of this reflected sound, one of which is to detect a potential fetus in a mother’s womb.

3. Sound Can Experience Refraction ( Refraction )

Not only light is refracted, but also sound. This is because light and sound both have waves, where the main characteristic of waves is to experience refraction.

An example of a sound refraction event is when at night there is a louder sound of thunder than during the day.

This is because during the day, the upper layer of air is colder than the lower layer. Therefore, the speed of sound is slower in colder temperatures than in hotter temperatures, so the speed of sound in the upper layers of air is lower than in the lower layers.

4. Sound Can Experiencing Flexion ( Diffraction )

Sound waves are very easy to experience bending or diffraction because sound waves in the air have wavelengths in the range of centimeters to several meters.

An example of this sound diffraction is when we can already hear the sound of a vehicle’s engine at a road bend, even though we haven’t seen the vehicle because it is blocked by the buildings around the road bend.

5. Sounds Experiencing Mixture ( Interference )

It turns out that sound waves can experience symptoms of combination or interference. Well, this interference is divided into two types, namely constructive interference (sound amplification) and destructive interference (sound attenuation).

An example of sound wave interference is when we are between two loudspeakers with the same frequency and amplitude, then later we will hear alternating loud and weak sounds.

Sound Requirements

Even though the sound can be produced by anyone and anything, in order for it to be heard by human ears and animal ears, it also requires several conditions, namely there must be a medium, a source of sound, and a listener.

1. There is Medium

Previously, it was explained that the sound can propagate through solid objects, liquids, and gas objects. Well, these objects can become a medium for sound propagation to occur. Therefore there is a statement that sound cannot be produced in a vacuum.

The presence of the medium also contributes to the speed of sound. An example is the sound of thunder. The sound of thunder can be caught by human and animal ears because it propagates through the air. If the air has a temperature of around 20०C then the speed of sound is 343 m per second.

It’s different if the medium is a liquid, then the speed of sound is around 1,500 m per second. The speed of sound is usually used to search for treasure or ships on the seabed.

Then in the medium in the form of solid objects, especially steel, the speed of propagation is around 6,000 m per second. This experiment on the speed of propagation of sound in a solid medium can be carried out simply by tapping the table with a pencil.

2. There is a Sound Source

The source of the sound is the vibration of the object that produces the sound. The closer our ears are to the sound source, the louder and clearer the sound will be. Examples of sound sources are the sound of a guitar coming from plucked strings, the sound of a drum coming from animal skins being beaten, and so on.

3. There is a Listener

So, those who can hear various sounds around us are humans and animals. How can sound be heard? Namely by relying on the sense of hearing in the form of ears.

Sound Characteristics

• Tone is a sound that has a regular frequency
• Wheezing is a sound that has an irregular frequency
• Timbre is the color of sound, which is in the form of the overall auditory impression obtained by our ears from the sound source.
• A boom is a sound that has a large amplitude and is heard suddenly.

Benefits of Sound for Human Life

The existence of sound is of course very beneficial for human life in various fields, including even in the health sector. So, here are the benefits of sound:

1. Detects the presence of tumors in the human body.
2. Destroys kidney stones in the human body.
3. Ultrasound ( ultrasound ), which is a method for detecting a fetus in a mother’s womb. In this case, it will usually use ultrasonic waves.
4. To measure the depth of the sea, detect the presence of mines, search for sunken ships, and locate groups of fish using SONAR ( Sound Navigating Ranging ).
5. To detect the oil and mineral content in the earth, especially using ultrasonic waves.
6. To measure the length of cave passages and investigate metal damage, using sound reflection.
7. The tones sung by humans can be used to study the expression of human thoughts, motivations and emotions.

Well, that’s an explanation of the various types of reflected sound and the benefits of sound for everyday human life. Even though sound is closely related to our lives, without realizing it, it turns out that the existence of sound is very useful, isn’t it? 

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Also Read!

• Definition of Sound Energy Sources and Examples
• Characteristics and Examples of Solids
• Get to know Newton’s laws and their application
• Nocturnal Animals That Are Active at Night
• Complete Explanation of Properties of Liquids and Examples
• What is Hooke’s Law?
• Properties of Light and Examples
• Understanding What is Archimedes’ Law

In English, there are pronouns or what we call Indonesian as pronouns.

Types of Pronouns

As with pronouns in Indonesian, pronouns also have various types that can be used according to the context of the sentence. What are the types of pronouns? Let’s listen to the following description!

• PERSONAL PRONOUNS

Personal pronouns are words that are used to replace people or things. ( Personal pronouns are words that are used to replace a person or thing ). These personal pronouns are distinguished again based on their behavior as objects and subjects. There are several personal pronouns as subjects, namely,

• I (I, I)

Example: I go to school early.

 

• You (You, You, You, You)

Example: You are a boy.

 

• We (We, Us)

Example: We are busy today.

 

• they (They)

Example: They are students.

 

• He (He – usually for a boy)

Example: He is a Colonel.

 

• She (She – usually for girls)

Example: She is a good girl.

• It (This, that)

Example: It is a car.

 

Meanwhile, personal pronoun as an object can be described as follows,

• Me

Example: Ali asked me to open the door.

• you

• Him

• Her

• it

• Us

• them

In compiling sentences with pronouns, you must pay attention to the position or “role” of the pronoun according to the context of the sentence. Example!

• I (I) give this for you (given this for you).
• She gives me (He gave) me (me) money.
• For me (me) not for her (not for him).
• You and I

You can learn about the Complete Book of Grammar: Powerful Moves to Master Grammar
by RURI WIDANINGSIH

• POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE

Possessive adjectives are words used to express possession. This possessive pronoun cannot stand alone, so it must be followed by a noun ( Possessive adjectives are words that are used to express possessions. They can not stand alone, so they are followed by a noun ).

Possessive adjectives can function as objects or subjects, but keep in mind that these possessive adjectives cannot stand alone. There are several forms of possessive adjectives, viz

• my 

Example: My mother went to Monica (as subject)

• your

Example: That is your bag?

• Her

Example: Her husband is a doctor.

• His

Example: That is his house.

• Its

Example: Its door is broken.

• our

Example: I visited our grandmother (as an object)

• their

Example: Their problems are serious.

 

• POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS (Possessive Pronouns)

Possessive pronouns are words used to express ownership that can stand alone . Possessive pronouns are not followed by a noun. ( Possessive pronouns are words that are used to express possessions, which can stand alone. They are not followed by a noun ).

What is included in this possessive pronoun ? Let’s see!

• mine

Example: Tina is a friend of mine .

• Yours

Example: I’m yours .

• His

• Hers

• Its

• Ours

• theirs

Example: This big house is theirs .

You can learn about Anti Grammar Grammar Book Special Edition
by Denisio Perez (my teacher Mr. D)

 

• REFLEXIVE PRONOUN (Reflective Pronoun)

Reflexive pronouns are words that are used to express something that has a reciprocal relationship ( Reflexive pronouns are words that are used to express something that has a reciprocal relation ).

In the use of reflexive pronouns , it is usually more to express an action that is unconscious or reflexive . Several forms are included in reflexive pronouns, namely,

• My self

Example: When i was cutting bread, i cut myself

• Yourself

Example: You will hurt yourself

• Himself

Example: He bought himself a new motorcycle.

• Herself

Example: She hurt herself

• Itself

Example: The cat is washing itself .

• Ourself

Example: We build a house ourselves .

• Themselves

Example: They are pleased with themselves .

 

THE POSITION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE TABLE

Subject	Object of Verbs/ Prepositions	Possessive Adjective	Possessive Pronouns	Reflexive Pronouns
I give this for you.	She gave me a chance.	My car is new.	It is mine.	I do it myself.
I	Me	my	mine	My self
you	you	your	Yours	Yourself
Hey	Him	His	His	Himself
She	Her	Her	Hers	Herself
it	it	Its	–	Itself
We	Us	our	our	Ourself
They	them	their	theirs	themselves

 

• DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (Point Pronouns)

Demonstrative pronouns are words that are used to point out something ( Demonstrative pronouns are words that are used to point out something ). There are several forms of pronouns that are included in this type of demonstrative pronouns , namely This, These, That, and Those .

• this _

This is used to show singular nouns that are near us ( This is used to point out the singular noun that is near to us). Example!

• This is (It) a new laptop.
• This is (It) a nice book.
• This song is good!

 

• These _

These areused to point out plural nouns that are near us. Example!

• These are (It) new books (new books)
• These are (It’s) nice bags (nice bags)
• These songs are easy listening

 

• That (That)

That is used to designate singular nouns that are far from us ( That is used to point out the singular noun that is far to us). Example!

• That is (That) my old friend (my old friend)
• That is Ida’s husband (Ida’s husband)
• That problem is very serious

 

• Those (That)

Those are used to point out plural nouns that are far from us ( Those are used to point out the plural noun that is far to us). Example!

• Those are (That) my old friends
• Those are (That) Ida’s teachers (Ida’s teachers)
• Those problems (the problems) are very serious (very serious)

To make it clearer, let’s look at the following table!

	this	These	that	Those
Singular (Single)	✓		✓
Plural (Plural)		✓		✓
Near	✓		✓
Far (Far)		✓		✓

 

You can learn about Grammar Is Easy: A Complete and Quick Guide to Mastering Grammar In
by MUHAMMAD BAYU TRITAJUDIN

 

• INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (Interrogative Pronouns)

Interrogative pronouns are words that are used to ask or ask questions ( Interrogative pronouns are words that are used to ask for questions ). There are several forms included in this type of interrogative pronouns, namely Who, What, Which, When, Where, Whose, Whom, Why, and How .

• Who _ 

Who is the word used to ask people ( Who is the word that is used to ask for a person ). Example!

• Who is it?

It’s Budi! (This is Budi!)

• Who (who) invented telephone (who invented the telephone)?

Graham Bell.

• Who (who) are you?

I’m Arkie Hamizan.

• Who (who) is speaking (who is speaking)?

Mr. President.

 

• What (What/ What…/ How much)

What is the word used to ask for objects ( What is the word that is used to ask for a thing ). Example!

• What (what) do you want?

Money and food!

• What bus (Bus apa) do you take?

Sinar Jaya.

• What (what) is that?

It’s a new car.

• What did she say?

She said nothing.

• What (how) is the price (price) of this laptop?

IDR 5,600,000

• What (what) are you talking about? Nothing.

 

• Which 

Which is the word used to ask a choice ( Which is the word that used to ask a choice ). Example!

• Which one is your sister?

The one with a blue T-shirt.

• Which bus (which bus) goes to Bali?

Prince’s Light.

• Which (which) is your bag?

The black one

 

• when

When is the word used to ask the time ( When is the word that is used to ask the time ). Example!

• When (when) did you come (you come?)

Last week.

• When (when) were you born (you born?)

On July 20, 1999.

 

• Where

Where is the word used to ask for a place/location ( Where is the word that used to ask the place ). Example!

• Where (where) do you live (you live)?

Semarang.

• Where (where) are you going (you going?)

To the bank.

 

• Whose

Whose is the word used to ask for possession ( Whose is the word that used to ask a possession ). Example!

• Whose house is it? (Whose house is this?)

Mr. Samsul’s

• Whose car is that? (Whose car is it?)

Rose’s

 

• Whom

Whom is the word used to ask a person as an object ( Whom is the word that is used to ask a person as an object). Example!

• Whom did you go with? (Who are you going with?)

With Tiara.

• Whom did you speak to? (Who are you talking to?)

To Riska.

 

• Why (Why/ Why)

Why is the word used to ask the reason ( Why is the word that used to ask the reason ). Example!

• Why (why) is she so unhappy? (he feels displeased)

Because she failed on her test.

• Why (why) do you come late? (you came late)

Because i missed the bus.

 

• How (What/ What…/ How/ How)

How is the word that is used to ask how or how to process things ( How is the word that is used to ask how or process for a thing ). Example!

• How (how) do you feel (your feelings)?

I’m fine.

• How often (how many times) do you play tennis?

Once a week (once a week)

• How far (how far) is Jogja to Solo (from Jogja to Solo)?

About 60 km/s (about 60 km)

 

• How long have you been living here? (you live here?)

Around ten years

• How old (how old) are you?

22 years old.

• How much (how much) money do you want? (money you want)

Less than IDR 5,000,000 (less than 5 million)

• How many (how many people) guests come to the party?

About 200 persons (about 200 people).

 

You can learn about Essential Grammar And Reading Strategy For TOEFL Test
by Slamet Riyanto

 

• RELATIVE PRONOUNS (Connecting Pronouns)

Relative pronouns are words that are commonly used in clauses as adjectives ( a relative pronoun is usually that used in adjective clauses ). Therefore, it is located between phrases because it acts as a connector.

Some of the forms included in this type of relative pronoun are That, Who, Whom, Whose , and Which . To understand better, let’s look at the following explanation!

 

• THAT (Which)

That is a word used to replace a person or thing ( That is a word that is used to a person or a thing ). Example!

• Michael Jackson is the world’s best rock singer that ( yang ) ever visited our country ( Michael Jackson is the best rock singer in the world who has visited our country )
• Everything that ( yang ) happened were was my responsibility ( Everything that happened was my responsibility )

• WHO (Who/ who) 

Who is the word used to ask people ( Who is the word that is used for asking a person ). Example!

• The man who ( yang ) is speaking is a bank manager
• A pilot is a person who (yang) flies an airplane (Pilot is someone who flies an airplane)
• The woman who (yang) sits next to me comes from Texas

 

• WHOM (Which)

Whom is the word used to replace a person as an object ( Whom is the word that is used to a person as an object ). Example!

• The girl whom I met yesterday had left for Europe
• The man whom (the) the car belongs to is a businessman
• In my town there are five persons, most of whom (most of them) are rich and educated
• The man whom I talk to was very honest

 

• WHOSE (which…nya)

Whose is the word used for a person to show ownership ( Whose is the word used for a person to show a possession ). Example!

• A widow is a woman whose husband is dead
• The man whose house is very luxurious works for a foreign private company

 

• WHICH (Which) 

Which is the word used for a thing to show a choice . Example!

• This is the film which (yang) tells us about the Vietnam War
• The car which he broke last night is being repaired by a mechanic
• The hotel in which I stay is very expensive

 

• INDEFINITE PRONOUNS (Indefinite Pronouns)

Indefinite pronouns are words that are always considered singular and require a verb in singular form ( Indefinite pronouns are words that are always considered singular and required a verb in singular form). Example!

INDEPENDENT PRONOUNS	EXAMPLES
One  (People, you, you)	One should obey the rules One must knock the door before entering someone’s house
Anybody  (someone, anyone, everyone)	Is there anybody inside? (Is there someone inside?) Anybody who is interested in may come Anybody is welcome
Anything  (Something)	She didn’t say anything
Anyone  (Someone, anyone, everyone)	Anyone is welcome here Anyone must be able to do it
everybody (each person)	Everybody says “NO” to drugs
Everyone  (Each person)	Everyone has the right to vote
Everything  (Everything)	Everything is OK
None (Nobody)	None hates her
Nobody  (Nobody)	Nobody is perfect
Nothing  (nothing)	That criminal say nothing Nothing is new
Some one (Somebody)	Someone wants to see you
Somebody  (Somebody)	Somebody was here an hour ago
something  (Something)	I have something to talk about There is something to eat in my bag

 

Sinaumed’s, if you understand more about what pronouns are, don’t forget to practice the questions every day, OK? So that your English skills are cooler!

Source:

Riyanto, Slamet. The 1st Student’s Choice TOEFL . 2015. Yogyakarta: Student Library.

Purnaning, Estiwi Retno, et al. Upgrading TOEFL Score: The Secret to Increasing the TOEFL Score . 2012. Jakarta: Cmedia.

Kinds of Primary Colors – Life will be more enjoyable if you have colors. The color of life can be in the form of daily activities. Through the colors seen or the color of the clothes worn.

The colors that we often see or wear have an impact on the body. It can also describe our personality. The black color in clothes gives off an elegant impression and can mislead others about your body shape. Someone who wears black clothes will not look too thin or fat.

Likewise, bright colors give a cheerful and lively effect to anyone who sees it. Bright colors can transmit happiness from one person to another. Just by looking at it.

The variety of colors that Sinaumed’s sees don’t just appear out of nowhere. They are created by mixing primary colors. So, what do primary colors actually mean? Come on, Sinaumed’s can listen to the following explanation.

Definition of Color

According to Prawira, color is one of the elements of beauty in art and design apart from other visual elements. Meanwhile, Sanyoto defines color objectively/physically as the nature of the light emitted or subjectively/psychologically as part of the experience of the sense of sight.

Nugraha defines color as the impression the eye gets from the light reflected by familiar objects. Meanwhile, Laksono defines color as part of the light that is transmitted or reflected.

From several expert opinions it can be concluded that there are three important elements in the meaning of color, namely objects, elements of light, and eyes. Thus, conclusions can be drawn regarding the definition of color as an object that reflects the elements of light and is interpreted by the eye based on the light that hits the object.

According to Santoyo, colors are grouped into two groups, namely additive and subtractive colors. Additive color itself is a color that comes from light, usually called a spectrum. The subtractive color is the color that comes from the material, usually called a pigment.

Nugraha explained further about color which can be viewed from two perspectives, namely from the principles of physics and the principles of materials science. This opinion was strengthened by Newton’s findings which revealed that color is a natural phenomenon in the form of light containing spectrum or rainbow colors and pigments.

In 1831, Brewster grouped colors that exist in nature. According to him, colors can be grouped into three kinds, namely primary, secondary, tertiary, and neutral colors. These colors are arranged in the “Brewster” color circle.

Sinaumed’s can observe the color circles grouped by Brewster in the following image.

Definition of Primary Colors

Primary colors are the basic colors that are not created by mixing other colors. According to Brewster’s theory, the primary colors are the basic colors. Cannot be formed by mixing. Meanwhile, other colors are formed from a combination of primary colors.

Nugraha explained more about primary colors. According to him, at first, humans thought that the primary colors were composed of red, green, and yellow. However, based on his research, the primary colors consist of red (such as blood), blue (such as the sky or sea), and yellow (such as egg yolk).

But technically, red, yellow, and blue are not primary pigment colors. Primary pigment colors consist of yellow, magenta, and cyan. Therefore, it is not accurate to say that red, yellow, and blue are the primary pigment colors.

Calling red with magenta would be a less accurate way. The same goes for calling blue using cyan.

The Meaning of the Three Primary Colors

Primary colors have meaning in everyday life. The following are the meanings contained in the three primary colors.

1. Red

Red is often associated with fire, war, violence, passion or love. Someone who sees the color red will have a physical impact in the form of an increase in blood pressure, metabolic rate, and breathing.

In China, red is a symbol of prosperity and happiness. In addition, red can also be used as a color that can attract good luck. This can be seen from eastern cultures which tend to use red on the bride’s dress on the wedding day.

2. Blue

Often times, the color blue is associated with sadness. He also describes the nature of calm and responsibility. Blue can also be associated with peace as well as spiritual or religious messages that exist in various cultures.

Blue color is also suitable for use in design. This is because, the color blue gives the meaning of relaxing and calming. Meanwhile, the bright blue color can provide energy and a refreshing feeling. Meanwhile, the dark blue color is widely used for making websites or in company designs to describe strength and reliability.

3. Yellow

Yellow is closely related to calm, energy, and light. Not infrequently, this color is often associated with symbols of happiness and sunshine.

It can also be interpreted as hope. This can be seen in several countries implementing or using yellow ribbons on people who are at war.

Yellow can also be used as a sign of danger, although not as strong as red. Each country has a different meaning of yellow. As in Egypt, the color yellow is interpreted as sorrow or mourning. Meanwhile, in Japan, yellow is the color that shows courage.

Biological Basis for the Formation of Primary Colors

Primary colors are formed due to the physiological response of the human eye to light. Light itself is a continuous spectrum of wavelengths, meaning that there are an infinite number of colors.

However, normally it only has three types of receptors or receptors called cone cells (located in the retina). Cone cells respond to specific wavelengths of light. Species that have three kinds of receptors including humans are called trichormat creatures.

Creatures with four color receptors that can see the four primary colors are called terrachromats. Humans themselves can only see up to 400 nanometers. Meanwhile, tetrachromat creatures are able to see ultraviolet colors up to 300 nanometers.

The existence of the fourth primary warrant may be located at a lower wavelength. Pure spectral magenta is probably more than just a mixed color of red and blue. The terrachormat creatures themselves consist of several species of birds and marsupials (marsupials).

Primary Color Type

Primary colors have meaning in everyday life. The following are the meanings contained in the three primary colors.

1. Additive Primary Color

The additive primary colors come from the primary colors of light. An additive color system is implemented by combining light rays to create a color sensation using tools or media. One of the most widely used is television.

The additive primary colors consist of red, green, and blue. When red and green light colors are mixed, they produce yellow or orange tones. Mixing blue and green makes cyan. Meanwhile, a mixture of red and blue produces shades of magenta and purple.

Shades of gray are produced from a mixture of primary additive colors in balanced proportions. When the three additive primary colors are fully saturated, they produce white. The resulting color space or color model is called red, green, blue (RGB).

RGB is usually used in fine arts (painting). The RGB color space forms a triad of primary colors within a standard color circle. At the same time forming secondary colors consisting of violet, orange/orange, and green. The color triad is arranged equidistantly (equally spaced) in a color circle.

2. Subtractive Primary Colors

Subtractive primary colors are formed from the primary colors of light reflection. The subtractive color mixing method is used by media by reflecting light to produce color. RGB is also part of the subtractive primary colors, but is not used in the printing industry.

The printing industry applies subtractive primary colors (magenta, yellow, and cyan) with varying sizes. Mixing yellow and cyan produces shades of green. Mixing yellow with magenta produces shades of red. Mixing magenta and cyan produces shades of blue.

Shades of gray are theoretically produced by mixing these three color pigments. Black appears when all three of these colors are fully saturated. However, in practice it instead produces a dirty brownish color.

Therefore, a fourth color is often used, namely black in addition to cyan, magenta, and yellow. The color space created is called cyan , magenta, yellow, black (CMYK). The mention of “K” for the key is taken from the term key plate which is black in color. These colors are used in printing in the form of printing plates that create artistic details in the image.

History of the Discovery of Color

In 1660, Isaac Newton conducted color experiments with a glass prism. He assumed that white light is composed of the colors of the rainbow (spectrum colors). Then, in 1790, Hermann von Helmholzt and James Clerk Maxwell based color on sunlight in relation to physical laws.

In 1810, Juhan Wolfgang von Goethe classified colors into two main color groups, namely yellow (related to brightness) and blue (related to darkness). Research on color continues. Until 1824, Michel Eugene Cvevreul sparked a color theory on textiles, the law of simultaneous contrast of color.

In 1831, Sir David Brewster formulated color theory, namely the grouping of colors in nature into 4, namely primary, secondary, tertiary and neutral. In the color circle Brewster was able to explain the theory of color contrast (complementary), complementary split, triad and tetrad.

In 1879, Ogden Rood developed the color circle theory based on the colors red, green, blue, and in the center is white. Color theories keep coming up. One of them was coined by Albert H. Munsel in 1898. His color theories were published in a color notation in 1965.

Albert H. Munsel also used the color scheme proposed by physicists in the form of a three-dimensional color circle ( hue, value, chroma ). In 1900, Herbet E. Ives proposed mixing colors, namely red from magenta mixed with cyan, blue from a mixture of magenta and turquoise. The result is a color circle with the primary colors magenta, cyan, and yellow.

In 1934, Farber Biren made an experiment to create a chart based on the traditional colors (red, yellow, blue). Next, he creates a color circle whose center is off-center. Because, for him hot colors are more dominant than cool colors.

The Function of Color in Life

Color is one that can stimulate the brain in alternative psychotherapy. China and Egypt have applied color to the healing process, which is known as color therapy. The colors are chosen to help the body function better.

For example, green can calm the nerves. People who often feel tense can do therapy with green. The green color of the leaves, which contains chlorophyll, has cleansing properties for the body, stimulates the hormone glands to control other glands, and smoothes blood that tends to freeze.

However, in some cases, color does not have effectiveness in someone who is doing therapy. This is caused by different emotions on the color that is owned by a person. So, the universal meaning of color may not work in this case.

Color is utilized based on years of observation and experience of how color affects the brain. Here are the benefits of color in the world of psychology.

1. Red stands for strength, power, lust, love, danger, aggression, warmth and passion.
2. Yellow stands for optimism, philosophy, hope, dishonesty/cheating, betrayal, and cowardice.
3. Blue stands for trust, conservative, technology, order, cleanliness and security.

Color Scheme

Color schemes are grouped into several categories as follows.

1. Monochrome

In general, monochromatic schemes use variations of the same hue. This wipe is very simple and capable of producing a very elegant look. Monochrome color is a degradation of the tone of a basic color that does not mix with other basic colors.

Therefore, monochrome colors are not only black and white. The other colors also consist of one monochrome color tone .

2. Analogs

Analog is a mixture of primary and secondary colors. This color scheme is very calming and comfortable to work with. Usually use colors that are next to each other on the color wheel. This color scheme, found in nature. Their characteristics are harmonious and pleasing to the eye.

The colors included in the analog group, namely green, yellowish green, and yellow; purplish red, purple, and indigo; and orange, reddish orange, and orange.

In the business world, analog schemes are not only pleasing to the eye, but also able to attract consumers to buy products or use services.

3. Complementary

Complementary colors are colors that are opposite each other on the color wheel. This complementary color scheme has very strong color contrasts. These colors are suitable for background and text colors. For example purple and yellow, blue and orange, red and green, and so on.

4. Triadic

The triadic color scheme uses three colors from the three color spaces of the colors used. these three colors are spread evenly across the color wheel. The colors used tend to be less vibrant, but this scheme maintains high contrast.

This scheme is popular among artists and designers because it provides colors with a strong visual contrast. However, it remains harmonious when combined.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

• Color theory
• The origin of the yellow color in eggs
• Collage is
• Impressionism flow
• Painting flow

Various types of power plants – Electricity is a form of energy that we often use or even without electricity it would be difficult for us to carry out various activities. The electricity we use comes from existing power plants, especially in Indonesia.

Then, what is a power plant and what are the different types of power plants? Below, we will explain more about power plants and their various types.

Definition of Power Plant

A power plant is a tool that can produce or generate electrical energy. Electrical energy is generated by converting a certain energy into electrical energy. In general, energy generating power plants have a large scale so that they are able to supply electricity to various regions.

The generator is the main part of the power plant. Which generator is a rotating machine whose role is to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy using the principle of a magnetic field and electrical conductivity. This machine is activated from various energy sources.

We all know that electricity is an important aspect of supporting all activities of human life. So that without electricity life will feel lonely, empty or even feel very empty. So that life doesn’t feel lonely and activities can run normally as they should, there are various kinds of power generators that can be used.

Kinds of power plants need to know well. This is because the energy that is used daily comes from electricity generated from various methods to utilize various sources that are abundant around us.

One of them is derived from power plants which have many kinds. This energy source is divided into two, namely renewable energy (wind power, solar power) and non-renewable energy (fossil fuels). Power plants can be activated by using these various energy sources.

PT Perusahaan Listrik Negara (Persero) or PLN reports that the number of power generating units is 6,143 units by the end of 2021. Of this number, 5,258 units are of the Diesel Power Plant (PLTD) type. The portion reaches 85.59% of the total power generation units used.

There are also 193 units (3.14%) which are mobile Gas Engine Power Plants (PLTMG). Then, as many as 162 units (2.64%) were in the form of Hydroelectric Power Plants (PLTA).

There are also 150 units (2.44%) which are Wind / Wind Power Plants (PLTB), as many as 126 units (2.05%) are Steam Power Plants (PLTU). Meanwhile, as many as 254 units (2.4%) of power plants use other energy.

For information, the installed capacity of PLN’s power plants reaches 44.46 gigawatt hours (GWH) in 2021. Meanwhile, the power capable of generating is 38.31 GWH. PT Perusahaan Listrik Negara (Persero) or PLN reports that the number of power generating units is 6,143 units by the end of 2021.

Of these, 5,258 units are Diesel Power Plants (PLTD) types. The portion reaches 85.59% of the total power generation units used. There are also 193 units (3.14%) which are mobile Gas Engine Power Plants (PLTMG). Then, as many as 162 units (2.64%) were in the form of Hydroelectric Power Plants (PLTA).

There are also 150 units (2.44%) which are Wind / Wind Power Plants (PLTB), as many as 126 units (2.05%) are Steam Power Plants (PLTU). Meanwhile, as many as 254 units (2.4%) of power plants use other energy. For information, the installed capacity of PLN’s power plants reaches 44.46 gigawatt hours (GWH) in 2021. Meanwhile, the power capable of generating is 38.31 GWH.

Several types of power plants that already exist have various energy sources ranging from fossil energy such as petroleum, natural gas to alternative renewable energy. According to Wikipedia, a power plant is an industrial equipment that functions to produce or generate electrical energy with various power sources.

Types of PLN Power Plants

In Indonesia, there are many types of power plants used. The one that regulates electricity generation in Indonesia is the State Electricity Company or better known by the wider community with the abbreviation PLN. PLN also has several types of power plants. The following are the types of PLN power plants, namely:

1. There are 5,258 Diesel Power Plants (PLTD).
2. There are 193 units of Gas Engine Power Plants (PLTMG).
3. There are 162 hydroelectric power plants (PLTA).
4. There are 150 wind power plants (PLTB).
5. There are 126 units of Steam Power Plants (PLTU).
6. There are 79 units of Gas and Steam Power Plants (PLTGU).
7. There are 72 Micro Hydro Power Plants (PLTMH).
8. There are 66 units of Gas Power Plants (PLTG).
9. There are 18 units of Geothermal Power Plants (PLTP).
10. The construction of 12 mini-hydro power plants (PLTM).
11. PLTS Solar Power Plant) there are 5 units
12. There are 2 units of Biomass Power Plants (PLTBm).

Working Principles of Power Plants

A power plant or commonly called a power plant is a system consisting of turbines and generators that work to produce electrical energy. If a turbine is an industrial equipment that converts a form of energy into kinetic/movement energy, then a generator is an industrial equipment that converts kinetic/motion energy into electrical energy.

The turbine will convert whether it is petroleum, natural gas or steam into energy of motion. Then, the turbine will be connected to the generator, so that the generator can move according to the desired speed.

Then, the rotating generator will produce electrical energy. The type of power plant is classified based on the prime mover that drives the generator. For example, a power plant whose turbine is a gas turbine is called a gas power plant. If a steam turbine is called a steam power plant.

Based on this classification, we can group various types of power plants into several classifications, including:

1. Gas Power Plant (PLTG)
2. Steam Power Plant (PLTU)
3. Oil Power Plant (PLTM)
4. Solar Cell Power Plant
5. Hydro/Hydro Power Plant (PLTA)
6. Wind Power Generation
7. Nuclear Power Plant (PLTN)
8. Geothermal / Geothermal Power Plants

Types of Power Plants that Can Produce Energy

1. Hydro Power Plant

The first type of power plant is the Hydroelectric Power Plant (PLTA). Water energy or known as hydropower is a type of energy source that is produced from the power of water. Then, to produce this energy is usually done by making a dam to hold water. The water in the dam is then combined with a water pipe that is directed to the turbine.

The more water flowing in the turbine, the greater the energy produced. So, this type of energy is very dependent on the existing water supply. In general, this type of power plant is installed right next to a sizable water source such as a dam, reservoir, or river with a fairly heavy flow of water.

As the name implies, this one power plant relies on the speed of water currents to drive nearby turbines. The installed turbine functions as a trigger for the required water flow. This type of power plant converts the kinetic energy in water into pure, economical and environmentally friendly electrical energy. In addition, this hydroelectric power plant is renewable energy.

2. Wind Power Generation

The next type of power plant is hydroelectric power. Of course this one generator utilizes a large amount of energy from the wind. Electricity can be generated by generators by storing and converting potential wind energy.

Usually, this wind power plant also uses turbines or windmills to collect wind energy into the electricity generator provided. Power plants are installed in areas that have considerable potential for wind strength, such as beaches to sloping hills. Several countries in the world that are well known for their wind power plants are Austria, Switzerland, to the United States.

3. Steam Power Plant

The third type of power plant is a steam power plant (PLTU). This type of generator uses steam energy from the performance of a water pump which will combine with coal and oil. The results of the heating which aims to get high temperatures are then burned and sprayed into steam energy.

The steam energy will then drive the turbines to assemble and have the potential to become electrical energy stored in the generator. However, actually this type of power plant cannot be called a producer of environmentally friendly electrical energy. Because, the vapor produced is quite dangerous if inhaled by humans.

4. Solar Power Plant

This type of power plant can be classified as environmentally friendly, economical and effective energy. The reason is, sunlight as a source will continue to exist throughout time. Not only that, the advantages of solar power plants (PLTS) also tend to have a strong source of energy to generate electricity.

The plant uses fixtures such as solar panels to capture abundant sunlight throughout the day. In general, this power plant has been widely used by the community as a support for energy which is quite ideal and cheap.

5. Geothermal Power Plant

This type of power plant utilizes geothermal energy which is also quite abundant. The captured geothermal energy will then produce steam which can drive a generator.

This movable generator then converts the energy produced by geothermal energy into electrical energy that can be used for everyday life. Usually, geothermal power plants are located in highland areas such as mountains or at the foot of mountains. This is done in order to get high-quality natural energy.

6. Gas Power Plant

This next type of power plant utilizes fossil fuels as an energy source. Some of the fossil fuels used include oil, coal, and natural gas.

The fossil fuel is then burned together with gas in a gas-fired power plant (PLTG). The results of the combustion are then filtered through a special air filter so that they can enter and drive a turbine or generator. The energy source in the form of gas is claimed to have pressure that is strong enough to drive a turbine which is then converted into large electrical energy as well.

7. Diesel Power Plant

This type of power plant is not widely known because it is rarely used to produce electrical energy. This is because the diesel power plant (PLTD) costs quite a high operational cost and is not environmentally friendly.

This diesel power plant requires diesel fuel to drive the turbine. In fact, diesel fuel is a non-renewable fuel and requires quite a high cost.

After being able to move using diesel fuel, the diesel engine will produce pure mechanical energy to drive the turbine generator to produce electric power.

8. Nuclear Power Plant

Nuclear power plant or PLTN is a power plant that utilizes the fission reaction of the uranium nucleus in a nuclear reactor to produce heat. Where the heat will produce steam which is flowed into the turbine to drive the generator so as to produce electrical energy.

PLTN is one of the environmentally friendly power plants. This is because this power plant does not use fossil fuels such as coal, oil and gas. We all know that the impact of fossils can cause acid rain, global warming and endanger human health.

Even though it is environmentally friendly, the use of nuclear power plants must still receive attention because the radiation generated can damage the human body and can cause disability or even death.

9. Wave Power Plant

Tubular power plant or PLTO is a power plant that utilizes sea waves. The movement of the ocean waves rolling up and down is a source of energy that is quite large.

Waves have a high power density and are an alternative energy that makes it possible to become a renewable energy source. PLTO is an environmentally friendly power plant because in the process of generating electricity it does not produce emissions

10. Garbage Power Energy

Who would have thought that waste, which is often a problem for an area and even a country, could become electrical energy. Apart from using the 3R system ( Reuse , Reduce , Recycle ) to protect the environment, waste can also be used as compost and energy for electricity generation, or better known as PLTSa.

Garbage-powered electrical energy or PLTSa is electrical energy that comes from waste. Which waste is separated first which can be recycled or not. Then the waste that cannot be recycled or reused is put into the incinerator to be burned at temperatures above 1300°C.

This type of power plant is certainly very good to be applied to reduce the amount of waste that exists. Many countries have also used PLTSa, such as America, Japan, the Netherlands and Europe. Where these countries have used waste as a source of energy ( waste to energy ) for a long time (decades) and have proven effective in solving waste problems.

The community does not need to worry about PLTSa pollution because the various pollution that will be produced can already be anticipated by countries that have used PLTSa first. We certainly hope that Indonesia will build more PLTSa.

11. Tidal Generating Electrical Energy

Electrical energy for tidal power generation or called PLTPS (tidal energy) is one of the renewable energies. The working principle of this power is the same as that of a hydroelectric power plant. In this power plant, water will be used to drive turbines with generators so that they can produce electricity

12. Gas Steam Power Plant

Steam gas power plant or PLTGU is a combination of PLTG and PLTU. The high-temperature exhaust gas from the PLTG will be reused as a steam heater in the boiler/boiler to produce high-pressure steam which will drive the turbine in the generator so that it can produce electricity.

Power plants do have many kinds. Even so, usually each type of power plant will be adapted to the conditions of a region or a country. Thus the discussion about the various types of power plants, I hope all the discussion above can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Sinaumed’s can get more information about various types of power plants by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge .

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Also read:

Definition of Figure of Speech and Examples – During the pandemic, apart from enjoying time at home by watching movies or Korean dramas, it is not uncommon for many people to choose to read novels. Then, have you ever heard of the term figurative language?

For literary activists or people who often read novels by great Indonesian writers, they may be familiar with the term ‘figure of speech’. Because figure of speech has a close relationship with language style. However, of course there are still many who are unfamiliar and wonder “what is figurative language?”

Some of you may have often heard everyday sentences expressed using figure of speech, but you just don’t realize it.

“He brought his children and wife lots of gifts.”

Well, you must have often heard the term “handicap”, right? Hand fruit has become a common expression used in everyday conversation. It turns out that “handicap” is an example of figurative language, you know!

To understand and learn more about figure of speech, you can listen to the following article.

Because it will be explained comprehensively starting from what is a figure of speech, types of figure of speech, various types of figure of speech, to examples of its use in everyday conversation. Keep reading the following article to get new insights, ok! Happy reading!

What is Majas?

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), figure of speech is a way of describing something by equating it with something else; or in figurative form. So if summed up simply, figure of speech is figurative language that is used to compare or explain something so that sentences become more lively and sound convincing.

For a writer, especially a writer of literary works, mastering various kinds of figures of speech can make the resulting work more resonant with the reader. And also shows the level of intellect and language style of the author.

Figure of speech can make a sentence sound more beautiful and dramatic. However, it still does not eliminate the original meaning of the sentence that uses the figure of speech.

Majestic Functions

According to experts, the main function of figure of speech is to make expressions in a sentence more elegant, beautiful, lively, and have a deeper impression. In the following, a more complete description of the function of a figure of speech will be mentioned. Please pay attention!

1. Make Sentences Easier to Remember

By using figure of speech, sentences that are spoken or written in a literary work will feel more relevant and pervasive. For example, when someone says “he is a confidant of Mr. Philips” and says “he is an accomplice of Mr. Philips”, the sentence that is easier to hit and sink in is one using the figure of speech ‘accomplice’.

2. Able to Give Birth to Imagination

The next function of the figure of speech is to be able to create an imagination. The figure of speech used often creates different understandings and perceptions for each person.

These different meanings depend on each person’s point of view, way of thinking, experience, and insight.

When we find the use of figure of speech that may sound foreign and the meaning of which is unknown, then we will imagine and imagine the meaning of the figure of speech.

3. Make Sentences More Meaningful and Impressive

Figure of speech is able to make a sentence have an essential meaning. While something essential will produce a deeper impression. When reading a book or novel that has many figures of speech, it will be less boring and more enjoyable, right?

4. Increasing the Appeal of a Literary Work

Writers who understand various types of figure of speech tend to be more creative and imaginative. In addition, the use of figure of speech in literary works is able to attract attention and give life to the literary work.

A novel or a book that is written is not a film that is visually depicted through real scenes of the cast that are recorded.

Novels or other literary works are only written in written form. Therefore, to make it easier for readers to understand and imagine stories in novels, writers often use figures of speech.

5. Get closer between writers and readers

Figure of speech is able to show the author’s character, soul, and personality clearly. Through a figure of speech that flows beautifully in sentences in literary works, the reader will know and understand the author better, judging from the type of figure of speech that is often used.

The types of figures of speech are very diverse. So that the choice of figure of speech can describe the character and habits of the writer.

Types of Figure of Speech

1. Figure of Comparison

Comparative figure of speech is the most popular and frequently used type of figure of speech. This figure of speech serves to juxtapose or compare two objects. Included in comparative figure of speech are metaphor, personification, association, hyperbole, allegory, metonymy, pars pro toto, totem pro parte, and euphemism. That’s a lot, right?

2. Figure of Contrast

Unlike the figure of speech for comparison, the figure of speech for opposition describes two objects that are opposite and contradictory. Contradictory figure of speech is a type of figure of speech that is often used even in general everyday conversations.

Included in the figure of speech of contradiction are litotes, paradox, oxymoron, interminus contradiction, anachronism, and antithesis.

3. Majas Affirmation

Emphasis is figurative language used to clarify and emphasize an object in a sentence. The style of language used in affirmation can influence the opinion and approval of the reader or listener.

Examples of various types of figurative language are rhetoric, pararhyme, apophasis, tautology, inversion, enumeration, ellipsis, correction, allonym, collocation, parallelism, and alliteration.

The affirmation figure of speech has two sub-majas, namely Pleonasm and Repetition.

a. Redundancy

The hallmark of pleonasm is the use of figurative language in the form of words that are repeated so that it seems very ineffective to read. However, the use of pleonasm is to emphasize an object through a figurative word that is written or spoken repeatedly.

Examples of Majas Pleonasm

“He’s already inside.”

(The sentence above when read seems ineffective because of course if there is the term “in” it means into without having to add the word “into” to the sentence).

b. Repetition

The repetition figure of speech repeats the meaning of a word using different figurative words continuously. The goal is the same, a figurative word used to emphasize.

Examples of Repetition Majas

“He will continue to work hard, he works and works, until the night he sweats to support his family.”

(In the example sentence above, the writer wants to emphasize that the subject of the sentence is actively working. So the term work is used repeatedly in various figures of speech, namely “toil hard” and “sweat”).

4. Figure of Satire

Satire is a figurative word used to satirize an object in a subtle and implicit way. Examples of satire are irony, cynicism, satire, inuendo, and sarcasm.

Kinds of Majas

In the previous discussion, the types of figurative language have been explained. Furthermore, in this section, we will explain in detail about the various types of figures of speech according to their type.

1. Figure of Metaphor

Metaphor is a figure of speech that compares two different objects but these objects are similar. The similes used in metaphorical figures of speech are in the form of an analogy in the form of an expression message. The following will give examples of the use of metaphorical figures of speech. Words that include metaphorical figures of speech will be in bold.

Examples of Majestic Metaphors

• The state needs to fix its government system when it starts being controlled by rats with ties .
• Ridwan is a descendant of blue blood .
• The sound of laughter from the children filled Buya’s living room.
• When you fail, don’t be discouraged .

2. Figure of Personification

The hallmark of personification is the use of inanimate objects to express comparative analogies. Inanimate objects used in personification figure of speech act like living things (humans). The following will give examples of the use of personification figures of speech. Words included in personification will be bolded.

Examples of Personification Majas

• The wind whispered melodiously as if it wanted to invite me to tell a story.
• The loud chirping of seagulls broke the morning silence.
• Ambulance sirens wailed breaking the silence that night.

3. Majas Association

Association figure of speech is a figurative language that compares two different objects, but is considered the same by giving figures of speech in the form of conjunctions “as”, “like”, “should”, and “bak”. The following will give an example of the use of the association figure of speech. Words included in the association figure of speech will be in bold.

Example of Association Majas

• Rina and Rani are twins, but have very different characteristics, like heaven and earth .
• Mother and child are very similar , like a betel nut in half .
• Even though they are siblings, Rima and Ranti often fight and can’t mix like oil and water .

4. Figure of Hyperbole

Hyperbole Example

• Andri ran as fast as lightning for fear of arriving late to school.
• As a result of years of illness, Damar’s body was left with only bones and skin .
• I have sky high ideals .
• Father toils every day so he can send his children to school.

5. Figure of speech allegory

Allegory is a figure of speech that compares two objects using figurative words. In a literary work, this figure of speech is usually written in the form of a sentence or even in the form of a full paragraph. The following will give an example of the use of allegory. Words that are included in allegory will be bolded.

Examples of Allegory

• Life is like a wheel that is always turning .
• A child born into the world is like a white paper . The old man in charge of writing and painting something on it.
• Technological progress is like two sides of a coin that has positive and negative sides.

6. Majas Metonymia

Metaphors of metonymy usually use a trademark to describe something in a sentence. For example, replacing the use of the word ‘car’ with ‘deer’, replacing the use of the word ‘mineral water’ with ‘aqua’, and others. The following will give an example of the use of metonymy. Words included in metonymy will be bolded.

Examples of Majestic Metaphors of Metonymy

• Pilgrims depart for the holy land of Mecca using Garuda .
• Uncle was accompanied by his father using a deer to go to the hospital.
• Aunt Risa won a raffle prize from Kapal Api .

7. Majas Pars Pro Toto

Majas Pars Pro Toto uses some of the elements of an object to show and describe all parts of the object. The following will give an example of the use of the pars pro toto figure of speech. Words which include the pars pro toto figure of speech will be in bold.

Example of Majas Pars Pro Toto

• They should get out of this house immediately.
• Dimas never showed his nose even though I had been waiting for him for hours.
• Riswanda has long had a crush on Aisyah.

8. Majas Totem Pro Parte

The figure of speech totem pro parte is the opposite of the figure of speech pars pro toto. Where this figure of speech uses all parts of an object to refer to a particular object or situation. Actually, the figure of speech totem pro parte and the figure of speech pars pro toto are sub-masonages of Sinekdok . The following will give an example of the use of the totem pro parte figure of speech. Words included in the totem pro parte figure of speech will be in bold.

Example of Totem Pro Parte

• Indonesia managed to draw against Vietnam in the semifinal match of the 2016 AFF Cup.
• Djarum Indonesia awards educational scholarships to outstanding people in the country.
• Women do not like men with temperamental traits.

9. Figure of Euphemism

Figures of euphemism are used to replace harsh or unethical terms to make them sound more refined and polite. In the following, an example of the use of euphemism will be given. Words which are euphemisms will be printed in bold.

Examples of Figure of Words of Euphemism

• Bi Jamilah has been a household assistant for the Abdullah family for eight years . ( household assistant = maid )
• The underprivileged people this year received staple food assistance and cash from the government. ( underprivileged = poor )
• Many TNI have died in order to protect the borders of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. ( fall = die )

10. Majas Litotes

Litotes figure of speech is a figure of speech for conflict which is used as a figure of speech to humble oneself. In other words, litotes figure of speech is the opposite of hyperbole because it uses figurative language in the form of reducing the quality of the object in question.

Examples of Majas Litotes

• Please stop by the shack where I live is small and shabby.
• My face is so ugly compared to other people out there.
• This padang restaurant is just my small business .

11. Figure of Paradox

Paradox figures of speech use figurative language to compare a fact with something that is quite the opposite. In the following, an example of the use of paradox will be given. Words that include paradox will be bolded.

Examples of Paradox Figures

• I always feel lonely even though I’m in the crowd of the capital.
• The father is blind but he can see the incomparable grace of Allah SWT .

12. Figure of Rhetoric

The characteristic of rhetorical figures of speech is in the form of interrogative sentences. Although this figure of speech is in the form of a question sentence, it does not require an answer because it is used as an affirmation.

Examples of Rhetorical Figures

• Who doesn’t feel sad when the team they are supporting loses?
• How can someone who has died come back to life?
• Who doesn’t want to live in abundance?

13. Majas Alliteration

Alliteration is a type of figure of speech that uses repetition of consonant letters at the beginning of each word to emphasize the sentence.

Examples of Majestic Alliteration

• Rawe rawe rantas.
• Cross the sea, cross the valley.
• Finish your sadness, prepare your smile.

14. Figure of Irony

Irony figure of speech includes satirical figure of speech that uses satirical language style to hide facts by using words that are contradictory.

Example of Irony

• This food is so good, that I don’t want to taste it anymore.
• Today you were extremely punctual, showing up to the meeting only to hear the closing.
• It’s so cold in here, I’m sweating like a corn ear. 

15. Figure of Sarcasm

Almost the same as the irony figure of speech, it’s just that the sarcasm style of language has a style of sarcasm that is more harsh.

Examples of Majestic Sarcasm

• You’re so stupid, basic knowledge like this you just don’t understand.
• You sing in a discordant voice, my ears hurt so much.

Well, enough discussion about the various figures of speech here. You already know in detail starting from the meaning of figure of speech, function, types, types, to examples of using figure of speech in everyday life. Don’t forget to read and keep up with the latest articles published by sinaumedia because there will be interesting and up to date topics to be discussed. See you!

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Kinds of Harakat – When reading the Koran, Muslims have an obligation to understand the punctuation marks, the goal is to avoid mistakes in meaning when reading the verses of the Koran.

The punctuation marks in the Koran are known as vowels which are used to clarify the pronunciation of hijaiyah letters.

Basically, all kinds of vowels are symbols or punctuation that are written above or below hijaiyah letters. Harakat has several types, including kasrah, tanwin fatah, fathah, dhammah and others.

What are the other kinds of vows? Check out the explanation further in this article!

Harakat or also known as tasykil is a punctuation mark or diacritic placed on Arabic letters or hijaiyah letters which functions as an explanation of the movements and pronunciation of these Arabic letters.

Arabic letters in the Arabic alphabet generally only represent consonants without vowels. So that the vowel is also used as an explanatory pronunciation.

The vowel used is fathah in Arabic, symbolizing the vowel a followed by a marked consonant, kasrah, dhammah, breadfruit, tanwin and modifications to indicate vowels that should be read long.

Harakat is used to make it easier to read Arabic letters for lay people, beginners and students and is usually written in educational books, children’s books to the holy book of the Koran, although in daily writing, Arabic tends not to use vowels.

Because in general, Arabs already understand and understand the writing they read, but sometimes vowels are still used as a form of emphasis on a word, especially words that are less commonly used in everyday life to avoid reading errors.

Kinds of Harakat and How to Pronounce Them

There are nine kinds of vowels that must be learned and understood, especially if Sinaumed’s is a beginner in reading the Koran or is learning Arabic.

The nine vowels include the following, fathah, dhammah, kasrah, fathatain (tanwin fatah), dhammatain (tanwin dhammah), kasratain (tanwin kasrah), tribe, tasydid or syaddah and other long reading marks.

To make it clearer, here is an explanation of the various vowels and how to pronounce each vowel.

1. Fathah ( ﹷ )

Fathah is a vowel that has a shape like a small slash and is placed above an Arabic letter. Harakat fathah makes a vowel sound a.

Every hijaiyah letter that gets a fathah vowel will sound. Therefore, every Arabic letter that gets the vowel fathah will sound a.

Examples as follows.

جَ ثَ تَ بَ

The four letters are pronounced ja, tsa, ta, and ba.

2. Dhamma ( ُ- )

Dhammah is a vowel that has a shape like a small wawu letter and is placed above an Arabic letter. dhammah has the vowel sound u.

Examples as follows.

رُ زُ دُ خُ حُ

The five Arabic letters above are pronounced ru, zu, du, khu and hu.

3. Kasrah ( ِ- )

Kasrah is a vowel that has a shape like a small slash and is placed under the hijaiyah letters. Harakat kasrah will produce the sound of the letter i.

Examples as follows.

طِ ضِ صِ شِ سِ

The five Arabic letters above are pronounced thi, dhi, shi, shi and si.

4. Fathatain or Tanwin Fathah ( ً- )

Fathatain or also known as tanwin fathah is a vowel that has a shape like two small oblique lines and is placed above an Arabic letter. every Arabic letter or hijaiyah letter that has the vowel tanwin fathah or fathatain will sound an.

Examples as follows.

قً فً غً عً ظً

The five hijaiyah letters are pronounced qan, fan, gan, ‘an and zan.

5. Dhammatain or Tanwin Dhammah ( ٌ- )

Dhammatain or also known as tanwin dhammah is a vowel composed of the vowel dhammah and nun mati and is written on an Arabic letter. Every Arabic letter that has the vowel dhammatain or tanwin dhammah will sound or can be read un.

Examples as follows.

وٌ نٌ مٌ لٌ كٌ

The five hijaiyah letters are pronounced wun, nun, mun, lun and kun.

6. Kasratain or Tanwin Kasrah ( ٍٍ- )

Kasratain vowel or also known as tanwin kasrah vowel is a vowel that has a shape like two small oblique lines and is under an Arabic letter. Every Arabic letter that has the vowel kasratain or tanwin kasrah, the letter can read or read in.

Examples as follows.

طٍ اٍ ءٍ يٍ ذٍ

The five hijaiyah letters are read tin, in, in, yin, and dzin.

7. Breadfruit ( ْ- )

The next vowel is breadfruit, which is a vowel that has a shape like the letter ha in hijaiyah but smaller. The vowel for breadfruit must be placed above the Arabic letters. The vowel of the breadfruit represents a consonant or consonant phoneme of a hijaiyah letter.

Examples as follows.

سْ لْ كْ قْ فْ

The five hijaiyah letters are read s, l, k, q, and f.

8. Tasydid or Syaddah ( ّ- )

Tasydid or also called syaddah is a vowel that has a shape like the head of the letter sin which must be placed above the hijaiyah letter. This syaddah or tasydid vowel symbolizes an emphasis on a consonant letter written with a double consonant symbol.

Examples as follows.

مَدَّ مَرَّ اَ وَّ اَ نَّ اَ مَّ

The five hijaiyah letters are read madda, marra, awwa, anna, and amma.

9. Long punctuation

In addition to the eight punctuation marks above, there are also vowels or punctuation marks which symbolize that the hijaiyah letters must be read long. These long punctuation marks are symbolized by using the letters alif (ا), wawu breadfruit (وْ), and yes breadfruit (يْ).

Examples as follows.

بَتيْ بَجُوْ بُكُوْ بَتَا سَبَا

The five hijaiyah letters are read batii, bajuu, Bukuu, bataa, and sabaa.

Long punctuation marks that have a shape like the letter alif, can also be called alif khanjariah and can also be called mad fathah.

The alif khanjariah symbolizes the vowel a which is read rather long. A hijaiyah letter that has the vowel fathah followed by mad fathah will symbolize the phoneme a which is read long.

For example as follows, (لاَ) which can be read laa.

Other Kinds of Harakat

In addition to the nine vowels that can be said as the main points above, there are also several types of vowels that you will often encounter, but may not be familiar to beginners. Here’s an explanation.

1. Wassal

Wassal or washlat is a vowel that shows diacritics written on hijaiyah letters and is usually written above the alif letter, so this vowel is also commonly referred to as alif wassal. According to the science of tajwid, wasal has the meaning of continuing without waqafing or stopping reading.

The vowel wasal is always at the beginning or beginning of a word and does not need to be pronounced or read when encountering this vowel in the middle of a sentence, however, the vowel wasal will sound like the letter hamza if this vowel is read at the beginning of the sentence.

To make it clearer, here is an example of the vowel alif wassal at the beginning and middle of a sentence.

ٱهدنا ٱلصرط

“ ih dina s shi raat”

In the reading above, it can be seen that the vowel that is thickened is alif wassal. So that in the reading above there are two alif wasal, the first can be found in the pronunciation of ihdinaa while the second vowel alif wasal can be found in the pronunciation of as shiraat.

If the two pronunciations are wasalkan or strung together when reading them, then ihdinas shiraat must be read by eliminating the reading of the alif wassal in the pronunciation of as shiraat, because the alif wasal is in the middle of the sentence and still read it in the pronunciation of ihdinas because it is at the beginning of the sentence.

Here’s another example of using alif wasal in a sentence.

نستعين ٱهدنا ٱلصرط

“nasta’ii nuh dina s shi raat”

The reading above consists of saying nasta’iin, ihdina and as shiraat. With the alif wasal in the pronunciation of ihdina in the previous pronunciation, it produces the pronunciation of nasta’iinuh dinaa, then by wasalizing the pronunciation of as shiraat with the previous pronunciation, it produces the pronunciation of nasta’iinuh jasa shiraat.

Alif wasal will be found more often by Sinaumed’s together, like the example above. In addition, alif wasal will be found together with the letter lam or also known as alif lam makrifah which in Arabic refers to a word that has an eel isim or name.

2. Waqf

Waqf according to language means holding or stopping, if according to the term tajwid, then waqaf can be interpreted as stopping reading for a moment or briefly by breaking the sound at the end of a word to breathe accompanied by the intention to continue reading again.

There are four waqf that need to be known, along with the explanation.

1. Taamm (ﺗﺂﻡّ), is a perfect waqaf, taam means to give or stop one reading that is read perfectly, does not break in the middle of a verse or reading and does not affect the meaning or meaning of the reading, because taamm has nothing to do with reading or verses before and after.
2. Kaaf (ﻛﺎﻒ), or adequate waqaf is to stop or end a reading perfectly, not breaking it in the middle of reading or verse, but the verse still has something to do with the meaning and meaning of the verse after it.
3. Hasan (ﺣﺴﻦ) or also known as waqf, is a waqf of readings and verses without affecting the meaning or meaning, but the readings are still related to the readings that follow.
4. Qalbih (ﻗﺒﻴﺢ) or bad waqf means stopping or waqfing readings imperfectly or stopping reading in the middle of a verse, waqf qalbih must be avoided, because the readings that are donated still have a connection with the pronunciation and meanings of other readings.

Waqf has several signs, here are the signs of waqf.

• Mim ( ^مـ ) or also known as common waqaf. If you encounter this sign, Sinaumed’s must stop at the end of the sentence perfectly. This common waqf or meme occurs after a perfect sentence, and has no connection with the sentence that follows it.

The mim sign on this waqf has a shape similar to the iqlab tahwid sign, but has a different function and purpose.

• Tha’ ( ^ﻁ ) is a sign of absolute waqaf which means it must stop.
• Jim ( ^ﺝ ) or the waqaf jaiz sign means it is better to stop immediately, although when you encounter the jaiz waqaf sign it is also permissible not to stop.
• Dzal ( ^ﻇ ) when meeting dzal waqaf, then you should not stop reading.
• Shad ( ^ﺹ ) or also known as waqaf murakhkhas, means that it is more to not stop. However, it is permissible to stop in an emergency without changing the meaning. There is a legal difference between waqaf dzal and waqaf shad, namely in terms of its function, waqaf shad is allowed to stop.
• Shad lam ya’ ( ^ﺻﻠﮯ ) this one waqf stands for al wasshlul hall which means wasal or continue reading better. Therefore, when you encounter this sign, it is better to continue reading even though it is permissible to donate it.
• Shad lam ( ^ﺼﻞ ) stands for qad yushal which means it is sometimes allowed to be wasted. Therefore, when you encounter this waqf sign, it is better to stop, although sometimes it is permissible to be wasted.
• Qif ( ^ﻗﻴﻒ ) means to stop or prioritize to stop. The qif will generally appear at the beginning of a sentence, and usually the reader will continue without stopping.
• Sin ( ^س ) or saktah sign ( ^ﺳﮑﺘﻪ ) means to stop for a moment without taking a breath. That is, the reader must stop with the length of one alif or two vowels without taking a new breath to continue the next reading.
• Waqfah ( ^ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ) means the same as waqf saktah ( ^ﺳﮑﺘﻪ ), meaning that you have to stop longer without taking a breath.
• La ( ^ﻻ ) when encountering this waqaf sign, it means don’t stop. The la sign usually appears at the end or in the middle of the verse. If it appears in the middle of a verse, then it is not permissible to stop reading and if it is at the end of the verse, then the reader may continue reading or may stop.
• Kaf ( ^ﻙ ) is an abbreviation of kadzalik which means similar. So in other words the meaning of this waqf kaf is like the waqaf that previously appeared. For example, if before Waqaf Kaf Sinaumed’s met waqaf la, then the meaning of this waqaf kaf is like waqaf la.
• The waqf sign with three dots ( . ^. . . ^. . ) is the next waqf sign which is a triple dot which is referred to as waqaf muraqabah or waqaf ta’anuq which means bound. This waqf will appear twice anywhere and means that it must stop at one of the three dots.

If you have stopped at the first waqf mark, then the reader does not need to stop at the second three dots and vice versa.

Those are the types of vowels as well as several other vowels apart from the nine main vowels. These types of vowels function so that readers can read more clearly the verses of the Koran and Arabic sentences without changing their meaning.

If Sinaumed’s is still confused about vowels or other punctuation when reading the Koran or Arabic, Sinaumed’s can dig deeper and learn more by reading books related to vowels, how to read the Koran and books related to Arabic.

Soccer Game Strategy – Soccer is a sport that prioritizes intelligence. In a match, each team has its own tactics, strategies and formations that will be applied. And that requires smart thinking on the coach’s part.

Usually the coach will give instructions to his players before the start of the game. This will show the player the tactics to use. Tactics are strategies or rationale that are designed and implemented in games by individuals, groups or teams to win matches in a sporting manner.

The use of tactics in football is an attempt to develop thinking skills and creativity. Tactics are also a form of improvisation to determine the best way to solve problems encountered in the game effectively, efficiently and productively. This aims to achieve maximum results, namely winning.

While the strategy is a strategy or sense that is designed before the game and is used by players and coaches to win games that are played in a fair and healthy manner. Each player’s strategy refers to the moves required in the game. The place of strategy in sports is intended to support the tactical aspects of sports.

So, there is a difference between tactics and strategy. But in reality, the two depend on and support each other to achieve the same goal, which is to win the game.

While the formation (system) is the arrangement, space and division of tasks for each player with the position he occupies. This applies to both attack and defense. With this system, each player knows his main mission, his own area or space, understands what he should do when attacking or defending and where to move.

Soccer Game Strategy

1. Strategy for guarding opposing players

The first strategy in the game of football is to defend opposing players by using a 1 on 1 system or man marking. Man marking or 1 on 1 means that each player is tasked with monitoring and tracking the movements of opposing players.

This strategy aims to block attacks carried out by the opposing side and players in one team to counterattack. The advantage of this strategy is that there is a clear division of tasks between one player and another, so that the team can play more cohesively.

Moreover, this strategy can train players’ concentration by reading and observing the opponent’s attack techniques. However, this strategy also has weaknesses, namely the opposing team’s superior control over the flow of a soccer match. Apart from that, this strategy also tends to weaken the defense, especially if the opposing team’s players are dominant and have strong marking skills.

2. Strategy to Maintain Your Own Area

The strategy of guarding one’s own area is a strategy in the game of football which is also known as zone marking or space covering. Zone marking or space covering means that each player has an obligation to protect opposing players who are in his area.

This strategy itself is very effective in reading the opponent’s attack strategy. In this way, the defense in your area will be more stable and the chances of conceding due to opponent attacks will also be less.

However, this strategy also has several weaknesses, one of which is that the area adjacent to the opponent becomes more open and easy to concede. Not only that, one team player will also be overwhelmed by the opponent’s attack and it will be difficult to counterattack.

3. Strategies to Press Opponents

The strategy of pressing the opponent or also known as force-checking is a strategy or tactic of trying to get or recover lost balls in the defense area. This force-testing or pressing strategy also requires good cooperation between players.

The advantage of this strategy is that the opponent does not have the ability to counterattack. However, this strategy is quite tiring when all players must exert all their attack power and the defense will also falter if the opponent tries to counterattack.

4. Strategy of Delaying Pressure on Opponents

The strategy of delaying the opponent’s pressure or fullback is a strategy or tactic that does not push the opponent into the mid lane. When the ball lands in the opposing team’s area, players remain in their own area until the opponent attacks.

The advantage of this fallback strategy is that the defensive formation is always well maintained. In addition, this strategy is also effective against counterattacks from the opposing team, making it suitable for use against strong opposing teams.

5. Opponent Attack Strategy

Attack strategy is a strategy carried out by individuals or groups to win matches in a sporting manner by carrying out attacks. The player in control, before passing the ball to his partner, will try to do some action with the ball, for example a touch of one or two wall passes.

This move is a very simple two player move. Player A passes the ball to Player B, then moves to a new position. Player B immediately passes the ball to A who is in his new position without holding the ball.

Phenomenal Tactics in Football Games

1. Total Football

Back in the 1970s, the term Total Football was too popular in the world of football. Thanks to these tactics, the Dutch national team won good results in several tournaments, both the European Cup and the World Cup. They even reached the World Cup final twice, in 1974 and 1978.

However, the origins of total football actually go back to 1930. Around that time, a British man named Jimmy Hogan realized that the game of soccer had to be played in a loose, fully integrated and active style. This is the basis of Total Football tactics.

In Total Football, each player is not assigned a specific role. They can replace each other, switch positions on the fly, combine short and long passes to exploit space in the opponent’s defense.

Not only in the Netherlands, the Total Football system was also used by other teams, such as the Austrian national team in the 1930s, Hungary in the 1950s with Ferenc Puskas and Sandor Kocsis, and the Santos team in the 1960s. Total Football is a very flexible gameplay.

2. Tiki-taka

Tiki-taka or possession football is a variant of the Dutch total football system in the 1970s, Pep Guardiola was the one who sparked this tactic at the start of his coaching career at Barcelona, ​​​​the 2008/09 season.

At that time, Guardiola wanted his team to hold the ball for a long time, pass the ball to create space. So, unlike Total Football, tiki-taka or possession of the ball is not as smooth as Total Football. Players are always assigned a specific role.

The hallmark of Guardiola’s ball possession game is the presence of triangle roaming , or triangles on the field. Each time the ball is controlled or lost, players will form a triangle for the purpose of isolating the opponent.

Also, with this triangle, players have the option of having more people when passing the ball and have the option of having more people when defending. It’s no wonder that Barcelona along with other teams led by Guardiola such as Bayern Munich or Manchester City were so dominant when they had the ball.

3. Genpressing

Referring to Gegenpressing, we cannot ignore the name Ralf Rangnick. Not Juergen Klopp, Rangnick actually discovered this Gegenpressing. In 1998, he even explained Gegenpressing on TV.

Rangnick himself applied this Gegenpressing while coaching VfB Stuttgart, Hannover 96, Schalke 04, TSG 1899 Hoffenheim and RB Leipzig. According to him, Gegenpressing is essentially an active tactic. Pressing as high as possible is the hallmark of Gegenpressing.

Not only is pressing high, but pressing is also done in areas where the opponent is at risk of making a mistake. One of them is the wings. When the ball is won from a higher area, the distance to the goal is shorter and the goal is easy to concede.

This is the goal of Gegenpressing. Many were inspired by Rangnick’s tactics, such as Klopp, Thomas Tuchel, Julian Nagelsmann, Domenico Tedesco and David Wagner. However, Rangnick is not alone. Other coaches such as Arrigo Sacchi, Marcelo Bielsa or Mauricio Pochettino also apply this tactic.

4. Catenaccio

When the WM training system became popular in the 1930s, Karl Rappan had other thoughts. Instead, he uses a different system from the Swiss national team, where each player must adhere to a patent defense system that does not rely on individual abilities. This system is called Verrou, which is the forerunner of Catenaccio.

When Inter Milan became the rulers of Italy and Europe in the mid-1960s, the figure of Helenio Herrera changed the Verrou system to become this Rappan. Departing from the anti-defeat Italian culture, he formed a new tactic called Catenaccio.

With this Catenaccio system, there is one player who acts as a sweeper. He will be a player who sweeps the ball while breaking the opponent’s attack in the defensive area. The Sweeper will also work with three defenders to guard against opposing attackers.

Catenaccio itself if translated into Indonesian is a chain. Assuming this chain will be a barrier to prevent opponents from scoring goals, with a defense system that combines zoning and man to man marking. This system also worked in Italy in the 1960s.

5. Kick and Rush

Before the 1966 World Cup, nobody knew about the England national team. However, apart from the title won by the British national team in 1966, the tactics used by England in this event also appeared, namely kick and rush.

Simply put, the kick and rush is basically just a long pass tactic. Thus, the defender or goalkeeper kicks a long ball, which is then used by tall or fast attackers to penetrate the opponent’s defense. Kick, then rush.

Football Formation

Player formations are often used by teams in modern games. The squad develops according to the development of the world of football.

Each formation is chosen because it matches the quality of the players and the coach’s strategy. Usually, a tactician has more than one basic formation for his team. This is to predict various situations that occur in the game. Variations in formations and strategies will result in victory.

1. 4-3-3 formation

This 4-3-3 formation is quite disturbing because it consists of 4 defenders, 3 midfielders and 3 attackers. With this formation, each player must apply pressure starting from the opponent’s defense area.

The combination of right and left defenders, midfielders and attackers both in attack and defense will confuse your opponent. Large numbers of goals are often produced by teams that play with this formation. Liverpool is a team that likes to use a 4-3-3 formation.

2. Formation 4-2-4

The 4-2-4 formation originated in England and was a popular formation at that time. This formation places four defenders, two midfielders side by side diagonally and four attackers.

In attack, a midfielder will advance with right and left defenders. Midfielder, this striker will defend his area while supporting the right and left defenders in attack.

In the event of a counter attack, they will get down to their positions and coordinate with the other players on their side of the pitch to prevent the opponent from becoming a dangerous threat.

Meanwhile, the 4 attacking players are tasked with breaking down the opponent’s defense. The two centre-forwards play a key role, while the other two cover the flanks like wings.

The 4-2-4 formation was used by Brazil when they won the 1958 World Cup. At that time, Brazil had many famous names, such as Pelé and Garrincha.

3. 4-4-2 formation

The 4-4-2 formation is commonly used by the Indonesian National Team (Timnas) and several top European clubs. This squad has 4 defenders, 4 midfielders and 2 attacking players.

This formation relies heavily on wing attackers on both sides of the field. The winger is supported by right and left defenders. Goals are often scored through diagonal passes and crosses that open up defenses.

4. Formation 4-5-1

The 4-5-1 formation is more defensive because only one player can attack inside the penalty box. Even so, this formation is also very good for counterattacks. Usually coaches adopt this formation when they have the upper hand and want to hold their position to win.

5. Formation 4-4-1-1

The 4-4-1-1 formation is a variation of the 4-4-2 formation. The difference is, the attacking players will be behind their teammates who are closer to the penalty box. This player becomes the second striker, supporting the main spearhead of his team.

6. Formation 4-3-2-1

The 4-3-2-1 formation uses four defenders, three midfielders, two wingers and one striker. This formation has many players in midfield so that one team can control the ball better.

However, teams with this formation often have to have attacking players with good physical and technical abilities. This is because attacking players must be able to reflect the ball so that wingers or midfielders can enter the penalty box to create opportunities.

7. Formation 4-3-1-2

The 4-3-1-2 formation is a variation of the 4-3-2-1 formation. The difference is, the 4-3-1-2 formation uses two attackers and has a playmaker behind him. The player’s job is to deliver a pass that damages both strikers. This formation also allows a team to have better ball control.

8. 5-3-2 Formation

The 5-3-2 formation supports a solid defense. The squad has three centre-backs, two full-backs, three midfielders and two strikers. In attack, one midfielder will drop to support the three centre-backs, while the full-backs and two other midfielders will step forward to support the two attackers. In defence, the full-backs and midfielders need to get back into their proper positions.

9. 5-4-1 formation

The 5-4-1 formation is also very defensive, just like the 5-3-2 formation. The squad has 3 centre-backs, 2 full-backs, 4 midfielders, including 2 wingers and 1 striker. The full back and two wingers will move forward to support the lone attacker. The job of a lone striker in this squad is quite important because you can’t waste every opportunity that comes your way. This formation is great for counter attacks.

10. Formation 3-6-1

The 3-6-1 formation is rarely used in matches. This formation puts 3 defenders at the back, 3 centre-backs on equal footing, 2 centre-backs in front of the 3 centre-backs and a central midfielder to support a lone striker. This formation is suitable if a team really wants to survive from the start.

11. Formation 3-5-2

The 3-5-2 formation uses 3 centre-backs, 5 midfielders and 2 attackers. Midfielders are defensive midfielders who focus on defense. The advantage of this formation lies in the strong attack power when placing many players in the middle, helping to better control the ball. However, there was also a lack of defense on the fragile left and right.

12. 3-4-3 formation

The 3-4-3 formation has three centre-backs, four midfielders, two on the right and left flanks who also act as full-backs and three strikers. The full-back is set forward to support the 3 strikers.

Meanwhile, the two midfielders in midfield are in charge of passing the ball to the strikers or full-backs when attacking. In defense, two full-backs and two central midfielders will act as a filter for the opponent’s attacks.

13. Formation 4-1-4-1

The 4-1-4-1 formation uses four defenders, one defensive midfielder, four attacking midfielders and one attacker. The 4-1-4-1 formation is a variation of the 4-5-1. The difference is, the 4-5-1 formation focuses on defense, while the 4-1-4-1 formation focuses on attack.

14. 4-2-2-2 formation

The 4-2-2-2 formation has 4 defenders, 2 defensive midfielders, 2 attacking midfielders and 2 attackers. This formation is a variation of the 4-2-4 formation. The defensive midfielders focus on defending the area while the right and left defenders appear to support the attack. At that time, attacking midfielders needed to play wide or in the middle to be able to support the two attackers on the front lines.

15. Formation 4-2-3-1

The 4-2-3-1 formation uses four defenders, two defensive midfielders, three attacking midfielders and one attacker. This formation is very solid because it is balanced in defending and surrendering. With this formation, a team can control the ball better when they have a large number of players in midfield. This squad has become popular since the 2010 World Cup until now. Several top European clubs still use this squad as the main benchmark because of their solidarity.

Closing

Thus a review of the various strategies, tactics and formations in the game of football. For Sinaumed’s who want to understand about other soccer game strategies, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read related articles:

Get to know the Football Sports Rules, What Are They?

The Purpose of Football Games and Their Benefits

Soccer Field Size and Grass Material

Inventor of the Game of Football: This is the history of its development

Offside is: Understanding, History & Basic Football Techniques

Basic Techniques of Basketball – Basketball is a ball sport in groups consisting of two teams of five people each competing to score points by throwing the ball into the opponent’s basket. Basketball can be played on an open court, although professional matches are generally played indoors.

The playing field required in this game is also relatively small compared to football. In addition, the game of basketball is also more competitive because the tempo of the game tends to be faster when compared to other ball sports, such as volleyball and soccer.

Basketball is one of the most popular sports for residents of the United States and other parts of the world, including in South America, Southern Europe, Lithuania, and also in Indonesia. Many basketball competitions are held every year, such as the British Basketball League (BBL) in England, the National Basketball Association (NBA) in America, and the Indonesian Basketball League (IBL) in Indonesia.

Definition of Basketball Game

Basketball is an example of a big ball sport. This game takes place by competing two basketball teams and fighting for the ball to be put in the opponent’s ring. The score you get really depends on how the ball enters. The score that Sinaumed’s will get if he succeeds in scoring ranges from one to three points.

Unlike volleyball, in basketball, players are given a time limit to face each other. So it’s not based on which team reaches a certain score first. But based on the duration of time. International basketball rules set ten minutes for four innings. However, specifically for the National Basketball Association (NBA), matches last for four rounds and each round is twelve minutes long.

History of the Game of Basketball

James Naismith was the first person to record his name in history as the originator of this basketball game. Initially, the idea arose because during the winter there were many sports games that the students could not do. His desire to make a game that can be played indoors, moved him to create a basketball game.

His profession as a physical education instructor at Springfield College, located in Massachusetts, United States of America, has made it easier for Naismith to continue to innovate in the sport he created.

In its early days (around 1891), basketball games were played using a soccer ball. So, don’t directly use basketball as it is today. At that time, Naismith designed a basketball game by throwing the ball into a peach basket. The basket hanging on the wall in the sports hall determines the score.

The number of players in each team consisted of nine people and at that time there was no dribble technique . Then, how do you dribble the ball? The trick is thrown to a teammate. Over time, this game began to develop, especially after basketball began to be favored by various groups and various ages.

This game is increasingly experiencing improvements to become like the game of basketball we know today. This game quickly spread to the public, until finally the first basketball game was held in 1895 which brought together two colleges, namely the Minnesota School of Agriculture and Hamline College.

The game of basketball does not allow players to relax, even though it is done indoors. Sharp eyesight, breath strength, running speed, shrewdness in tricking enemies, the ability to shoot on target, and dexterity of the hands are skills that must be possessed in order to become a good basketball player. It is not surprising that a basketball player will sweat while playing this game.

Basic Techniques for Playing Basketball

In order to master the game of basketball, there are a number of things you should know, such as how to play it, the rules, the size of the court, and the players that you can learn about in the Book of Masters in Basketball for Beginners .

In order to play basketball, Sinaumed’s needs to understand the basic techniques in this game. At the very least, you need to master the technique of holding the ball, passing, dribble, shooting, pivot, rebound and slam dunk . How to do it? We’ll discuss it together.

1. Basic Techniques of Holding the Ball

Holding the ball in basketball is the most basic thing because it is the mother of all the techniques in this game. Doing it cannot be arbitrary, because if you hold the ball well, it will be easier for you to control the ball. Of course, this greatly affects the quality of your game.

The way to hold the ball is to place your hands on either side of the ball. Your fingers must be stretched or opened wide so that the ball does not easily escape. This hand position is very important to do, whether to receive the ball or when going to make a pass to a friend.

2. Passing Techniques (Passing or Throwing Balls)

After mastering the technique of holding the ball, we need to master the technique of passing the ball to friends. Because, we can’t possibly carry the ball without making any passes at all in the game. This technique has several ways. We discuss in more detail below.

a. Chest Pass

b. Overhead Pass

The way to do this pass is with both hands holding the ball and positioned above your head and bending your elbows. By resting on the crook of the hand, the ball is thrown until the hand position becomes straight. The ball is released using a flick of the fingertips for maximum effect.

c. Behind The Back Pass

As the modern game of basketball develops, this technique becomes a technique that is deadly, dangerous, and of course raises admiration. Called deadly and dangerous because this pass makes the ball very difficult for the opponent to guess. The uncertainty that the opponent has in blocking this pass becomes unclear because the pass often tricks the opponent.

This operand is quite difficult for beginners because it requires special techniques to do it. Usually players who are already professionals who can do it well. One player who is good at making this pass is Kobe Bryant.

d. Baseball Pass (Baseball Pass)

The reason is, this pass is often carried out from the area of ​​one’s own defense to the opponent’s defense with accuracy and fast power. Not only that, this pass is sometimes used to trick opponents. As if shooting the ball, but only passing the ball.

e. Bounce Pass

3. Dribble Technique (Dribble Ball)

Dribble or dribbling in a basketball game is done with the aim of controlling the direction of the ball while bouncing the basketball to the floor repeatedly. If the foot takes a step, whether walking or running, the ball must be bounced on the floor.

Through the dribble technique, Sinaumed’s can determine the agility of a basketball player. Usually, players who play as point guards have qualified dribble skills , often even being the best players at dribbling the ball. It’s no wonder that point guards are often the playmakers on a team. Stephen Curry, John Stockton, and Earvin “Magic” Johnson are big names in the basketball world who play as point guards .

This technique can be done with one or two hands. Based on the height of the ball, dribble is divided into two types, namely high dribble and low dribble . High dribble is usually done when the player is in a free state. Meanwhile, low dribble is often used when players are under pressure from opponents.

However, based on the type of trick, dribble in basketball is divided even more, namely:

a. Crossover Move

The ball is dribbled in a crosswise manner. The ball that was originally in the left hand is reflected to the right, so that it can be received properly by the right hand and vice versa. This type of dribble can be done in the opponent’s area and can result in an ankle break , in which the opponent is tricked into guessing the direction of the ball in the opposite direction after the ball is crossed over .

b. Behind the Back Dribble

Actually, this type of dribble is the same as the crossover move dribble . It’s just that it’s done a little differently, namely with your back to the ball. Of course, this dribble is not easy to do in basketball.

c. Between the Legs Dribble

The ball is dribbled by moving the ball from the right hand to the left hand, but through between the legs. At first, Sinaumed’s may have difficulty practicing it, but he will be good at it if he practices diligently.

d. High or Speed ​​Dribble

When doing a quick counterattack or fast break , this dribble is perfect for use. Players must run as fast as possible without releasing the ball. This technique does drain a lot of energy. Therefore, players need to train excellent stamina in playing basketball.

e. Reserve Dribbles

Have you ever watched a basketball player dribble by controlling the ball horizontally around the body? Besides requiring high skill , this dribble requires high concentration.

4. Pivot Technique

Sinaumed’s, this technique is a circular movement of the body by using one of the legs as the axis, as well as the body’s support. Pivot is done with both hands holding the ball. Basketball players usually pivot after receiving a pass from a teammate because they want to protect the ball from the opponent’s ambush. Pivot is a technical innovation that conforms to the rules of basketball, namely the player holding the ball is required to dribble and will be assessed as a violation if he moves without dribbling .

5. Shooting Technique (Shooting the Ball)

The ability to score is very dependent on skill in shooting the ball into the opponent’s ring. The better the shooting ability, the more likely it is to earn high points. Because, the shooting position determines the amount of value that will be obtained.

The player whose main role is shooting the ball into the opponent’s ring is called the shooting guard . They are taken from players who have reliable shooting accuracy. Michael Jordan and Kobe Bryant are examples of basketball legends who play shooting guards .

Sinaumed’s needs to train his instincts so he can know which shooting technique to use in the conditions required. Because, not every condition can be done with just any shot . There are several shooting techniques . Let’s discuss it together.

a. Set Shoot

This shot is usually done when a player is in a free throw condition or is free to shoot without having to jump. This shot can only be carried out in conditions without obstruction or control, and is rarely used.

Sinaumed’s will need to hold the ball with both hands while bending his knees in a stance to take this shot. Meanwhile, the body is still upright and keep your eyes on the target. Flex your fingers and give an additional push from your arms. Before the ball is fired, make sure your instincts and feelings are involved.

b. Lay Up Shoot

This shot is also called a flying shoot . The shot was made at the end of the dribble and so close to the hoop. The player throws the ball with one hand towards the target. The throw is done while jumping as if flying. If Sinaumed’s wants to get good at this shot, practice with a friend so he can avoid getting hit by blockers .

c. Jump Shoot

Players do not move forward or backward. Then, jump at the highest point to throw the ball. There are four principles in doing a jump shoot , namely bow, eye, elbow, and follow through .

d. Slam Dunks

This shooting technique is the most eagerly awaited technique by the audience. This technique is a movement that can often make commentators excited and excited because of the beauty of the movement. Therefore, a team that can score the ball in this way often lifts morale, and it can undermine the spirit of a team that concedes in this way.

At first, slam dunk was just a show. However, slowly this technique is needed to win the game. Slam dunk is a technique of shooting the ball by flying and jumping into the air, not just throwing the ball or just tossing the ball.

5. Rebound Technique

This technique is useful for taking advantage of ball reflections that fail to enter the basketball hoop. If the shot that failed came from your team, rebounds are useful to take advantage of the chaos in front of the ring. However, if what failed was the opposing team’s shot, rebounds can be used to keep the ball away from the defensive area.

Also read:

According to Wikipedia, alternative energy is the term for all energy sources that can be used and has the aim of replacing conventional fuels without any unwanted consequences from these things. In general, the term alternative energy is used to reduce the use of hydrocarbon fuels which can cause environmental damage due to high carbon dioxide emissions, which also contribute greatly to global warming based on the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change.

Over the past few years, what is actually meant as alternative energy has undergone changes due to the many energy choices that can be chosen and have different purposes in their use.

While the term “alternative” is a technology that can be used as a fossil fuel to produce energy. The alternative technology that is used as an energy producer by solving problems and not producing new ones, is the case with the use of fossil fuels.

Meanwhile, the Oxford Dictionary defines alternative energy as energy used which aims to stop the use of natural resources or the destruction of the existing environment. So the definition of alternative energy is more concise like this, alternative energy is an energy source that can replace fuel oil or fuel. Fuel itself is the energy that is used the most so far, because it is always needed and continues to be explored, the supply is getting smaller.

So with the existence of alternative energy can replace human dependence on fuel oil and can save the use of oil itself so that supplies do not run out. In addition, alternative energy sources are non-renewable energy sources.

Kinds of Alternative Energy

Alternative energy has several kinds, which of the existence of alternative energy can reduce the use of energy used in the past and anticipate the depletion of these energy sources. The following are various alternative energy sources:

1. Solar Energy

The sun is a very large amount of energy source and an endless source of energy. The energy produced by the sun is in the form of light that is emitted continuously and contains electromagnetic energy which is of course beneficial for human life on earth.

We can use this solar energy source as a substitute for fossil energy. Usually scientists use solar energy as a source of energy by using solar panels as a source of electric power. This energy emits a very small amount of emissions compared to fossil energy.

The concept of solar energy is the concept of helioculture, which is the process of harvesting solar energy into fuel by moving carbon dioxide in the atmosphere by utilizing agricultural land.

a. How alternative energy works

The basic ingredient in capturing sunlight and converting it into energy using semiconductor materials. In general, the material used is also a silicone material and has a black color.

Here’s how alternative solar energy works, namely:

• The basic material is silicon which is made into plates and mounted on poles that are used to be directed directly at the sun. This silicon is a material that has the property of being able to reflect the sun.
• For the workings of the silicon plate by concentrating sunlight on one line or point. The concentration of sunlight will produce heat.
• The heat generated can be used to produce hot steam. The heat from the steam pressure is used to run a turbine which in turn generates electricity.

Alternative energy from sunlight for everyday life can be used for drying clothes, drying food, and much more. However, alternative energy from sunlight can also be stored and used when the sun is not around.

Utilization of sunlight underlies solar panels or solar panels that use the photovoltaic principle which is the principle of converting incoming light energy and hitting the surface of solar cells and will be converted into electrical energy.

2. Geothermal Energy

Geothermal energy or so-called geothermal energy is a source of energy that comes from the earth’s core. Geothermal energy is Greek, where the word “geo” is earth and the word “thermal” is heat. So the word geothermal is geothermal.

Geothermal energy is generated and stored in the earth’s core. When compared to fossil fuels, geothermal energy is a clean source and releases only a small amount of greenhouse gases.

Geothermal energy or geothermal energy is a source of energy that comes from the earth’s core. The earth’s core is a material consisting of various types of metal and rock in liquid form, which has a high temperature.

This energy is widely used, especially in mountainous areas. Utilization of geothermal energy is that it can be used to produce electricity as a form of renewable energy. Utilization of geothermal energy is done by looking at the resource of the heat.

So if an area has geothermal energy that emits water vapor or steam , then the steam is directed to a power plant turbine to produce electricity. After that the steam is directed to the condenser so that the steam condenses into water.

This water will then be recycled to become steam again naturally. However, if geothermal is used to produce hot water or hot water, then the hot water must first be converted into water vapor or steam. This change process requires equipment called a heat exchanger in which hot water is channeled to the heat exchanger to form water vapor.

If Sinaumed’s wants to know more about geothermal energy, Sinaumed’s can read books and get his books which are available at www.sinaumedia.com .

3. Wind Energy

Wind power or wind energy is the collection of useful energy from the wind. This energy source is produced from gusts of wind which are processed and collected into a large amount of energy. The use of wind energy is usually generated by using a windmill.

The following are the benefits of a windmill, namely:

1. Become a power source
2. Become an alternative source of fossil substitutes
3. As an environmentally friendly energy and helps reduce carbs
4. Be a wind digger
5. Helping the process of drying crops
6. Wood cutting alternative
7. Helping with irrigation

If Sinaumed’s wants to know more about wind energy and what it does and how it is used. Sinaumed’s can read books and get the books available at www.sinaumedia.com .

4. Water Energy

Water energy or also called hydropower is a source of energy that can be generated through the power of water. To produce energy it is usually done by making a dam that is used by a dam, then combined with a water pipe that is directed to the turbine. The more water flows in the turbine, the greater the energy produced. This type of energy is very dependent on the existing water supply.

The concentration of water energy is dependent on the floating wind energy capture area and is the same as the usual wind energy capture area, but floats in the middle of the ocean. Offshore wind energy capture areas can be placed in waters with a depth of up to 40 meters.

The advantage of a floating wind energy capture area is its ability to capture wind energy in the middle of the ocean without obstacles from hills, trees and buildings. Winds in the middle of the ocean can reach speeds twice the speed of winds on land.

5. Ocean Energy

The sea has great potential. The simple principle of exploiting this form of ocean energy is to use kinetic energy to turn a turbine which in turn drives a generator to produce electricity.

Energy originating from the sea or Ocean Energy can be categorized into three types, namely:

1. Tidal Energy or Tidal Energy. Tidal energy is energy generated from the movement of sea water due to differences in tides.
2. Ocean Wave Energy or Wave Energy. Ocean wave energy is energy generated from the movement of ocean waves towards land and vice versa.
3. Ocean Thermal Energy or Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion. Ocean thermal energy takes advantage of differences in seawater temperature at the surface and also at depth. Although the utilization of this type of energy in Indonesia still requires a variety of in-depth studies, it can be seen simply that the probability of finding and exploiting the potential of ocean wave energy and ocean thermal energy is greater than tidal energy.

6. Biogas Energy

Biogas is a gas mixture of methane or CH4, carbon dioxide or CO2, and other gases obtained from the decomposition of organic materials such as animal waste, human waste and plants by methanogenic decomposing bacteria in a biodigester.

The concept of digested biogas relates to the use of methane gas released when animals decompose. This gas is obtained from garbage and sewage systems. Biogas generation systems are used to produce to process methane gas via bacteria or decomposers which break down the biomass in an anaerobic environment or conditions. Methane gas collected and purified can be utilized as an alternative energy source.

The use of biogas energy has the advantage of being more environmentally friendly than oil and natural gas. The existence of biogas is also useful which can help various human activities and has a good impact on the environment. Following are the good impacts produced by biogas energy:

1. Environmentally friendly biogas. This is because biogas is a more environmentally friendly energy source. And biogas is the newest and clean energy source. The gas generated through the biodigester does not cause pollution and is useful in reducing greenhouse emissions.
2. Helps reduce soil and water pollution.
3. Producing organic fertilizer.
4. Simple technology at low cost. The technology used to produce biogas is also quite cheap and the ingredients are easy to obtain. Even a small biodigester can also be produced directly at home by utilizing kitchen waste and animal manure.
5. Healthy cooking alternative

However, biogas energy also has drawbacks in its use, these drawbacks are inadequate technological facilities, such as:

1. The system used in producing biogas is not efficient. There is no new technology to simplify the process and manufacture abundant production, of course, at a low cost. So that production on a large scale is not yet possible.
2. After being refined and compressed, biogas still contains impurities. Like the bio-fuels used to drive cars, they have adverse effects such as corrosion on the metal parts of the engine. This corrosion of course will cause an increase in maintenance costs. So gas mixtures are much more suitable for kitchen stoves, water boilers and lamps.
3. Biogas production and generation are affected by the weather. The optimal temperature for digesting waste is around 37°C. In cold climates, the digester requires heat energy to maintain a constant supply of biogas.
4. Industrial biogas installations can only be carried out if the raw materials are abundant, such as food scraps and manure. With that biogas generator is much more suitable for our rural and suburban areas with abundant availability of raw materials.

Is Sinaumed’s interested in this one energy? If so, Sinaumed’s can find more information about biogas energy by reading the book and get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com .

7. Biomass Energy

Biomass is all the bodies of living things that are used to produce energy when burned, namely in the form of organic waste as the remains of agricultural production. Biomass that can be used as fuel is not always in the form of waste, some are in the form of fast growing plants such as gosana, acacia and so on which can be used as fuel economically or as a cheap energy source.

Renewable energy sources such as biomass are sometimes referred to as an alternative to fossil fuels which are harmful to the ecology, because if biomass is commercialized it is feared that it will harm forests which are the largest producer of biomass, namely wood which is also biomass. Renewable energy is not necessarily alternative energy with that goal.

Utilization of biomass energy sources, namely:

a. Renewable energy sources

Biomass is one of the raw materials in bioenergy production. The source of the biomass used comes from municipal waste. Primary energy-producing biomass in liquid form as biofuel.

In gaseous form, biomass is used as biogas, while in solid form it is used as biobriquettes. These three primary energies can be used as fuel for transportation or industrial facilities.

In addition, this primary energy can be converted into secondary energy, namely bio-fuel electricity. The use of biomass in producing bioenergy products does not require a special process and can be directly used as primary energy.

b. Bioproducts

Biomass can also be used as a substitute for motor vehicle fuel oil by producing bioethanol. Biomass can also produce heat and electricity by producing biogas, synthesis gas and biopellets

The application of biological refinery technology to biomass produces bioethanol at low production costs. This method can also produce energy as well as by-products. The raw material used in the conversion of biomass into bioethanol comes from agricultural waste or plantation waste containing starch or lignocellulosic.

The raw material is also converted into ethanol through the initial stages of hydrolysis and fermentation. The hydrolysis process utilizes cellulase enzymes with enzymes or thermochemicals. Meanwhile, the fermentation process uses yeast.

Starch is used to produce ethanol while lignin and hemicellulose are used to produce by-products in the form of zylitot, adhesives, lignosulfonates and biosurfactants.

c. Gasification technology

The technology in which biomass is utilized during the gas formation process is carried out through a chemical reaction at high temperatures between the biomass and the gasification agent.

The ingredients of the gasification agent are air, oxygen, or water vapor. The process of forming fuel gas in biomass also utilizes the pyrolysis process. Biomass is used as gasification feed because it has main components in the form of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen.

Sinaumed’s can get more information about biomass energy by reading the book and get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com .

8. Biodiesel Energy

Biodiesel is a liquid material specially formulated for diesel engines or motors in the form of fatty acid methyl ester/FAME which is made from vegetable oil or animal fat ( bio-oil) through esterification and transesterification processes.

Biodiesel is used as an alternative energy substitute for fuel oil for diesel or diesel types. Biodiesel can be applied in 100% form (B100) or mixed with diesel oil at a certain concentration level such as B20.

If Sinaumed’s wants to learn about the potential development of biodiesel as a future fuel, and the production of biodiesel from various raw materials and process conditions for biodiesel production. Then this one book is worth reading which of course is available at www.sinaumedia.com .

9. Energy of Radioactive Substances

Radioactive substances can emit α (alpha) rays which are positively charged, β (beta) rays which are negatively charged, and γ (gamma) rays which are not electrically charged.

Do you already know about the function of the kidneys in your body? It should be noted, in the body of every human being there is a kidney as one of the supporting and important organs in supporting life.

In general, there are two kidney organs in the human body. This organ will then support various metabolic systems in the body so that they can run properly. Therefore, kidney function in the body is very important.

The location of the kidney organ itself is at the bottom of the rib cage at the back of the human body. Even though the size is only the size of a human fist, the kidney is an organ that must be maintained for its existence and health.

The reason is, if the organ is disturbed or damaged, then the metabolism in the body will also be disturbed. As a result, other organs of the body will also be affected.

So, what exactly is the function of the kidney itself? Curious? To find out more about this, see the following review. Come on, get to know the function of the kidneys, one of the important organs of the body.

 

What are Kidneys?

Kidney is one of the organs in the human body. This organ has a bean-like shape with a length of about 10 to 12 cm. With such a size, it is not uncommon for this organ to be analogous to the size of an adult’s fist.

The location of this kidney organ is under the back of the human rib cage. It is also located close to the middle of the back on both sides of the spine.

The kidney is one of the organs with the most vital function in supporting human life. Just like the lungs, the kidneys also have two parts that are connected to each other. The parts of the kidney are the right and the left. In other words, the kidneys are a pair of human organs.

Inside this bean-shaped organ, there are approximately one million nephrons that work on metabolism at all times. The nephrons contained in the kidney organ consist of a blood filter with a very very small size. With a fairly small organ size and a very complex arrangement of nephrons, the kidneys still have an important role for human health.

The main task of the kidneys is to filter blood flow. Every day, this organ is even able to filter about 200 liters of blood. Therefore, if kidney function is disturbed or has problems, there will be many other problems that occur in a person’s body.

Recognize Kidney Function

As mentioned above, the main function of the kidneys is to filter the blood flow in a person’s body. With a very large number of nephrons, this organ is able to filter up to 200 liters of blood per day.

On the other hand, the kidneys can also have another function as a converter of vitamin D in the body. This organ will help supply vitamins throughout the body. In addition, regulating the balance between acids and bases in the body is also the main function of the kidneys themselves, you know .

 

Here are some kidney functions that you need to know. Check this out !

1. Controlling the balance of water in the body

The first function of the kidneys that must be known is to control the balance of water levels in the body. The kidneys will monitor the availability of water in the body and make sure that all the tissues in the body have received enough water so that they can still work very well.

In addition, the kidneys will also react if there is a change in water levels in a person’s body. When water intake is detected to be reduced and shows signs of dehydration, the kidneys are able to retain water so that not much is wasted. It is this kidney function that helps humans not to become dehydrated when they lack fluids.

2. Filter and dispose of waste in the body

The next function of the kidneys is to filter and dispose of waste that is no longer needed in the body. The waste contained in the human body itself consists of toxic substances, excess salt levels, and excess levels of minerals and water.

In addition, the kidneys also have the function of removing urea waste or nitrogen-containing waste produced from protein metabolism in the body. The formed urea will then be transported by the blood to the kidneys. After that, urea will be excreted from the body through urine or feces.

Blood is responsible for draining all types of waste into the kidneys to be filtered and then discarded. This waste will later be converted into urine and collected in the renal pelvis before finally being excreted from the body.

Kidneys have a very important role in health. If the kidney is impaired, it will also affect other systems and organs. The reason is, if there are no kidneys, then the waste and toxic substances from the rest of the metabolism can accumulate in the blood and cause various health problems.

3. Regulating salt levels and blood pressure

Regulating salt levels and blood pressure in the body is another function of the kidneys. As a process, the kidneys will produce the enzyme renin which will then play a role in regulating salt levels and blood pressure. When filtering blood, this enzyme is what will help to stabilize blood flow and pressure in the body so that it remains normal and according to what is needed by the kidneys.

4. Regulate the circulation of red blood cells

Every blood circulation that occurs in the body, always requires sufficient oxygen. When a person’s body does not get the supply of oxygen it needs, the kidneys will help by releasing a hormone called erythropoietin .

This hormone will then stimulate the production of more red blood cells and be able to meet the oxygen levels the body needs. If the level of oxygen or red blood cells is fulfilled, then this hormone will also stop producing.

 

5. Filter blood

As previously explained, the kidneys have an important role in filtering blood in the body. When the kidneys work to filter the blood, electrolytes and various proteins will also be filtered and re-absorbed by the body.

Then, for waste or waste substances will be changed and excreted in the form of urine. The urine will flow through the ureters and be carried to the bladder before finally being discharged as urine. If kidney function is impaired, the excess protein will be excreted through the urine, this is what requires further examination from a doctor.

6. Activate vitamin D

Previously, it was mentioned that the kidneys also have a function to regulate or activate vitamin D in the body. Vitamin D is a vitamin that is needed for bone health and helps maintain the balance of chemicals in the body.

7. Regulating acid-base in the blood

The acid-base or pH content in normal human blood has a fairly small difference, which is in the range of 7.35 to 7.45. If the pH gets lower, then the blood will turn into acidosis or a condition in which the blood is increasingly acidic. Vice versa, if the blood pH is higher, the blood will turn alkaline or also known as alkalosis.

So it can be concluded, if the acid-base balance in the body is very important. It is intended that the metabolic processes that occur in each cell can run normally.

Existing Parts of the Kidney

After discussing kidney function, you also need to know the parts contained in this vital organ. When grouped or classified, the kidney in the human body actually consists of three parts, namely the renal cortex, renal pelvis, and renal medulla. The explanation of the three sections is as follows.

1. Renal cortex

The renal cortex is the outermost part of the kidney itself and is surrounded or protected by the kidney capsule. In this section, it will usually be surrounded by a layer of fat. It is useful as a protector of the inner kidney structure from damage on the outside.

2. Renal medulla

Actually, the renal medulla is the smallest structure that contains the tubules and nephrons. The renal medulla is also further divided into two parts, which are named the renal pyramids and loops of Henle.

The function of the tubules in the renal medulla is to transport fluid into the kidney and carry urine out of the kidney. As for the nephrons, their function is to take blood, metabolize nutrients, and help the kidneys excrete waste that has been filtered and is no longer used by the body.

3. Renal pelvis

The last part of the kidney is the renal pelvis. The pelvis is the deepest part of the kidney organ which has a funnel-like shape. This section is useful as a temporary container to collect urine and as a pathway for fluid transfer from the kidney to the bladder. Then, urine that is no longer needed by the body will flow into the ureters to be excreted out of the body.

How to Maintain Healthy Kidney Function

As previously explained, the kidneys have a very important role in maintaining body stability and supporting human life. Therefore, we need to maintain kidney health so that it continues to function as it should.

It is only natural that we maintain and maintain healthy kidney function. Because, if the kidney is experiencing problems and damage, other organs of the body will also be affected. Of course, prevention is better than we have to treat later on.

Even though they have to take good care of kidney function, there are still many people who don’t know how to maintain it. Here are some ways you can do to maintain kidney health.

1. Drink more water

The first and easiest way to treat kidney health is to have enough fluid intake. Things that can be done to meet the body’s need for fluids include drinking plenty of water.

If there is sufficient fluid in the body, the process of filtering blood in the kidneys will run more smoothly. The reason is, in addition to maintaining fluid stability, drinking water is also needed to support one of the main kidney functions, which is to cleanse the remaining toxins in the body.

2. No smoking

Indirectly, smoking can impede the distribution of blood to various body tissues, including the kidneys. This can occur due to damage to blood vessels due to smoking habits.

3. Set a diet

Having a healthy diet is one of the keys to maintaining and caring for a healthy body, including the health of the kidneys. This is because most of the triggers for kidney disease come from high blood pressure and diabetes which are also caused by unhealthy foods.

To have a healthy diet, you can start by reducing the consumption of salt and glucose in food, especially processed foods and fast food. Apart from that, you can also start by consuming low-sugar menus, such as whole wheat, fish, and cabbage.

4. Exercise regularly

By doing regular exercise, you can maintain a healthy body so that you still have stable or normal blood pressure. This is because blood pressure that is too high can increase the risk of developing various types of diseases, including damage to the kidneys.

In addition to maintaining blood pressure stability, by diligently exercising, you will also make it easier for the body to control the body’s glucose and cholesterol levels. The reason is, if the body does not manage to control the three major components, then the potential and risk of a person getting kidney disease will be even greater.

5. Regulate blood sugar

The risk of damage and kidney failure is actually higher than in people with diabetes. This is none other than because insulin levels in the body of diabetics are too low, making blood sugar unable to be utilized optimally as energy.

If blood sugar is not used properly, then blood sugar must be wasted in the urine. Wasting blood sugar in vain will make the kidneys work harder to filter the blood and lead to complications in the kidneys.

6. Maintain weight

Maintaining body weight and having an ideal weight is certainly a dream for everyone. Besides being able to make a person more confident in terms of appearance, maintaining an ideal body weight is also very good for the health of the organs, especially the kidneys.

One of the benefits of maintaining body weight is to reduce the risk of damage to kidney function. Because, if a person’s weight exceeds the ideal number, then the blood pressure in the body will also increase so that it has a negative impact on kidney health.

Conclusion

The kidney is one of the organs of the body that has a vital and important function to support human life. This organ has a bean-like shape with a size of about 10 to 12 cm. Located under the back ribs and close to the middle of the back, the size of the kidneys is often analogous to the size of an adult’s fist.

Kidneys have a very important role to maintain the stability of the body’s metabolic system. The functions of the kidneys in the human body include controlling the balance of water levels, filtering and disposing of metabolic waste residue, regulating the circulation of red blood cells, and so on.

Seeing the very important function of the kidneys, it is only natural that we maintain and care for the health of these organs. One way or effort that can be done to maintain healthy kidney function is to drink more water and exercise regularly.

If the kidneys are healthy, then kidney function will work well. Conversely, if kidney function is disturbed, the body’s metabolism will not run normally and lead to various damage or disease in other organs of the body.

Well, that’s a discussion about kidney function for #FriendsWithoutLimits. Let’s love and care for our organs so that they are always healthy and strong.

If you want to find various kinds of books about body health, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Raden Putri

Understanding Karang Taruna – Friends of Sinaumed’s, you need to know that teenagers are the generation that will inherit the Indonesian state in the future. Various hopes are placed so that they try to become useful individuals, and be able to contribute to the welfare of the country as a whole.

But in reality, various parties are starting to worry about the social phenomena that hit teenagers and undermine the morals of today ‘s teenagers . Without realizing it, the development of these social phenomena is increasing day by day . Every day, various stories about deviations committed by teenagers are presented.

This also illustrates how serious this phenomenon is and that firm steps need to be taken to stem the deviant behavior committed by Indonesian teenagers . Mass media such as newspapers , magazines, radio, television and the internet often broadcast various news about juvenile delinquency in big cities.

Regarding the normality of delinquent behavior or deviant behavior , Emile Durkheim (1985) in his book entitled Ruler of Sociological Method explains that deviant behavior within certain limits is considered a normal social fact. This is because it is impossible to completely remove the behavior .

Thus , a behavior is said to be normal as long as the behavior does not cause unrest in society .

To solve the problems that hit the younger generation, we need a platform that can guide and direct them. The implementation of this guidance is the duty and obligation of the executive board, both from the central and regional levels in accordance with their field, which is then translated into the community by forming an organization which will later become a place for fostering the younger generation.

One of the forums for fostering and developing the younger generation is a youth organization or youth organization. Karang Taruna is one of the most familiar youth organizations, especially in rural areas. One of the visions of this organization is a place for fostering and developing the creativity of the younger generation in a sustainable manner, as well as establishing brotherhood and a sense of togetherness with institutional partners, both youth and government in developing creativity.

In addition to trying to realize social welfare in the village or sub-district environment, the function and role of youth organizations are continuously being improved so that they can gather, mobilize and channel the participation of the younger generation in the development process.

The following will explain the meaning

Definition of Karang Taruna

Taruna emblem.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), youth organizations are places where youth (youth) gather and gather. In essence, Karang Taruna is a place for fostering and developing the younger generation for the sake of prosperity.

Karang Taruna has a sincere, sincere and full of humane mission in an effort to overcome all forms of problems for the younger generation. His role is always needed anytime and anywhere for the realization of a brighter future for the younger generation, nation, state and all Indonesian people.

Based on Article 1 number 14 of the Minister of Home Affairs Regulation No. 5 of 2007 concerning Guidelines for the Arrangement of Community Institutions (“Permendagri 5/2007), youth organizations are social institutions that become a forum for the development of the younger generation , which grow and develop on the basis of awareness and a sense of social responsibility from, by, and for the community, especially the younger generation . youth in the village/kelurahan area or equivalent customary community.

Karang Taruna is engaged in the field of social welfare business , which is functionally fostered and developed by the Ministry of Social Affairs. Karang Taruna consists of young men and women (in the AD/ART, membership is regulated, ranging from young men and women aged 11-40 years) and the limit as administrators is 17-35 years old.

Guided by the definition above, Karang Taruna can be defined as follows.

1. A place for fostering and developing the younger generation;
2. Growing awareness and sense of social responsibility;
3. Engaged primarily in the field of social welfare;
4. Functionally fostered and developed by the Ministry of Social Affairs.

Karang Taruna is located in a village/kelurahan whose members are aged 17-40 years with a membership system that adheres to a passive system, in the sense that all young people in the village/kelurahan are members of youth organizations, hereinafter referred to as active or passive Karang Taruna members.

All members of Karang Taruna have the same rights and obligations regardless of their ancestry, ethnicity, gender, social position, and religion.

Here are some examples of actions that youth youth organizations can take to contribute big things to society.

1. To practice cohesive and healthy organization with gathering events, for example holding a gathering agenda once a week or every two weeks to establish friendship and strengthen brotherhood, coupled with joint discussions;
2. Carrying out community service activities and environmental management, for example holding clean Fridays and cleaning the mosque together every Sunday, or if this is not possible by cleaning the streets once a month with residents and other youths;
3. Promoting the planting of live pharmacies and live stalls, for example inviting housewives to plant live apothecary plants in their yard or certain planting media;
4. Holding competitions every anniversary of the Republic of Indonesia, for example sports competitions (volleyball, football and badminton), religious competitions (memorization of short letters, Islamic poetry, call to prayer, lectures), cooking competitions, and others;
5. Holding additional schools with local village children after school, for example making handicrafts from used materials that can still be used as an effort to turn used materials into crafts to reduce waste. Through this activity, it is hoped that an entrepreneurial and creative spirit will be created, and children can develop well;
6. Establishing a simple library, for example, utilizing an unused location or space to become a simple reading garden for the local village.

There are many other things that youth members of youth organizations can do and use in an effort to increase their role as the nation’s next generation.

Youth Organization Vision and Mission

According to the Directorate of Youth Organization Development (2005), the vision and mission of youth organizations are stated as follows.

1. Vision of Karang Taruna

Karang Taruna is a forum for fostering and developing the creativity of the younger generation in a sustainable manner to establish brotherhood and a sense of togetherness to become a partner of institutional organizations, both youth and government in the development of creativity. Capability in the field of social welfare is good for the community in the surrounding environment or in other areas.

2. Youth Organization Mission

1. Improving human resources (HR) for a better future through the community sector and establishing cooperation with government agencies or other parties, through the development of business groups;
2. The realization of increasing social welfare for villagers in general and especially the younger generation which enables the implementation of their social functions as human beings of development who are able to overcome social problems in their environment;
3. Preserving regional arts and developing an interest in sports;
4. Increase the role of youth and women and provide awareness of the importance of legal protection of women’s rights as children or adolescents, as wives, and as housewives through socialization on the development of women’s empowerment involving youth groups;
5. The realization of young men and women who fear God Almighty, are attentive and sensitive to problems with strong physical and mental strength, are firm and firm in their stance, and are able to be creative, work, and be honest as a reference in society.
6. Participate in efforts to improve health status through clean and healthy living behavior (PHBS), as well as make anticipatory efforts in the framework of disease prevention.

Youth Organization Objectives

The purpose of forming youth organizations is stated as follows.

1. The realization of awareness and social responsibility of every young generation of youth members in preventing, preventing, overcoming, and anticipating various social problems that arise;
2. The formation of the soul and fighting spirit of the younger generation who are skilled, knowledgeable and knowledgeable;
3. Growing potential and abilities of the younger generation in order to develop citizen empowerment;
4. It motivates every young generation to be able to establish tolerance and become the glue of unity in the diversity of social life;
5. The establishment of cooperation among the younger generation in order to realize the level of social welfare for youth and society;
6. The realization of increasing social welfare for the younger generation or equal customary communities, which enables the implementation of social functions as human beings that are constructive and capable of overcoming social welfare problems in their environment;
7. The realization of social welfare development for the younger generation in a comprehensive, integrated, directed and sustainable manner with the government and other components of society.

According to Permensos 77/HUK/2010 concerning the Basic Guidelines for Youth Organizations it is stated as follows.

1. The growth and development of every member of society who is qualified, skilled, intelligent, innovative, has character, and has social awareness and responsibility in preventing, preventing, overcoming, and anticipating various social welfare problems, especially the younger generation;
2. Business development towards the independence of every member of society, especially the younger generation;
3. Development of partnerships that guarantee the improvement of the capabilities and potential of the younger generation in a directed and sustainable manner;
4. The quality of the social welfare of every member of society, especially the younger generation in the village/kelurahan, in an integrated, directed, comprehensive and sustainable manner.

Based on the description above, it can be concluded that Karang Taruna was established so that it is easier for the younger generation to solve the problems they face, as well as to make the younger generation or adolescents have a high attitude of discipline in living life in the future.

Karang Taruna also functions to educate the younger generation as the nation’s successors who are resilient and tough through various kinds of activities that have positive values.

Functions of Youth Organizations

The function of forming youth organizations is stated as follows.

1. As the organizer of the implementation of social welfare efforts;
2. Organizers of education and training activities for the community;
3. Organizing community empowerment, especially for the younger generation in their environment, both in a comprehensive, integrated, directed and sustainable manner;
4. Organizing activities in terms of developing an entrepreneurial spirit for the younger generation in their environment;
5. Instilling understanding, nurturing, and increasing the awareness and sense of social responsibility of the younger generation;
6. Growing and developing the spirit of togetherness, the spirit of kinship, social solidarity, and strengthening the values ​​of wisdom within the framework of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI);
7. Fostering the creativity of the younger generation to be able to develop social responsibility that is recreational, creative, educative, economical, productive, and other practical activities by utilizing all sources and potential for social welfare in their environment independently.

According to this description, it is understandable that Karang Taruna is very beneficial in preventing negative behavior from teenagers. As a forum that maintains and fosters the creativity of the younger generation, youth organizations are expected to be able to carry out tasks, both in the social and governmental fields. In addition, youth organizations are also expected to foster a sense of brotherhood among youth, so they can avoid fights.

Main Duties of Karang Taruna

Tackling various social welfare problems, especially those faced by the younger generation, together with the government and other components of society, whether preventive, rehabilitative or developing the potential of the younger generation in their environment in the context of increasing the level of social welfare of the community.

Functional Position of Karang Taruna

As a social organization that is managed and manages young people (youth generation), youth organizations have a foundation in the form of the Indonesian Ministry of Social Affairs which positions them as a functional component of society. This prototype is illustrated as Family Welfare Development (PKK) in empowering women, Scouts in the scouting movement, and the Indonesian Red Cross (PMI) in humanitarian assistance.

This is what causes the management of youth organizations, which are functional organizations and are confirmed by the Trustees/Heads of Regions, to be held under the following conditions.

1. Has a secretariat/representative office;
2. Obtain subsidies for the management of the organization;
3. Having the closest access to social empowerment programs, particularly in the development of social welfare;
4. Has the right to be actively involved in the process of planning and decision making of social welfare programs;
5. Have strong access to building partnerships in internal social institutions outside of social empowerment programs;
6. Has significant access to building partnerships with other agencies which are technical advisors for youth organizations;
7. Become the spearhead of social welfare development that is given full trust by the government and society.

Youth Organization Management

Organizationally, youth organizations stand alone and because of their roots in the village/kelurahan or equal customary community, management strengthening and empowerment (as the executor of the youth organization’s function) is also in the village/kelurahan.

Administrators at the sub-district to national levels are the executors of developing and strengthening networks between youth organizations and other parties. This is what causes it to be called the Karang Taruna Forum (FKT), with the following functions.

1. Organizers of program partnerships with social and technical agencies;
2. Organizers of organizational decision-making mechanisms;
3. Information and communication system manager;
4. Empowerment, developer, and strengthening of the cooperation network system between youth organizations and other related parties;
5. Organizer of policy consolidation and outreach;
6. Organizers of coordination and consolidation of social problem solving activities, including with separate technical units;
7. Maintaining social solidarity, consistency, and organizational image;
8. Organizer of the system and coordination of human resource development and cadet regeneration;
9. Organizer of the system and coordination of youth assistance and advocacy;
10. System administrator and coordination for the development of social welfare services and economic activities.

Conclusion

Karang Taruna is a youth organization in Indonesia. Karang Taruna is a forum for the development of a non-partisan young generation, which grows on the basis of awareness and a sense of social responsibility from, by and for the community, especially the younger generation in the village/kelurahan area or equivalent social community, which is engaged in social welfare.

As a youth social organization, Karang Taruna is a forum for coaching and development, as well as empowerment in efforts to develop productive economic activities by utilizing all the potential available in the surrounding environment.

So, that’s information about the Definition, Vision and Mission, Objectives, Functions, and Main Duties of Karang Taruna . Karang Taruna are guided by basic guidelines and household guidelines that have regulated the board structure and term of office in each region, starting from the village or sub-district to the national level. All of this is a form of organizational regeneration for the sake of the continuation of the organization, as well as the development of youth youth members, both now and in the future.

 

Kamilin prayer – For Muslims, when the month of Ramadan arrives it is very synonymous with the implementation of the tarawih prayer. When the tarawih prayer is finished, there is one prayer that is usually recited before the witr prayer, namely the Kamilin prayer.

During the month of Ramadan, it is sunnah for Muslims to carry out the tarawih prayer. Tarawih prayers can be done in mosques, prayer rooms, or at home. After completing the tarawih and witir prayers, we should not immediately move on. We need to read the Kamilin prayer, the prayer after the tarawih and witr prayers.

Then, what is meant by the Kamilin prayer and how does it sound? In this article, we will discuss more about the kamilin prayer. However, before discussing the Kamilin prayer, it is better for us to discuss the Tarawih prayer first.

Meaning of Tarawih Prayer

During Ramadan, Muslims fast during the day and pray Tarawih at night. Tarawih prayers are held after the evening prayer until just before dawn. Tarawih prayer itself is a worship that is highly recommended when entering the holy month of Ramadan.

Quoted from the book Qiyamul Lail and Ramadhan (Rumah Fiqh) by Ustadz Isnan Anshory, Lc. M.Ag, linguistically, tarawih comes from the word tarawih (which is the plural form of the word tarwihah) which means rest. So, in meaning, this tarawih prayer is a prayer that is done with lots of breaks in its cycles. In addition, Tarawih prayers are also performed specifically in the holy month of Ramadan.

In the hadith of the Prophet there is also much mention about how the priority of this Tarawih Prayer is. Tarawih prayer is a sunnah prayer performed during the month of Ramadan.

Rasulullah SAW said that the person who performs Tarawih prayers with faith and sincerity, Allah SWT will forgive his past sins.

مَنْ قَامَ رَمَضَانَ إيمَانًا وَاحْتِسَابًا غُفِرَ لَهُ مَا تَقَدَّمَ مِنْ ذَنْبِهِ

Meaning: “Whoever worships (tarawih) in the month of Ramadan while having faith and sincerity, then his past sins will be forgiven.” (HR Bukhari, Muslim, and others). Bukhari narrated in the Book of Faith with the degree of authentic.

The law of carrying out the tarawih prayer is sunnah. This extinction is stated in a hadith narrated by Imam Bukhari, Muslim, and others.

مَنْ قَامَ رَمَضَانَ إيمَانًا وَاحْتِسَابًا غُفِرَ لَهُ مَا تَقَدَّمَ مِنْ ذَنْبِهِ

Meaning: “Whoever worships (tarawih) in the month of Ramadan while having faith and sincerity, then his past sins will be forgiven.”

The number of cycles of Taraweeh prayer varies. There are those who choose 8, 20, and 36 cycles. Everything has a clear reason or basis.

Procedure for Tarawih Prayers

The procedure for carrying out Tarawih prayers can be done in 4 cycles, 4 cycles without initial tasyahud, and 3 cycles of witr without initial tasyahud.

Tarawih prayers can also be done in 2 cycles, 2 cycles, 2 cycles, 2 cycles, 2 cycles and 1 cycle witir.

In the book al-Adzkar an-Nawawiyah , Imam Yahya bin Syaraf an-Nawawi mentions that the Tarawih prayer is a sunnah. The way to perform the tarawih prayer is the same as other prayers, as well as all prayer readings are read, such as the iftitah prayer, other dhikr with perfect readings, to the prayer after tasyahud.

Imam Nawawi recommends that the verses read in the tarawih prayer are the verses of the Al-Qur’an sequentially so that they finish within the month of Ramadan. Assuming that Ramadan lasts 30 days, there are 30 nights for tarawih prayers, so the recommendation is to read one juz every night.

The performance of the 20 cycles of Tarawih prayers refers to the history of tabiin such as Said bin Yazid, Yazid bin Rauman, Yahya bin Said al-Qathan, and Abdul Aziz bin Rafi’.

In Ma’ruf Khozin’s Pocket Book of Success in Ramadan Worship , it is stated that Said bin Yazid narrated, “Umar gathered Muslims in the month of Ramadan with imams Ubay bin Ka’b and Tamim al-Dari, with 21 cycles (or 23 cycles in other narrations) ). They read verses hundreds. Just finished when before dawn.

Tribunnews.com quoted from the writings of DR Marabona Munthe ME Sy, Lecturer at the Riau State Islamic University (UIN) Riau, in his article Procedures for Tarawih Prayers in Congregational Homes and Individually , the following is the order of Tarawih prayers:

1. Saying the intention of Tarawih prayer according to his position as an imam or makmum
2. Intentions in the heart
3. When takbiratul ihram say takbir
4. When takbiratul ihram read Surah Al-Fatihah
5. Then read one of the letters in the Qur’an
6. bow
7. I’tidal
8. First prostration
9. Sit between two prostrations
10. Second prostration
11. Sit to rest or sit for a while before getting up to do the second cycle.
    Get up from sitting
12. Do the second cycle with the same movements as the first cycle
13. Greetings in the second rak’ah (if following two cycles-two cycles), continue until the fourth cycle then greeting (if following the opinion of four cycles-four cycles).

Procedure for Tarawih Prayer 20 Rakat

Tarawih prayers are usually performed in congregation at the mosque or musala. However, you can also pray Tarawih at home individually (alone).

The following is the procedure for the Taraweeh prayer with a total of 20 cycles followed by the witr prayer of 3 cycles.

1. Saying the intention to perform the tarawih prayer, depending on whether the prayer itself (munfarid), as an imam, or as a congregation.
2. Saying the intention in the heart when takbiratul ihram, say takbir.
3. Read Surah Al-Fatihah followed by reading one of the surahs in the Qur’an.
4. Ruku, recite the recitation of bowing.
5. I’tidal , recite the i’tidal reading .
6. The first prostration, recite the prostration reading.
7. Sitting between two prostrations, reciting the reading sitting between two prostrations.
8. The second prostration, recite the prostration reading.
9. Sit for a moment before getting up to do the second cycle.
10. Get up from sitting, then do the second cycle like the first cycle (start from reading Al-Fatihah to the second prostration)
11. Sit the final tasyahud and salute in the second cycle.
12. Back to performing Tarawih prayers 2 cycles with one greeting up to 10 times.
13. Doing the witir prayer 3 cycles with 2 greetings, formation of 2 cycles first, followed by 1 cycle.

Reading Nida’ (Call) Tarawih Prayer

In congregational tarawih prayers at mosques or prayer rooms, nida’ (calls) are often sung to the community to perform or continue tarawih prayers. Usually, the munadi (who calls) will recite the words, “Ash-sholatu jami’atan rakhimakumullah.” The congregation answered this by saying “la haula wala quwwata illa billahil ‘aliyyil ‘adzimi” or “asholatu la ilaha illallah”.

When the tarawih prayer has been going on for 4 cycles (2 times the greeting), after the greeting, the munadi utters the following sentence.

لْخَلِيْفَةُ اْلاُوْلَى سَيِّدُنَا اَبُوْ بَكَرْ الصِّدِّيْقُ رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ

Al-khalifatul ula, sayyidina abu bakrin as siddiq radhiallahu anhu.

Meaning: “The first caliph, Abu Bakr As-Siddiq, may Allah SWT. bless him. The congregation answered by reading “رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ ” (Radi Yallu anhu) which means “May Allah have mercy on him.”

The congregation answered by reading “رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ” (Radi Yallu anhu) which means “May Allah have mercy on him.”

When the tarawih prayer has been going on for 8 cycles (4 times the greeting), after the greeting, the munadi utters the following sentence.

???

Al-khalifah ast tsaniyah, Sayyidina Umar bin Khattab radhiyallahu anhu.

Meaning: “The second caliph, Umar bin Khattab, may Allah be pleased with him.”

The congregation answered by reading “رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ” (Radi Yallu anhu) which means “May Allah have mercy on him.”

When the tarawih prayer has been going on for 12 cycles (6 greetings), after the greeting, the munadi utters the following sentence.

???

Al-kholifatus tsalitsah, Sayyidina Uthman bin Affan radhiyallahu anhu

Meaning: “The third caliph, Uthman bin Affan, may Allah be pleased with him.”

The congregation answered by reading “رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ” (Radi Yallu anhu) which means “May Allah have mercy on him.”

When the tarawih prayer has been going on for 16 cycles (8 greetings), after the greeting, the munadi utters the following sentence.

???

“Al-khulafaur rabi’atul, Sayyidina Ali bin Abi Talib radhiyallahu anhu.”

Meaning: “The third caliph, Ali bin Abi Talib, may Allah be pleased with him.”

The congregation answered by reading “karamallahu wajhah” which means “May Allah glorify him”.

The intention of the Tarawih Prayer and the Witr Prayer

Taraweeh prayer

The intention to pray Tarawih in congregation is 2 cycles

???

Ushalli sunnatat taraawiihi rak’ataini mustaqbilal qiblati ma’muman lillahi ta’aalaa

Meaning: “I intend to pray Tarawih two rak’ahs facing the Qiblah as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.”

Intention of Own Tarawih Prayer (Munfarid) – 2 cycles

???

Usholli sunnatattarawihi rak’ataini mustaqbilal qiblati lillahi ta’ala

Meaning: “I intend to pray Tarawih two rak’ahs facing the Qiblah because of Allah Ta’ala.”

Intention of Tarawih Prayer as Priest – 2 cycles

???

Ushollii sunnatat-taraawiihi rok’ataini mustaqbilal qiblati imaaman lillaahi ta’alaa

Meaning: “I intend to pray the sunnah tarawih prayer two rak’ahs facing the Qibla as an imam because of Allah Ta’ala.”

Witr prayer

After the Tarawih prayer, you should continue to perform the Witr prayer, at least one cycle. However, in general, the Witr prayer is done in three cycles with two greetings. However, it is also permissible if you do three cycles with one greeting.

The intention of the Witir Prayer is 1 cycle

اُصَلِّى سُنًّةَ الْوِتْرِرَكْعَتَيْنِ مُسْتَقْبِلَ الْقِبْلَةِ اَدَاءً مَأْمُوْمًاِللهِ تَعَالَى

Ushallii sunnatal witri rok ‘atan mustaqbilal qiblati adaa an (mammum / priest) lillahi ta’ala

Meaning: “I intend to pray witir one rak’ah facing the Qiblah to be makmum because of Allah ta’ala”

The intention of the Witr prayer is 3 cycles

???

Ushallii sunnatal witri tsalaatsa roka’aatin mustaqbilal qiblati adaa an (mammuman/imaman) lillahi ta’ala

Meaning: “I intend to pray three cycles of witir facing the Qiblah to be (ma’muman/imaaman) because of Allah ta’ala”

Definition of Kamilin Prayer

One suggestion after the tarawih prayer is to read the Kamilin prayer. Badruddin Hasyim Subki in his book entitled The Mystery of the Two Hands in Prayer, Remembrance, and Prayer says that the Kamilin prayer is a prayer offered to ask for the perfection of faith. Kamilin prayer is a prayer that is recommended to be recited after the tarawih prayer.

Prayers done earnestly will bring goodness and also make it possible to be granted by Allah SWT.

Kamilin prayer is a good prayer in which there are expressions of gratitude and requests for blessings and strength of faith. Reading this Kamilin prayer seriously is a form of our piety to Allah SWT. The Kamilin prayer itself is actually a prayer that is not written in the Al-Quran or Hadith, and does not even have recommendations or statements.

Kamilin Prayer Time

The time suggested by the scholars to read the Kamilin prayer is after completing 8 or 20 cycles of Tarawih prayers. Because the Kamilin prayer contains goodness, the virtue of those who read it can always be awarded the extraordinary perfection of faith.

Kamilin prayer that can be read after completing the twentieth cycle if the tarawih prayer is 20 cycles. It can also be read in the eighth cycle, if the tarawih prayers are performed only 8 cycles.

Kamilin Prayer Reading

The reading of the Kamilin prayer recommended by the scholars is as follows:

اَللّٰهُمَّ اجْعَلْنَا بِالْإِيْمَانِ كَامِلِيْنَ، وَلِلْفَرَائِضِ مُؤَدِّيْنَ، وَلِلصَّلَاةِ حَافِظِيْنَ، وَلِلزَّكَاةِ فَاعِلِيْنَ، وَلِمَا عِنْدَكَ طَالِبِيْنَ، وَلِعَفْوِكَ رَاجِيْنَ، وَبِالْهُدَى مُتَمَسِّكِيْنَ، وَعَنِ اللَّغْوِ مُعْرِضِيْنَ، وَفِي الدُّنْيَا زَاهِدِيْنَ، وَفِي الْاٰخِرَةِ رَاغِبِيْنَ، وَبِالْقَضَاءِ رَاضِيْنَ، وَلِلنَّعْمَاءِ شَاكِرِيْنَ، وَعَلَى الْبَلَاءِ صَابِرِيْنَ، وَتَحْتَ لِوَاءِ مُحَمَّدٍ صَلَّى اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ يَوْمَ الْقِيَامَةِ سَائِرِيْنَ، وَعَلَى الْحَوْضِ وَارِدِيْن، وَإِلَى الْجَنَّةِ دَاخِلِيْنَ، وَمِنَ النَّارِ نَاجِيْنَ، وَعَلَى سَرِيْرِ الْكَرَامَةِ قَاعِدِيْنَ، وَبِحُوْرٍعِيْنٍ مُتَزَوِّجِيْنَ، وَمِنْ سُنْدُسٍ وَاِسْتَبْرَقٍ وَدِيْبَاجٍ مُتَلَبِّسِيْنَ، وَمِنْ طَعَامِ الْجَنَّةِ آكِلِيْنَ، وَمِنْ لَبَنٍ وَعَسَلٍ مُصَفًّى شَارِبِيْنَ، بِأَكْوَابٍ وَّأَبَارِيْقَ وَكَأْسٍ مِّنْ مَعِيْنٍ مَعَالَّذِيْنَ أَنْعَمْتَ عَلَيْهِمْ مِنَ النَّبِيِّيْنَ وَالصِّدِّيْقِيْنَ وَالشُّهَدَاءِ وَالصَّالِحِيْنَ وَحَسُنَ أُولئِكَ رَفِيْقًا، ذٰلِكَ الْفَضْلُ مِنَ اللهِ وَكَفَى بِاللهِ عَلِيْمًا، اَللّٰهُمَّ اجْعَلْنَا فِي هٰذِهِ لَيْلَةِ الشَّهْرِ الشَّرِيْفَةِ الْمُبَارَكَةِ مِنَ السُّعَدَاءِ الْمَقْبُوْلِيْنَ، وَلَا تَجْعَلْنَا مِنَ اْلأَشْقِيَاءِ الْمَرْدُوْدِيْنَ، وَصَلَّى اللهُ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ وَاٰلِه وَصَحْبِهِ أَجْمَعِيْنَ، بِرَحْمَتِكَ يَا أَرْحَمَ الرَّاحِمِيْنَ، وَالْحَمْدُ لِلّٰهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِيْنَالْمَرْدُوْدِيْنَ، وَصَلَّى اللهُ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ وَاٰلِه وَصَحْبِهِ أَجْمَعِيْنَ، بِرَحْمَتِكَ يَا أَرْحَمَ الرَّاحِمِيْنَ، وَالْحَمْدُ لِلّٰهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِيْنَالْمَرْدُوْدِيْنَ، وَصَلَّى اللهُ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ وَاٰلِه وَصَحْبِهِ أَجْمَعِيْنَ، بِرَحْمَتِكَ يَا أَرْحَمَ الرَّاحِمِيْنَ، وَالْحَمْدُ لِلّٰهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِيْنَ

Allahumaj’alna bil iimaani kaamiliin, walil faraaidi muaddiin, walish sholaati hafidin, waliz zakaati faa’ilihi, wa lima ‘indaka thaalibiin, wali’afika rojiin, wabil huda mutamassikin, wa ‘anillaghwi mu’ridhuun, Wafid dunyaa zahidin, wafil aakhirati raghibin , wa bil qadhaa i rahadian, walin na’ama i syakirin, wa ‘alal bala’i shabirin, wa tanjung lawaa i muhammadin shollallohu alaihi wasallam yaumal qiyaamati sairin, wa Ilal haudi waaritsiin, wa Ilal jannati rohadilin, wa minan naari naajihin, wa ‘ala syairil karaamati quaidin, wamin hurin ‘inin mutazawwijin, win sundusin wa istabraqin wadiibaajin mutalabbisiin, wamin tho’amil jannati aakiliin, wamin Labanin wasalim musaffan syaari bin, bi aswabin wa aba ariqo Waka sin min ma’iin.ma’alladziina an’ amta ‘alaihim Mina nabiyyina wa shiddiqin wa syuhada wa sholihin, wa hasuna ulaa ika rafiiqa,dzalikal Fadhlu minallahi wakafaa billaahi ‘aliima.

Allahumaj’alna fii haadzal lailati Syahril mubaarakati Monas su’adaail maqbulin wala taj’alna minal asyqiyaail marduudin.

It means:“O Allah, make us, thanks to faith, people who are perfect, do things that are fardhu, maintain prayer, pay zakat, hope for rewards that are on your side, hope for your forgiveness, people who hold fast to guidance, people who turn away from vain deeds, people who are ascetic towards worldly things, people who hope for rewards in the hereafter, people who are pleased with qada, people who are grateful for favors, people who are patient with trials and calamities, and those who walk under the banner of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, later on the Day of Resurrection, those who are herded to the lake (Kautsar) to drink its water, those who enter heaven, those who are saved from hell , those seated on couches of glory,those who marry maidens with sharp eyes, those who dress in thin and thick silk, those who eat the food of heaven, and drink from milk and honey using straight glasses and kettles and shotguns. from its sources.

That is, with those whom You have bestowed favors on them from among the prophets, shiddiqin, martyrs and pious people, they are the best of friends, that is a gift from Allah, and sufficient is Allah, the All-Knowing. .

O Allah, make us happy people whose deeds are accepted in this noble and blessed month, and do not make us miserable people whose deeds are rejected. May additional blessings and safety continue to flow to Sayyidina Muhammad, his family and friends. All praise belongs to Allah alone.”

Closing

Thus the discussion about the Kamilin prayer along with the procedures for the Tarawih prayer. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s.

Sinaumed’s can get more information by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Also read:

Definition of K3 – Hi, Sinaumed’s friends, do you know about K3? For some people it might be foreign when they hear the word K3, especially for someone who hasn’t worked. For workers, usually they already understand what is meant by K3, especially for those who work with dangerous tools.

In addition, when talking about K3, it cannot be separated from worker safety. In fact, K3 is not only in Indonesia, but also in several foreign countries. The reason is because the ILO ( International Labor Organization ) estimates that around 2.3 million workers worldwide die from accidents or work-related illnesses each year (ILO, 2020).

Not only that, accidents and Activity Impact Diseases (PAK) also cause loss of modules, morale and area contamination and even affect productivity. It is hoped that with the application of K3, disasters and Activity Impact Diseases (PAK) can be prevented.

Then, what is K3? For those of you who don’t know, there’s no need to worry because in this article, we will discuss OSH in more depth.

Well, Sinaumed’s friends, before discussing the meaning or interpretation of K3, how good is it for us to first understand what K3 stands for?

What does K3 stand for?

Activity Health and Safety , commonly abbreviated as K3, is an effort to develop similar activities, inter-interpretation, and the effective participation of entrepreneurs or caregivers and activity capacity at activity sites to carry out joint obligations and roles in the health and safety aspects of activities in the planning program creation effort.

Through the implementation of K3, it is hoped that this area of ​​work activity will create a place for activities that is comfortable, fresh, and free from area contamination. That way, it can reduce or be free from activity accidents and disease caused by activities. So, the application of K3 in the activity area can increase the ability and productivity of activities.

Definition of K3

There is also an understanding that is broken down into 2 interpretations, namely philosophically and scientifically.

In a Philosophical Way

An idea or effort to ensure the perfection and integrity of both body and spirit, activity power in particular and society in general, for its production and culture leads to a balanced and capable society.

 

The Scientific Way

Insight knowledge and its implementation in an effort to avoid the possibility of the formation of accidents and diseases due to activities.

Based on the K3 Interpretation above, we can conclude that the position of K3 in the activity area includes several things, including:

1. Every powerful activity force gets protection for its safety in carrying out work for the sake of saving life and increasing national creativity and productivity;
2. Everyone who is different at the activity site needs to be safe;
3. Each creation base needs to be used and used in a comfortable and efficient manner;
4. To reduce industry fees if there is an activity disaster and illness due to activity ties because there has been predictive action from the industry.

In practice, K3 is a form of effort to create a place for activities that is comfortable, fresh, and free from environmental contamination, so that it can reduce and/or be free from accidents and PAK which in turn can increase the system and activity productivity.

In K3 there are 3 rules that must always be understood, namely:

1. Provisions relating to the health and safety of activities;
2. Used to prevent power activity;
3. Risk of disaster and illness due to activities.

The targets of K3 are:

1. Ensure the safety of operators and other people;
2. Ensuring the use of equipment is comfortable to operate;
3. Guarantees a convenient and easy way of creation.

Common Threats in K3

Theoretically, the terms threats that are often encountered in the area of ​​activity cover several things, among others.

1. HAZARD (Threat Base)

A condition that allows or can cause disaster, disease, destruction, or limits the ability of existing workers.

2. DANGER (Threat Level)

The threat opportunity has emerged (a threat situation has existed but can be protected by various protective measures.

3. RISK

Estimated level of severity if a threat occurs in a particular cycle.

4. INCIDENT

The occurrence of threatening events (events that are not desired, which can or has made contact with an energy base that exceeds the threshold of the body or form.

5. ACCIDENT

Threat events accompanied by the presence of victims and or loss of (people or goods).

 

Aspects on K3

Why do so many views only focus on K3? Even so, in reality, there are indeed many companies that focus on Safety, Health, and Activities only. In fact, if you look more deeply there are 4 things that need to be considered in the field of management that can be integrated. Management of safety, health, protecting area, and quality.

However, the application of security ( safety ), health ( health ), protecting the area ( environment ) and quality ( quality ) management is often combined into a management system for safety and activity health (K3), protecting the area ( environment ), and quality ( quality ). , abbreviated as QHSE. Especially nowadays, the views above are combined with security to become QHSSE.

Q = Quality

H = Health

S = Safety

S = Security

E = Environment

So, don’t worry anymore if you look at QHSSE records. Even though there are those who think that K3 and QHSSE are different, the purpose of the two terms is to prioritize worker safety.

For those of you who want to know more about OSH, then you don’t need to worry because there are lots of books that discuss OSH, one of the books is Effective Techniques in Cultivating Occupational Safety and Health. Through this book, readers will know how important OSH is in the world of work.

Meaning or Interpretation of K3 (Activity Safety and Health)

Next, here are 10 interpretations of K3 (Activity Safety and Health) that you must know. Starting from the interpretation of OSH for philosophy, ILO, OSH experts, and regulations.

1. Interpretation of OSH for Philosophy

Philosophically, OSH is a vision and effort to ensure perfection and integrity: the activities and people in general (both physically and spiritually), production and culture lead to a balanced, capable and safe society (FTUNY, 2014).

2. Interpretation of K3 in a scientific way

From a scientific point of view, the meaning of activity safety and health (K3) is defined as a science and its implementation in an effort to prevent accidents, fires, explosions, contamination, disease, and the like (FTUNY, 2014).

Or Health Sciences and Activity Safety which is part of Public Health Sciences is the science and art of managing hazards at work sites that have the potential to undermine the safety and health status of workers. Threat management is defined as including prediction, identification, assessment and regulation (FKM UI).

3. Interpretation of K3 originates from SMK3 PP Number 50 of 2012

For Government Regulation Number 50 of 2012, the interpretation of K3 is all activities to ensure and prevent the safety and health of activities through efforts to prevent activity accidents and disease caused by activities.

4. Interpretation of OSH for MoM Singapore

The Ministry of Manpower Singapore said that Safety and Health Activities (K3) covers legal requirements, certification and registration, control and supervision, coverage of accidents and compensation for injuries to activities.

5. The interpretation of K3 originates from the Director General of Mineral and Coal Decree Number 185. K of 2019

There is also the meaning of K3 for the Director General of Mineral and Coal, Safety and Health of Mining Activities (K3 Mining) which is all activities to guarantee and prevent workers from being safe and healthy through efforts to manage activity safety, activity health, activity areas, and activity safety and health management systems.

6. Interpretation of OSH for the ILO

The interpretation of OSH for the ILO, Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) is usually defined as the science of predicting, identifying, assessing and managing threats arising in or from the place of activity that may affect the health and safety of workers, taking into account the possible consequences for the immediate area of ​​the community and area in the usual way.

7. The interpretation of OSH originates from PTK 005 SKK Migas

Health, Activity Safety and Area Assurance (“K3”) are all activities to ensure and prevent the health, safety of activity resources and areas through efforts to prevent activity accidents and activity-related illnesses.

8. Interpretation of K3 is sourced from SKKNI 2019-038

The next meaning of K3 comes from the Ministry of Manpower No. 38 of 2019, it is explained that Activity Safety and Health, hereinafter abbreviated as K3, is a science of knowledge and its implementation in an effort to prevent accidents and disease caused by activities.

9. Interpretation of K3 for PUPR Regulation Number 10 of 2021

K3 or Architectural Security are all technical activities to support the Architectural Profession in creating compliance with Safety, Security, Health and Sustainability Standards that guarantee architectural engineering safety, activity safety and health, public safety and area security.

10. Interpretation of K3 for Gunawan, F. A, et al 

Gunawan, F. A, et al described OSH as an action to manage the risk of surgical or creative threats ( an action to control the risk from operational hazard ). It was explained that without understanding the core meaning of OSH, it would not be confusing if OSH efforts were not scrutinized by the surgical apparatus (supervisor). Further explained.

• It is impossible to manage the risk of surgical threats left to the K3 apparatus, because the risk of surgery arises due to weaknesses in the management of surgery that are not under the authority of the K3 apparatus. All functions must contribute to managing the risk of surgery.
• Because those who are victims of the risks of surgery are not OSH apparatus, but surgery and procedures in the field, the main responsibility for managing surgical risks lies in surgical management. The function of the OSH apparatus is only an important supporter of surgical risk management efforts.
• In order for surgical risk management to work properly, this effort must be integrated throughout the surgical life cycle. Starting from planning, logistics, development, surgery, to treatment through the application of the K3 management system.

Studying or exploring K3 science is arguably not so easy. Therefore, companies or management who take care of OSH matters must know this carefully. OSH System and Management book . This book is perfect for beginners who want to explore K3 because the language used in this book is simple.

Mission K3

In essence, Activity Safety and Health (K3) is a view that must be regulated and implemented in all institutions. Because there are 3 important K3 missions for Law Number 1 of 1970, namely:

1. Prevent and guarantee the safety of each activity power and other people at the activity site.
2. Ensuring that each production base can be used comfortably and efficiently.
3. Increasing safety and national production capacity.

Occupational Health Hazard Management Method

1. Engineering settings

Illustration:

• Changing work methods
• Cover or minimize hazardous materials
• Using worker automation
• Ventilation as a substitute for sufficient air

2. Administration settings

Illustration:

• Set a suitable duration between hours of activity and rest
• Compile K3 regulations
• Put up a warning signal
• Make information on risky and safe materials
• Organize and carry out nursery upgrading of emergency response systems

3. Occupational Safety Standards

Guarding as a security activity activity.

1. Body protection that covers the whole body.
2. Machine protection.
3. Electrical maintenance that must be carried out regularly.
4. Room maintenance, including a siren system, fire fighting equipment, adequate lighting, adequate windows, and special transfer routes.

4. Personal Protection Equipment

Self-protection equipment is a mandatory tool that is used when on duty according to the threats and risks of activities to protect the safety of the workers themselves and those around them. There is also a form of equipment from guard equipment.

1. Safety helmet
2. Acts as head guard from items that can hurt the head.
3. Safety belts
4. Acts as a safety device when using transfer equipment.
5. Earmuffs
6. Serves as earplugs when working in a noisy place.
7. Safety glasses
8. Serves as eye protection when working from splashes.
9. Face guard
10. Acts as a face guard while on duty.
11. Face mask
12. Acts as an air filter that is sucked in places where the air quality is not good.

So, based on the safety requirements for the activity above, it can be concluded that the K3 mission in the activity area includes the following:

1. In order to achieve the maximum health benefits for both employees, farmers, fishermen, state employees, or casual workers.
2. To prevent and eradicate disease and accidents caused by activities, it is necessary to maintain and improve the health of the abilities and energy production capacity of activities and increase the excitement and enjoyment of activities.

 

So, there is a lot to discuss about K3, one of which is the principles of K3. Not only that, there are also K3LH principles. The K3LH Principles book will make it easier for readers to understand K3LH.

That is the explanation of the meaning of K3, up to the mission of K3. If Sinaumed’s is interested in reading more about other information, then Sinaumed’s can find out more by visiting our website or by reading books. As #Friends Without Limits,  sinaumedia.com provides various quality and original books for Sinaumed’s.

Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Mochamad Aris Yusuf

Source: 

• https://disnakertrans.bantenprov.go.id/Berita/topic/288#:~:text=Pengertian%20K3%20According%20Keilmuan%20Safety, fire%2C%20explosion%20and%20pollution %20environment.
• https://temank3.id/page/detail_news/5/62e5d2b779e51361bec18520e075af19
• https://www.sases-k3.com/pengertian-maksud-dan-purpose-k3-dalam-environment-work/
• https://spkep-spsi.org/2022/01/18/pengertian-k3-keselamatan-dan-kesehatan-kerja-yang-harus-kamu-ketahui/
• https://viramakarya.co.id/xs-content/uploads/2018/02/1-Kebijakan-Pemerintak-about-K3.pdf

Junk Food is – With the times and rapid technological advances, it is now very easy to do something. In addition, this also plays a role in changing patterns and lifestyles of humans at this time. One example is the increasing number of ready-to-eat foods, also known as junk food or fast food .

Junk food has recently become one of the most popular foods among young people, are you one of them? This food is also very diverse, ranging from snacks to main meals. Junk food as an informal term applied to several foods which are then considered to have little or no nutritional value at all.

Then, actually what is meant by junk food and what are the types. In this article, we will explain more about junk food, from the definition to its types. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Junk Food

Junk food is a term used to describe food with a high content of calories, fat, sugar and salt. However, the content of vitamins and fiber in junk food can be considered very low. Usually, junk food also contains various food additives (BTP), such as sweeteners, flavors and preservatives.

Not only that, junk food also contains high fat and salt, for example, hamburgers, pizza, fried chicken, french fries which are then served without fruit and include vegetables and various types of chips.

Generally, these foods contain saturated fat which can cause various risks of obesity and if consumed too much can cause health problems. In fact, high salt levels exceed the salt levels needed by the body can also trigger high blood pressure.

Examples of junk food that contains high sugar include soft drinks, donuts, candy, and cakes. Sugar that is too high can also cause damage to teeth and diabetes. Junk food is not good if consumed continuously, so it needs to be replaced by eating healthy food. Examples of healthy foods include various fruits, vegetables, and nuts such as soybeans, red beans, and almonds. So, have you started to eat healthy food today?

Types of Junk Food and Their Dangers

1. Burgers

The first famous junk food in Indonesia is burgers. This food can be said to have very little nutritional value, and is loaded with everything that is bad for health. Burgers available in fast food restaurants have also been linked to obesity, heart disease, and various other health problems. Therefore, it is not recommended to consume these foods too often.

2. French Fries

The next famous junk food in Indonesia is French fries. These snacks have been around for hundreds of years. Even so, this one food is still considered bad if people consume it too often. Basically, any food that is fried using vegetable oil will have a negative impact on health.

Therefore, french fries fried in vegetable oil will contain quite a lot of unsaturated fats. These unsaturated fats will produce cancer free radicals in the body. What’s more, french fries tend to contain a cancer-causing chemical called acrylamide. So, don’t eat French fries too often, Sinaumed’s.

3. Ice Cream

Who doesn’t know ice cream, food made from milk and various other ingredients that are loved by people of all ages, from children to adults. Ice cream is also very delicious especially when consumed when the weather is hot. However, behind the pleasure, ice cream also contains a lot of calories and sugar that is no less than a bottle of soda.

Ice cream becomes even more dangerous when mixed with milk and made into milkshakes. Especially if it is made into a milkshake, then you are said to have consumed around 1,000 calories.

4. Donuts

Plain donuts don’t contain many calories, and they don’t harm your body. However, now donuts have many flavors and contain lots of sugar. If you only consume one, maybe it won’t be a problem, but it’s a different matter if you consume it in large quantities.

But in reality, the average individual then consumes two to three donuts. You need to remember that in a donut that contains no nutrients at all, which will make the consumer feel hungry. In fact, consuming donuts in excess can cause obesity.

5. Pizzas

The most popular fast food in Indonesia is pizza. This food is also often served mixed with lots of cheese, meat, sauces, and many other ingredients, with a content of 600 calories per slice .

Because, these foods then contain saturated fat, sodium, and high carbohydrates. If this typical Italian food is consumed too often, it can have a negative impact on health, the most famous of which often triggers obesity.

6. Fish Nuggets

These fish nuggets are often given by parents to their children. This may not be good if given too often let alone in large quantities. If you want to be healthy, eat fish that is really fresh, and don’t choose fish that has been processed like this. Remember, the average processed fish contains a lot of preservatives, especially if consumed by frying.

7. Hot Dogs

This long beef-covered bun is then mixed with a little mayonnaise, chili sauce, and tomato sauce, which also contain unhealthy ingredients for the body.

Hot dogs are also directly related to an increased risk of heart disease, cancer and diabetes. In this case, what becomes a problem is not only the meat in the food, but the high levels of salt and preservatives that are often used. If you really want to eat these foods, you should also choose organic ones, with low fat and sodium content.

8. Cheese Sticks

Next, although the cheese itself is not so harmful to health. But it will be a problem if this cheese is then mixed with breadcrumbs and fried. This is because in a cheese stick there is also fat and sodium which is very high and is definitely very harmful to the body. So, it is not recommended to make cheese sticks as a daily snack, especially for children.

9. Fried

Who doesn’t like fried foods, especially those served hot. But did you know that fried food has dangers for its connoisseurs? This fried food also has a very high calorie, fat and oil content. So, if consumed in excess, can trigger cancer.

10. Canned Food

Foods that are processed in the form of cans, be it fruit, vegetables, meat, and so on, are not good for consumption every day. This is due to the large amount of nutrients that have been damaged in the canning process. On the other hand, canned food also contains a lot of preservatives which are not good for liver health. So, from now on we have to reduce canned food, Sinaumed’s.

11. Potato Chips and French Fries

Who doesn’t like fried potatoes that have a savory taste. Even though it is very tasty, if you consume too many french fries, it can cause excess weight gain or you can say make someone obese. This can happen because of the content of acrylamides compounds which are carcinogenic and appear when burned and fried.

12. Cakes, Biscuits and Pastries

Foods that are usually sold in this packaged form should also be reduced or avoided. This is because this food is made from wheat flour with added sugar and butter which contains saturated fat. If you consume too much, it can lead to obesity and various other diseases.

13. Instant Noodles

Instant noodles can be considered as a food that is relatively cheap, easy to make, and of course very tasty, so it is not good for continuous consumption. What’s more, instant instant noodles contain translucent which can exacerbate blood vessels.

The Danger of Junk Food for Health

If the body consumes too much low-nutrient food, it will cause health problems, as well as if you eat too much junk food. Here below are some of the dangers of junk food for health.

Disturbing Heart Health and Stroke

This fast food will increase bad cholesterol and saturated fat. This will then trigger a blockage of the arteries. This condition will also cause heart attacks and strokes.

Increases High Blood Pressure

Junk food can cause hypertension because these foods contain high sodium or salt. Therefore, usually the taste of fast food has a salty taste. If consumed in excess, it can cause an increase in high blood pressure and trigger heart disease.

Increases Cancer Risk

The next danger of fast food is that it can cause cancer, especially colon cancer. Some foods that can increase the risk of this disease include sausages, smoked meats, and bacon.

Cause Diabetes

Diabetes can also be caused by excessive consumption of junk food . This is because food contains high calorie content, while fiber and vitamins are low. These foods can then quickly cause other sugar levels to rise.

The content of trans fats in junk food can be said to be quite a lot, so it can cause fat accumulation in the abdominal area. This will then make insulin not work optimally. Thus, sugar in the blood is also difficult to control and increases the risk of diabetes.

Disturbing Kidney Function

Another danger of junk food is that it can interfere with kidney function. This can happen because of the high sodium content in it. Therefore, if consumed in excess it will interfere with the performance of the kidneys in filtering toxins in the blood.

Damage to Liver Organs

Consumption of fast food then damages the liver. Excessive consumption of low-nutrient foods can also cause disturbances in the stomach tissue in the liver. This will then make the liver work not optimal.

Makes Teeth Damage Quickly

Fast food generally contains high sugar. This turns out to be causing the teeth to become damaged quickly. Because sugar makes the pH of the mouth more acidic. This acid content will also cause plaque and cause the enamel on the teeth to be damaged.

Closing

It is a common thing that junk food is very delicious, but behind that pleasure there are dangers that can interfere with the health of the body. Therefore, there have been many studies that say that you have to reduce your consumption of junk food.

Thus the discussion about junk food along with its dangers to the health of the body. Hopefully all of the discussion above can open Sinaumed’s’ insight into junk food . Even though it’s dangerous, if you don’t consume it excessively, it’s still okay.

If you want to find various kinds of books about healthy food, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Sofyan

Source: From various sources

Recommended Books Related to Junk Food

Food Combining: Healthy Food Combinations For Slim And Healthy

Books on matching food combinations, or more popularly known as Food Combining , have been written by so many followers around the world. Most of them are those who have experienced illness and cannot recover medically but are healthy again after adopting this diet. Unfortunately, the books written about this diet apart from being in foreign languages, the instructions are more suitable for the lifestyle of Westerners.

Adapted to the lifestyle and eating patterns of the Indonesian people, this book on the Perfect Food Combination provides knowledge about the right diet, which is in harmony with the body’s digestive cycle. With an eating pattern that utilizes the body’s natural instincts, you don’t need to count calories, let alone reduce food portions.

You just need to know when to eat and what combinations go well. Naturally the body will achieve and maintain its ideal body weight; Your health and fitness will also remain excellent. Inside is also equipped with information on combinations of foods that are compatible and not compatible along with examples of daily menus and recipes, making it easier for beginners to implement this eating pattern.

Healthy & Healing Longevity Recipes

“My Plate” is a balanced nutrition portion guide that has been proclaimed by the Ministry of Health of the Republic of Indonesia. 50% of the plate portion is filled with fresh vegetables and fruit. Then, how to combine fresh vegetable concoctions (which are not “salads”) with healthy side dishes? What about the skills of selecting, preparing and processing food which for today’s generation feels burdensome? This book is the answer. The educational description is concise, light, with reliable references so that it gives weight to why certain food ingredients are chosen, how to mix them properly, and what kind of processing method maintains the nutritional quality of the food.

Guaranteed to make healthy food for the family easy and fun, without losing the delicious taste that spoils the tongue. The Recipe Book for Longevity, Health & Healing —which was published ten years ago, and has been reprinted many times—has undergone many changes and is accompanied by the latest nutritional information. Simple but not poor in taste, easy but not lost in practicality, this book comes with 32 recipes for fresh vegetable concoctions and 40 recipes for side dishes with real spices without having to add sugar and cooking oil let alone refined products.

Healthy But Delicious, 25 Healthy Recipes Based on the Properties of Food Colors

“Honestly, if I may say that healthy food is not delicious. Why? Because good food is synonymous with fatty food.” This healthy and delicious food menu is what I will try to present to readers. In this cookbook I try to suggest some tricks and ways to cook so that we can still enjoy the food we like with a better nutritional offer. – Sheila Gondowijoyo –

“A healthy lifestyle includes proper diet, regular exercise and adequate rest. Diet is a point that is quite influential on the level of people’s health.”

As the host of DAPUR NUTRITION on Kompas TV, the author wants to teach how to cook healthily and correctly by reducing the use of sugar and salt, and especially eliminating the use of MSG (vetsin).

When I met Sheila Gondowijoyo—one of the best chefs who graduated from Melbourn (Australia)—the writer felt that she had met the right partner, because Sheila also had the same vision, namely wanting everyone to be able to cook healthily. – John Sunardi –

Also read: